Umschlag f. Internet
english
Z
Catalogue
2007
SYSTEMS FOR
TIME, LIGHT, CLIMATE
f ro m
specialists
Thomas Goes
from specialists
for specialists
for specialists
Modern times: The market changes while the world is changing.
Providers become “single-source suppliers” providing products and services from A to Z.
And who, in the age of the global competition, really wants to admit that there are some things
that he cannot deliver?
It is precisely our strength that we cannot fulfill all requirements. In contrast to many others,
Theben focuses on a small number of special fields in which the company proves and has already
proven many times its competence: time, lighting and climate control. Based on the 85 years of
experience, competence and permanent innovative strength, Theben has produced real classics –
such as the stairway-light timers and time switches.
Of course everything “Made in Germany”: Because at Theben everything from the development to
the production and distribution is done in-house. A passion that pays off: for Theben and for the
many satisfied users who appreciate our products for their simple operation, high quality and
excellent design.
Whatever solution you are looking for: Theben offers customized, practice-oriented solutions for
all applications – precisely “from specialists for specialists”.
We are glad to be able to offer you – apart from various other new products – especially our new
digital time switch generation TR top2.
These highly innovative time switches have additional outstanding performance features, which
will convince you in every respect.
Thomas Goes
Chairman
Contents
Analog time switches
Digital time switches
Time relay
Stairway-light time switches
Distribution cabinet installation
Twilight switch
Astronomic time switch
Presence detector
Digital plug-in time switches
Analog plug-in time switches
Personal protection and overvoltage protection plug
Runtime meter
Analog clock thermostats
Digital clock thermostats
Clock thermostats for electric floor heating
Digital clock thermostats with radio control unit
Digital clock thermostats for 2- or 3-point control
Heating control, weather-compensated
Zone regulation/clock thermostats
Room thermostats
Room thermostats
Actuators for single room regulation
Hygrostats
CO2 sensor (USB)
Short-time and cooling time switches
Connection diagrams Thermostats
Distribution cabinet installation
Front panel/Wall mounting
Distribution cabinet installation
Front panel/Wall mounting
Flush mounting
Distribution cabinet installation
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
10–13
14–20
21–30
31–32
33
34–35
Flush mounting
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
36–37
38–42
43–47
48–49
50–51
52–57
58
59
60
Distribution cabinet installation
Wall mounting
Distribution cabinet installation
Ceiling mounting
Front panel/Distribution
cabinet installation
Wall mounting
Wall mounting/Flush mounting
Wall mounting
Wall mounting
Wall mounting
Wall mounting
Distribution cabinet installation
Wall mounting
Flush mounting
Wall mounting
Wall mounting
Wall mounting
Page
61–63
Page
64–65
Page
66–71
Page
72
Page
73–75
Page
76-77
Page
78-79
Page
80
Page 81, 83, 84
Page
82, 85
Page
86
Page
87
Page
88
Page
89
Page
90–91
LUXOR living comfort control units
PHARAO/PHARAO-II compact control units
and peripheral units
EIB/KNX switching/dimming/heating actuators/
binary inputs
EIB/KNX Venetian blinds actuators
EIB/KNX thermostats and thermal actuators,
heating actuators
EIB/KNX motorized actuators
EIB/KNX time transmitters
EIB/KNX digital time switches
EIB/KNX brightness sensors
EIB/KNX weather station
EIB/KNX motion/presence detectors
EIB/KNX secondary clocks
EIB/KNX system components
Distribution cabinet installation
Page
92–99
Distribution cabinet installation
Page
100–105
Distribution cabinet installation
Distribution cabinet installation
Page
Page
106–109
110–111
Distribution cabinet installation
Distribution cabinet installation
Distribution cabinet installation
Wall mounting
Ceiling mounted
Wall mounting
Distribution cabinet installation
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
112–115
116
117
118–120
120–121
122
123–125
126–127
128–129
Time switch modules
Front panel mounting
Page
130–131
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
132–133
134–145
146
147
148–149
150
151
Meaning of the pictograms/Terminology
Offer and specification texts
Special voltages
Selection table Time switches
Agencies
Discontinued models
Order form for advertising material
3
You can find these appliances on the following ●
p ages:
New
51
●
●
42
●
●
9
3
●
38
●
A
36
●
SELEKT
50
40
46
●
44
●
43
● ●
ELPA
48
New
LUNA
12
●
●
11
10
●
20
●
●
16
21
●
●
22
26
●
31
●
A
TERMIN
ULEIKA
S
/
A
N
O
SYNCHR
New
68
●
New
66
●
64
●
81
●
●
82
S
RAMSE
●
94
●
59
●
58
N TI
PLUG-I
4
MER
60
●
92
●
LUXOR
94
●
97
●
New
New
●
122
New
New
●
110
●
108
TROL
N
O
C
D
OL/BLIN
R
T
N
O
LIGHT C
●
123
●
121
52
●
e/
SPHINX
●
127
●
120
●
118
28
●
33
●
126
●
OSIRIA
e/
●
113
NTROL
O
C
M
-ROO
SINGLE
●
e/
78
●
116
●
116
114
80
●
●
112
●
New
●
102
●
102
96
●
O
PHARA
104
●
INDUST
RIA
COUN
R
U
O
H
L
TERS
63
●
34
●
62
●
AG RE
/TIME L
LAYS
131
●
130
●
ENTS
N
O
P
M
ITCH CO
W
S
E
TIM
5
Theben AG
Your specialist partner!
The philosophy
Theben
The abilities of Theben AG lies in solutions for time,
lighting and climate control. Within time switching
devices, modules or bus-systems, Theben produces
the highest quality products in every range. Theben
offers not only time switches in analog and digital
technology with classical switch tappets or segments, but also microprocessor-controlled digital
devices that offer hours, days, weeks and years
programs and an extensive program of sensors and
actuators for the EIB bus technology. On top of this
Theben is well known for its stair light and twilight
switches and for its clock thermostats that allow a
power-saving heating control.
Theben offers its clients a tailored solution for all
for all applications and situations. Theben AG has
branches in Germany, Great Britain, France, Italy
and Switzerland and is one of the leading producers
of time switching devices and systems.
A worldwide presence in more than 53 countries
with market leading high-quality products form the
basis for continual growth. Theben products are
very well-known for their user-friendly operation,
a high product quality and a first rate design.
The company is certified according to the international DIN ISO 9001 standardisation.
We are an autonomous, independent, internationally operating company with a high potential
of innovation and a great many profitable ideas and
concepts for the future.
Our core competency encompasses the control and
regulation of time, light and climate.
We are recognized specialists, especially when it
comes to timer devices and other intelligent
systems.
Our goals are innovation, high functionality,
best quality, dependability, continuity and
calculability.
We are a dependable and competent partner
to our customers, offering competitive products
and services.
The Theben company aims to serve, and
conscientiously supports the personal as well as
the occupational qualification and development
of its staff members.
REG. NR. 1688-01
6
T.O.P. Service!
...because we have a comprehensive
dealership network
...because we stand for highest quality
Guaranteed by a 100 % final test.
We use exclusively the best and most reliable
components.
...because even low quantities are not more
expensive
No supplements for low quantities.
...because technical experts are at your
service
Quick assistance by our specialists as well by fax
+49(0)7474/692-207 and
eMail: [email protected]
[email protected]
or at regional offices please see page 126
Sabine Fauler
Tino Schlaich
Theben is T.O.P. ....
...because we offer a quick service
Service department offering competitive prices
for repairs after the expiry of the warranty period
or sending you the requested spare parts – even
for units we do not have in our present range
any more – to satisfy your customer’s needs as
quickly as possible. If you have any problem,
please do not hesitate to contact us, we are
pleased to assist you.
...because we provide you with information
all around the clock
All around the clock you can find operating
instructions and other information free of charge
on the internet with the possibility for printout –
www.theben.de
...because a constantly updated product
data base is available for you on the
internet
EIB product database for free downloading and
on CD ROM
...because you can find all important information within seconds on CD ROM
CD ROM with product datas, leaflets, operating
instructions, EIB manuals, demo software and
learning software for OBELISK and PHARAO
programs.
Available free of charge – Order No. 907 0 183
...because texts for tenders are available
digitally as well
Texts for tenders in different file formats on CD
ROM and in the internet:
www.theben.de/downloadseite.htm
...because we offer trainings near your
facilities
Central trainings by our own specialists and
peripherally at our partners near your facilities
upon request.
...because at the trade fairs you learn everything about Theben-innovations
7
www.theben.de
INTERNET
Faster, better, clearer
Contact
8
Information
Product groupe
The quick survey makes it easier
to find the right product and
offers alternatives.
Product
All important information
at a glance…
Downloads
Operating instructions
Brochures
Manuals
Simulations
etc.
9
Din rail program
j
Time switches with segments (1 module)
Function:
• Time switches with 24-hour or 7-day segmented
index ring
• Programming via 15-minute segments during the
daily program
• Programming via 2-hour segments during the
weekly program
• 3-position manual switch: ON/OFF/AUTO
• 16 A/250 V~ NO contact
• Switching state display
SYN 160 a SYNCHRONA
• Synchronous with mains
• Without power reserve
• Day program
SYN 160 a
SUL 180 a
SUL 180 a SULEIKA
• Quartz time base
• With power reserve
• Power reserve cell replaceable
• Day program
MEM 190 a MEMPHIS
• Quartz time base
• With power reserve
• Power reserve cell replaceable
• Week program
7d 24 h
Common technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Special voltages: see appendix
Frequency: 45–60 Hz, 50 Hz for SYN 160 a
Device consumption: approx. 2.5 VA
Contact: potential-free, opening width <3 mm (µ)
Contact material: Hard silver
Switching capacity: 16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
4 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Time base: Quartz, synchronous with mains for 160 a
Accuracy: ≤ ± 1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: approx. 3 days at 20 °C
Models SUL 180 a and MEM 190 a
Full power reserve:
approx. 3 days after connection to operating voltage
Admissible ambient temperature:
–25 °C...+50 °C (SYN 160 a)
–10 °C...+50 °C (SUL 180 a/MEM 190 a)
Housing and insulation material:
self-extinguishing thermoplasts of high temperature
resistance
Protection class: II according EN 60 730-1 when
mounted according to its designated use
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60 529
Weight: approx. 120 g
Test approvals: national and international
depending on device type V O CUUS
M
2 1
L N
L
N
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
Terminal cover
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 17.5 x 60 mm
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm top-hat rail
(EN 50022)
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover,
tamper proofing
• Control panel installation using
mounting kit no. 907 0 001
• Undetachable hinged cover, sealable
65.5
60
90
128
*
45
17.5
34*
55.5*
*with mounting kit
Type
Program dial
Power reserve
approx.
Programmable
every...
Minimum
switching interval
Switching
segments
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
SYN 160 a
24 h
–
15 min
15 min
96
1 NO contact
16 (4) A
160 0 001
SUL 180 a
24 h
3d
15 min
15 min
96
1 NO contact
16 (4) A
180 0 001
MEM 190 a
7d
3d
2h
2h
84
1 NO contact
16 (4) A
190 0 001
Terminal cover for surface mounting, tamper proofing
10
907 0 065
Din rail program
j
Time switches with segments (3 modules)
Function:
• Time switches with or without power reserve
• 24 hour dial with 30 min segments or
60 min dial with 75 s segments
• Early manual over-ride switching for on and off without
influencing the subsequent program sequence
• Permanent ON/OFF switch
• Switching status indication
• Fine adjustment for time setting accurate to the minute
• Summer/Winter time correction ±1 hour by the
bi-directional fine time adjustment facility
• Operating indication
TM 171 h TEMPORA
• Without power reserve
• Short-time program
SYN 161 h/SUL 181 h
SYN 161 h SYNCHRONA
• Without power reserve
• Day program
24 h 60
60 min
min
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ± 10 %
Special voltages: see appendix
Permissible ambient temperature:
–20 °C...+50 °C
Device consumption: max. 2.5 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: hard silver
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature-resistant, fireproof thermoplastics
Enclosure type: IP 20 in accordance with
EN 60529
Protection class: II in accordance with
EN 60 730-1 if installed as directed
Test approvals: national and international
depending on device V W
Quartz time switches with power reserve:
Drive: quartz-controlled stepping motor
Mains frequency: 45–60 Hz
Accuracy: ≤ ± 1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: approx. 3 days at 20 °C
Full power reserve:
approx. 3 days after connection to operating voltage
Weight: approx. 150 g
SUL 181 h SULEIKA
• With power reserve
• Day program
Synchronous time switches:
Drive: synchronous motor
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Accuracy: depends on mains frequency
Weight: approx. 135 g
M
TM 171 h
1 2 3
7 8
L
N
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
Terminal cover
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 54 x 60 mm
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm top-hat rail
(EN 50 022)
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover,
tamper proofing
• Control panel installation using
mounting kit no. 907 0 001
• Undetachable hinged cover, sealable
*
*
*with terminal cover
Type
Program dial
Power reserve
approx.
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
switching interval
Switching
segments
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TM 171 h
60 min
–
75 s
75 s
48
1 changeover switch
10 (4) A
171 0 008
SYN 161 h
24 h
–
30 min
30 min
48
1 changeover switch
16 (4) A
161 0 008
SUL 181 h
24 h
3 days
30 min
30 min
48
1 changeover switch
16 (4) A
181 0 008
Terminal cover for surface mounting, tamper proofing
907 0 061
11
Din rail program
Time switches with tappets (3 modules)
Function:
• Time switches with or without power reserve
• Day, week or short-time programs
• Early manual over-ride switching for on and off without
influencing the subsequent program sequence for device
type "h"
• Switching status indication
• Permanent ON/OFF switch for device type "h"
• Fine adjustment for time setting accurate to the minute
• Summer/winter time adjustment ±1 hour by the
bi-directional fine time adjustment facility for device
type "h"
• Operating indication
SYN 168 h/SUL 188 h
TM 178 TEMPORA
• Without power reserve
• Short-time program
SYN 168 SYNCHRONA
• Without power reserve
• Day program
SUL 188 SULEIKA
• With power reserve
• Day program
j
7 d 24 h 60 min
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ± 10 %
Special voltages: see appendix
Device consumption: max. 2.5 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: hard silver
Switching capacity: see page 19
in brackets: cos ϕ = 0.6
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature-resistant fireproof thermoplastics
Permissible ambient temperature:
–20 °C... +50 °C
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Protection class: II in accordance with
EN 60 730-1 if installed as directed
Test approvals: national and international
depending on device type W V
Quartz time switches with power reserve:
Drive: quartz-controlled stepping motor
Mains frequency: 45–60 Hz
Accuracy: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: approx. 3 days at 20 °C
Full power reserve:
approx. 3 days after connection to operating voltage
Weight: approx. 175 g
Synchronous time switches:
Drive: synchronous motor
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Accuracy: depends on mains frequency
Weight: approx. 150 g
TM 178 h
SYN 168 hw/SUL 188 hw
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
Terminal cover
*
*
* with terminal cover
12
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 54 x 60 mm
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm top-hat rail
(DIN EN 50 022)
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover,
tamper proofing
• Control panel installation using
mounting kit no. 907 0 001
• Undetachable hinged cover, sealable
Din rail program
j
Time switches with tappets (3 modules)
7d
MEM 198 h MEMPHIS
• With power reserve
• Week program
MEM 198 h
C1
C2
1 2 3
4 5 6
M
1 2 3
7 8
M
7 8
24 h
7d
1 2 3
4 5 6
L
N
L
N
L
N
TM 178 h, SYN 168 h, SUL 188 h, MEM 198 h
SYN 168 g, SUL 188 g
SYN 168 hw, SUL 188 hw
red
Order No.
934 3 260
➀ ➁ on
➁ ➂ off
red
Order No.
934 3 260
➃ ➄ and ➄ ➅
alternately
on – off
blue
Order No.
934 3 280
➁ ➂ on
➀ ➁ off
blue
Order No.
934 3 280
➀ ➁ and ➁ ➂
alternately
on – off
white
➀ ➁ – ➁ ➂ and ➃ ➄
and ➄ ➅
jointly* or
alternately on – off
Order No.
934 3 262
yellow
Order No.
934 3 287
➀ ➁ and ➁ ➂
alternately
on – off
segments
➃ ➄ and ➄ ➅
alternately
on – off
M
7 8
*Switching differences (moment of switching) of up to 5 min
are possible for the 24 h dial in the event of simultaneous
actuation of the 2 contacts by the white tappet.
Type
Program dial
Power reserve
approx.
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
switching interval
Tappetcomplement
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TM 178 h
60 min
–
37,5 s
ca. 2 min
3 x blue
3 x red
1 changeover switch
10 (4) A
178 0 008
SYN 168 h
24 h
–
15 min
30 min
3 x blue
3 x red
1 changeover switch
16 (4) A
168 0 008
SYN 168 g
–phasedown–
24 h
–
15 min
30 min
4 x blue
4 x red
2 x white
2 changeover switches
10 (4) A
168 0 033
SUL 188 h
24 h
3 days
15 min
30 min
4 x bue
4 x red
1 changeover switch
16 (4) A
188 0 008
SUL 188 g
24 h
3 days
15 min
30 min
4 x blue
4 x red
2 x white
2 changeover switches
10 (4) A
188 0 033
MEM 198 h
7 days
3 days
1h
4h
7 x blue
7 x red
1 changeover switch
16 (4) A
198 0 008
SYN 168 hw
–phasedown–
24 h
7 days
–
15 min
12 h
45 min
12 h
6 x yellow
14 fixed segments
2 changeover switches
(24 h/7 d)
10 (4) A
168 0 108
SUL 188 hw
24 h
7 days
3 days
15 min
12 h
45 min
12 h
6 x yellow
14 fixed segments
2 changeover switches
(24 h/7 d)
10 (4) A
188 0 108
Terminal cover for surface mounting, tamper proofing
907 0 061
13
Wall/panel mounting
Time switches with tappets, front frame 72 x 72 mm
Function:
• Can be switched to day and week program
(Patent no. DE 3708611 C1)
• Early ON/OFF over-ride switching without influencing
the subsequent program sequence on device type "h".
• Permanent ON/OFF switch, e.g. for holidays, on device
type "h"
• Switching status indication
• Clock hands can be reset for switching over between
summer/winter time on device type "h"
SYN 269 SYNCHRONA
• Without power reserve
• Day or week program selectable
SYN 269 h/SUL 289 h
SUL 289 SULEIKA
• With power reserve
• Day or week program selectable
j
7d 24 h
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Special voltages: see appendix
Device consumption: max. 2.5 VA
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C ... +50 °C
Time setting:
analog with clock hands, also possible anti-clockwise
Switching time setting: with tappets
Contacts: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: hard silver, gold-plated
Switching capacity:
Type "h": 10 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
2 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Type "g": 10 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
2 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Housing and insulating material:
High-temperature, fireproof thermoplastics
Electrical connection:
screw terminal or 4.8 mm tab connectors
Protection class: II in accordance with
EN 60730-1 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Quartz time switches with power reserve:
Drive: quartz-controlled stepping motor
Mains frequency: 45–60 Hz
Accuracy: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: approx. 3 days at 20 °C
Full power reserve:
approx. 3 days after connection to operating voltage
Weight: approx. 260 g
Synchronous time switches:
Drive: synchronous motor
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Accuracy: depends on mains frequency
Weight: approx. 300 g
SYN 269 g/SUL 289 g
Dimension drawings
Design:
• Front frame 72 x 72 mm (DIN 43 700)
• Switch panel mounting with clip fastening.
Connection either with tab connectors (4.8 mm)
or with screw terminals using the plug-in base.
• Surface mounting with Softline housing tube and
plug-in base.
• Can also be mounted on a 35 mm top-hat rail with
additional parts or on PC board with plug connector.
• Transparent cover protects against dirt and
unintentional adjustment
For mounting possiblilities, see page 17.
14
Wall/panel mounting
j 24 h
Time switches with tappets, front frame 72 x 72 mm
7d
Changing the program 24 hours/7 days
1. Remove the dial.
2. Adjust the time until groove in yellow ring
and groove in green ring coincide.
3. Slide the drive pin outwards to position "7 d".
4. Turn the dial over and refit it with the week
scale facing outwards.
5. Single and double channel versions available.
M
1 2 3
7 8
C1
C2
1 2 3
4 5 6
L
N
L
N
SYN 269 h/SUL 289 h
SYN 269 g/SUL 289 g
red
Order No.
934 3 236
➀ ➁ on
➁ ➂ off
blue
Order No.
934 3 111
➁ ➂ on
➀ ➁ off
M
7 8
red
Order No.
934 3 236
➃ ➄ and ➄ ➅
alternately
on – off
blue
Order No.
934 3 111
➀ ➁ and ➁ ➂
alternately
on – off
white
Order No.
934 3 235
➀ ➁ – ➁ ➂ and ➃ ➄
and ➄ ➅ jointly*
or alternately
on – off
*Switching differences (moment of switching) of up to 5 minutes
are possible for the 24 h dial and up to 30 min. for the 7 day
dial in the event of simultaneous actuation of the 2 contacts by
the white tappets.
Type
Program dial
Power reserve
approx.
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
switching interval
Tappet
complement
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
SYN 269 h
24 h
7 days
–
5 min/
30 min
20 min/
2h
16 x blue
16 x red
1 changeover switch
10 (2) A
269 0 008
SYN 269 g
24 h
7 days
–
5 min/
30 min
20 min/
2h
17 x blue
17 x red
15 x white
2 changeover switches
10 (2) A
269 0 033
SUL 289 h
24 h
7 days
3 days
5 min/
30 min
20 min/
2h
16 x blue
16 x red
1 changeover switch
10 (2) A
289 0 008
SUL 289 g
24 h
7 days
3 days
5 min/
30 min
20 min/
2h
17 x blue
17 x red
15 x white
2 changeover switches
10 (2) A
289 0 033
15
Wall/panel mounting
j
Segment time switches, front frame 72 x 72 mm
Function:
• 24 hour dial with segments of 15 min switching time
each
• Switching preselection for early switching on or off by
hand The next opposite program command cancels the
manual switching again
• Easy programming by folding down the segments e. g.
for the desired duty cycle
• Permanent ON/OFF switching, e.g. for holidays
• Changeover contact 10 A/250 V~
• Switching status indication
• Clock hands can be reset for switching over between
summer/winter time
SYN 169 s SYNCHRONA
• Without power reserve
• Day program
SYN 169 s
SUL 189 s SULEIKA
• With power reserve
• Day program
24 h
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Device consumption: max. 2.5 VA
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C... +50 °C
Time setting: analog with clock hands, also possible
anti-clockwise
Contacts: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: hard silver, gold plated
Switching capacity: 10 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
2 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature-resistant, fireproof thermoplastics
Electrical connection: screw terminal or
4.8 mm tab connectors
Protection class:
II in accordance with EN 60 730-1 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Test approvals: W
Quartz time switch with power reserve
Drive: quartz-controlled stepping motor
Mains frequency: 45–60 Hz
Accuracy: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: approx. 3 days at 20 °C
Full power reserve:
approx. 3 days after connection to operating voltage
Weight: approx. 260 g
Synchronous time switch
Drive: synchronous motor
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Accuracy: depends on mains frequency
Weight: approx. 225 g
SUL 189 s
M
1 2 3
7 8
L
N
Dimension drawings
Design:
• Front frame 72 x 72 mm
• Switch panel mounting with clip fastening. Connection
either with tab connectors (4.8 mm) or with screw
terminals using the plug-in base
• Surface mounting with plug-in base and terminal cover
• Can also be mounted on a 35 mm top-hat rail with
additional parts or on PC boards with plug connector
• Transparent cover protects against dirt and
unintentional adjustment.
Type
Program dial
Power reserve
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
switching interval
Switching
segments
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
SYN 169 s
24 h
–
15 min
15 min
96
1 changeover switch
10 (2) A
169 0 801
SUL 189 s
24 h
3 days
15 min
15 min
96
1 changeover switch
10 (2) A
189 0 801
16
Mounting possibilities
Time switches
Front panel installation
Wall mounting
Distribution panel installation
possible with accessory:
snap-on mounting for
35 mm top-hat rail
Order No. 907 0 071
PC board installation
possible with accessory:
multiple connector for PC board
Order No. 907 0 066
17
Wall/panel mounting
Time switches with tappets, front frame 72 x 72 mm
Function:
• Day, week or short-time program
• Over-ride switching for ON/OFF, without influencing
the subsequent program sequence on device type "h".
• Switching status indicator
• Operating indication
TM 179 h TEMPORA
• Without power reserve
• Short-time program
SUL 189 hw SULEIKA
• With power reserve
• Day program with weekday selection
SUL 189 hw
j
7d 24 h 60 min
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Device consumption: max. 2.5 VA
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C ... +50 °C
Time setting:
analog with clock hands, also possible anti-clockwise
Switch time setting: with tappets
Contacts: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: hard silver, gold-plated
Switching capacity: 10 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
2 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature-resistant, fireproof thermoplastics
Electrical connection: screw terminals or
4.8 mm tab connectors
Protection class: II in accordance with
EN 60730-1 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Test approvals: national and international
depending on device type W
Quartz time switches with power reserve:
Drive: quartz-controlled stepping motor
Mains frequency: 45–60 Hz
Accuracy: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: approx. 3 days at 20 °C
Full power reserve:
approx. 3 days after connection to operating
voltageWeight: 205 g
Synchronous time switches:
Drive: synchronous motor
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Accuracy: depends on mains frequency
Weight: approx. 180 g
TM 179 h
Dimension drawings
Design:
• Front frame 72 x 72 mm
• Switch panel mounting with clip fastening. Connection
either with tab connectors (4.8 mm) or with screw
terminals using the plug-in base.
• Surface mounting with plug-in base and terminal cover
• Can be mounted on a 35 mm top-hat rail with
additional parts or on PC boards with plug connector.
• Transparent cover protects against dirt and
unintentional adjustment
For mounting possibilities see page 17.
18
Wall/panel mounting
j
Time switches with tappets, front frame 72 x 72 mm
24 h
7d
1 2 3
4 5 6
7d 24 h 60 min
M
M
1 2 3
7 8
L
N
L
N
SUL 189 hw
TM 179 h
7 8
red
Order No.
934 3 311
➀ ➁ on
➁ ➂ off
red
Order No.
934 3 260
➀ ➁ on
➁ ➂ off
blue
Order No.
934 3 035
➁ ➂ on
➀ ➁ off
blue
Order No.
934 3 280
➁ ➂ on
➀ ➁ off
segments
➃ ➄ and ➄ ➅
alternatly
on – off
Type
Program dial
Power reserve
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
switching interval
Tappet
complement
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
SUL 189 hw
24 h
7 days
3 days
15 min/
12 h (segments)
30 min/
12 h
3 x blue
3 x red
14 fixed segments
2 changeover switches 10 (2) A
(24 h/7 d)
189 0 108
TM 179 h
60 min
–
18,5 s
1,25 min
3 x blue
3 x red
1 changeover switch
179 0 008
10 (2) A
Order No.
19
Wall mounting
j
Tariff time switch 1–2 channels
SUL 285 SULEIKA
Function:
• Day program
• Minimum switching interval 20 min
• Programmable every 5 min
• Or can be switched to day and week program
• Week program with minimum switching interval 2 hours
• Programmable every 30 min
• Switching status indication
• Clock hands can be reset for switching over between
summer/winter time
SUL 285
M
1 2
C1
M
3 4 5
1 2
C1
C2
3 4 5
6 7 8
L
N
L
N
SUL 285/1 T, SUL 285/1 TW
SUL 285/2 T, SUL 285/2 TW
Maßbilder
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 110–230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 45–60 Hz
Device consumption: max. 2.5 VA
Permissible ambient temperature: –10 °C...+50 °C
Time setting:
analog with clock hands, also possible anti-clockwise
Switching time setting: with tappets
Contacts: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: hard silver, gold-plated
Switching capacity: 6 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
2 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Drive: quartz-controlled stepping motor
Accuracy: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: approx. 3 days at 20 °C
Full power reserve:
approx. 3 days after connection to operating voltage
Housing and insulating material:
hight-temperature, fireproof thermoplastics
Electrical connection:
screw terminals
Protection class:
II in accordance with EN 61038 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 54 in accordance with EN 60529
Weight: approx. 475 g
Design:
• Front frame 175 x 105 x 74 mm
• Housing with 3-point fixing for wall
mounting and terminal cover mounting
• Screw clamps for 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
• Tamper proof transparent cover
• Accumulater exchangeable from front
side (pluggable)
• Space for power supplier’s reference
74
175
121.5
6.5
105
7d 24 h
84.5
101.5
Type
Program dial
Power reserve
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
switching interval
Tappet
complement
Switching contact
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Ordrer No.
SUL 285/1 T
24 h
150 h
5 min
20 min
16 x blue
16 x red
1 changeover switch
6 (2) A
285 0 008
SUL 285/2 T
24 h
150 h
5 min
20 min
16 x blue
16 x red
2 changeover switches
6 (2) A
285 0 033
SUL 285/1 TW
24 h
7 days
150 h
5 min/
30 min
20 min/
2h
16 x blue
16 x red
1 changeover switch
6 (2) A
285 0 108
SUL 285/2 TW
24 h
7 days
150 h
5 min/
30 min
20 min/
2h
16 x blue
16 x red
2 changeover switches
6 (2) A
285 0 133
20
Din rail program
7d 24 h ±1h
Digital time switch 1 channel (1 module)
TR 608 top TERMINA ®
Function:
• Step by step operator guidance by an integrated text
line on the LCD display
• Week program
• 28 memory locations with free block formation and
separate programming of the switching on and off times
• Easy handling by 4 keys and step by step operator
guidance by an integrated text line on the LCD display
(see page 32 TERMINA 610 top)
• Guided copying of the switching times to other days of
the week
• Switching preselection
• Permanent switching ON/OFF
• Automatic summer/winter time changeover can be
alternatively switched off or randomly programmed
(MEZ, GB, USA changeover norm selectable)
• Lithium cell easily replaceable
• PIN code
TR 608 top
Menu
Menu
ok
auto
Menu
ok
+
ok
+
ok
+
ok
Technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Special voltages: on request
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: approx. 2.5 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching capacity: 16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
6 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Incandescent lamp load: 1000 W
Halogen lamp load: 1000 W
Fluorescent lamps:
non-compensated, series comp. 800 VA,
parallel comp. 200 VA (18 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps:
7 x 7 W, 6 x 11 W, 5 x 15 W, 5 x 20 W, 5 x 23 W
Time basis: quarz
Working precision: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Shortest switching time: 1 minute
Switching precision: exact to the second
Display: LCD display (text line, time, weekday, holiday
program, switching status, manual switching)
Operating control elements:
4 touch keys and 1 reset key
Power reserve:
3 years with display and full controllability (temp. 20 °C)
by means of an environmentally friendly lithium battery
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C...+50 °C
Enclosure and insulation material: high-temperature
resistant, self-extinguishing thermoplastics
Protection class:
II in compliance with EN 60730-1 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60529
Weight: ca. 85 g
Test approvals: V
M
ok
ok
1 2 3
L N
L
N
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
Terminal cover
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 17.5 x 60 mm
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm top-hat rail (DIN EN 50022)
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover,
tamper proofing
• Control panel installation using
mounting kit no. 907 0 001
• Undetachable hinged cover, sealable
*with terminal cover
Type
Program
Memory locations
Power reserve
Programmable
every ...
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TR 608 top
1 channel
24 h
7 days
28
3 years
1 min
1 changeover switch
16 (6) A
608 0 002
Terminal cover for built-on installation, can be fitted with a leaded seal
907 0 065
21
Din rail program
Digital time switch 1–2 channels (2 modules)
7d 24 h ±1h I
Digital time switches with text-oriented user
guidance in the display, OBELISK interface and
plug-in terminals.
New
Functions:
• Daily and weekly program
• Operating by means of 4 keys arranged in one row
• Integrated running-time meter for max. 500.000 hours
with reset option and service function for monitoring of
maintenance intervals and „Service“ display, separately
for each channel
• Plug-in spring terminals, each one accepting 2 conductors, wires or strands
• Display illumination (can be switched off)
• Interface for OBELISK top2 memory card for PC
programming, 2nd switching program to be plugged in,
copying of programs and safe storage of the program
• Date-controlled holiday program
• Extended temperature range –30 °C ... +55 °C
• High accuracy: ±0,5 s/day
• 10 years power reserve by lithium cell
• Zero cross switching for relay-saving switching and high
lamp loads
• Switching preselection
• Permanent switching ON/OFF
• PIN encoding
TR 610 top2
TR 610 top2 TERMINA ®
• 1 channel with 56 memory locations, EEPROM
TR 612 top2 TERMINA ®
• 2 channels with 56 memory locations, EEPROM
New
TR 611 top2 TERMINA ®
• 1 channel with 84 memory locations, EEPROM
• Puls program, cycle program, countdown timer
• Selection of 2 different random programs
• External control input (diff. functions can be selected)
• OBELISK top2 memory card included in the delivery
TR 622 top2
C1
C2
TR 622 top2
Ext 1 Ext 2
1 2 3
4 5 6
L N
L
N
TR 612 top2 / TR 622 top2 (2 channels)
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
63
52,5 *
*with terminal cover
22
45
90
128 *
35,8
55 *
Pulse
II
Cycle
Ext.
RC
PC
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230–240 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: typ. 6 VA
Contact: potential-free
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power:
16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1;
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0,6
Incandescent lamp load: 2600 W
Halogen lamp load: 2600 W
Flourescent lamps:
non compensated, series compensated 1000 VA,
parallel compensated 730 VA (80 µF)
Compact flourescent lamps: 22 x 7 W, 18 x 11 W,
16 x 15 W, 16 x 20 W, 14 x 23 W
Time basis: quartz and/or DCF77 radio-control
Accuracy: ≤ ±0,5 s/day at 20 °C
Shortest switching interval: 1 minute (puls/cycle 1 s)
Switching accuracy: split-second
Display: backlit LCD display with text line
Operating elements: 4 touch keys
Power reserve:
about 10 years with autosleep allowing full operation
(temp. 20 °C) by non-polluting lithium cell
Admissible ambient temperature:
–30 °C...+55 °C
Housing and insulation material:
self-extinguishing thermoplasts with high temperature
resistance
Protection class: II according EN 60730-1 subject to
installation as intended
Protection time: IP 20 according to EN 60529
Weight: approx. 170 g
See page 30 for installation instructions.
TR 611 top2 RC TERMINA ®
identical with TR 611 top2, however
• DCF77 radio-controlled via an external aerial
• Power supply unit for aerial integrated in the device
• Aerial connection with safety extra low voltage,
protection class III
• OBELISK top2 memory card included in the delivery
TR 622 top2 TERMINA ®
• 2 channels with 84 memory locations, EEPROM
• Puls program, cycle program, countdown timer
• Selection of 2 different random programs
• 2 external control inputs (diff. functions can be selected)
• OBELISK top2 memory card included in the delivery
Terminal cover
68,5
auto
Aerial top2 RC-DCF
Design
• Standarrdized housing 45 x 35 x 60 mm according to
DIN 43880
• Quick fastening for 35 mm profile rail (DIN EN 50022)
• Contact protection according to accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Top mounting with additional terminal cover, sealable
• Control panel installation using mounting kit
No. 907 0 001
• Undetachable hinged cover with possibility of keeping
the memory card OBELISK top2, sealable
Din rail program
7d 24 h ±1h I
Digital time switch 1–2 channels (2 modules)
auto
Pulse
II
Cycle
Ext.
RC
PC
Plug-in spring terminals
OBELISK top2 interface
External 230 V AC control input
• Quicker and simpler wiring, safe connection
• For each terminal, 2 conductors, wire or strand can be
connected, strand with or without cable end sleeves
• Connection cross-section 0.5–2.5 mm2
• Actuator button for disconnecting the plug-in
connection available
• Test point for simple voltage check
• Easy wire entry thanks to 45° entry angle
• Dual programming which allows you to run a second
program as long as the OBELISK top2 is plugged in.
• It is possible to copy the program from the time switch
to the memory and vice versa, which allows you to
create program copies for additional time switches.
• Polling of the plugged-in memory card possible, without
changing the program memorized in the time switch.
• Archiving of the memory card in the sealed cover
possible.
• For each channel, it is possible to connect a switch or
several buttons to the external control input of the time
switch. The control input allows the following five
functions to be called: Permanently ON, Permanently OFF,
switching preselection, countdown timer (hour glass
function) and channel release (activation of the time
switch).
• For corridor or stairway lighting with time-controlled
permanent light phase, a button-controlled short-time
lighting may be activated outside of this permanent light
phase. In the stairwell, several buttons can be connected
in parallel to the input.
• The circulation pump for the household water is programmed in accordance with its use in the morning, at
lunchtime and in the evening. Outside of these periods,
warm water circulation can be activated for some minutes
by means of a button in the kitchen and bathroom. This
allows to save energy and increases comfort.
PC software
OBELISK top2 programming kit
• Clearly structured and easy to understand: The additional OBELISK top2 PC software allows you to create
switching programs comfortably on your own computer.
Even complicated programs can be created within
minutes by mouse click.
• A program created on the PC by means of the convenient OBELISK top2 software can be transferred via USB
interface to the OBELISK top2 memory card and from
the card to the time switch and vice versa. Thus no PC
or laptop is required on-site. Programming and the
program printout can thus be done comfortably from
the desk.
Type
TR 610 top2
1 channel
TR 612 top2
2 channels
TR 611 top2
1 channel
TR 611 top2 RC
1 channel
TR 622 top2
2 channels
Program
24 h/7 d,
runtime meter, holiday
program
24 h/7 d,
runtime meter,
holiday, pulse and
cycle program,
countdown timer,
2 random programs
The switch-on phases are clearly displayed in a chart and
automatically recorded in a table. Thus it is possible to
save, print or export the programs to Excel for the
individual customers.
Memory
locations
Programmable
every ...
Control
inputs
Memory card OBELISK top2
included in the delivery
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
56
1 min
–
–
1 changeover
switch
16 (10) A
610 0 100
56
1 min
–
–
2 changeover
switches
16 (10) A
612 0 100
84
1s
1
yes
1 changeover
switch
16 (10) A
611 0 100
84
1s
1
yes
1 changeover
switch
16 (10) A
2 changeover
switches
16 (10) A
84
1s
2
yes
OBELISK top2 programming kit (memory card, plug-in adapter, software) for Windows 2000/XP
OBELISK top2 memory card (single)
Aerial top2 RC-DCF max. 5 TERMINA top2 devices can be connected, for dimensional diagram see page 30
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
611 0 300
Available as of 08/2007
622 0 100
907 0 409
907 0 404
907 0 410
907 0 064
23
Din rail program
Digital time switches 1–2 channels
– phasedown–
By means of text-oriented operator guidance
you are guided step by step through the entire
programming.
TR 610 top
Function:
• Day/week program
• Operator guidance by an integrated text line on the
LCD display
• Programming is shown graphically by a means of a
bar chart on the LCD display
• Preset ex-works – time (CET) and automatic summer/winter time changeover
• Summer/winter time changeover can be alternatively
switched off or randomly programmed (GB, USA
changover norm selectable)
• High number of memory locations
• Guided copying of the switching times to other days
of the week (random block formation)
• Sorting of the switching times in memory by the day
of the week
• Switching preselection
• Permanent switching
• Lithium battery and EEPROM
• TR 611/622 top with LCD backlighting
• PIN code
TR 610 top TERMINA ®
• 1 channel with 28 memory locations
TR 612 top TERMINA ®
• 2 channels with 42 memory locations
TR 611 top
TR 611 top DCF
TR 611 top TERMINA ®
• 1 channel with 42 memory locations
• Holiday switching and random function
• Pulse and cycle program
TR 611 top DCF TERMINA ® as TR 611 top, but
• DCF77 radio controlled
• DCF power unit integrated
• External DCF antenna connectable (touchable low
voltage)
7d 24 h ±1h I
auto
Pulse
II
Cycle
DCF77
Common technical specifications:
Rated voltage: 230–240 V~, +6 %/–10 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Own consumption: max. 6 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power: 16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps:
non compensated, series compensated 1000 VA,
parallel compensated 400 VA (42 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps:
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Time basis: quartz
Working precision: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Shortest switching time: 1 minute (pulse/cycle 1 s)
Switching precision: exact to the second
Display: LCD display with text line
Operating control elements:
4 touch keys and 1 reset key
Power reserve: approx. 10 years with display with
full controllability (temp. 20 °C) by means of an
environmentally friendly lithium battery
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C...+50 °C
Enclosure and insulation material:
high-temperature resistant, self-extinguishing
thermoplastics
Protection class: II in compliance with
EN 60730-1 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in compliance with EN 60529
Weight: appox. 170 g
Test approvals: V W S CUUS
See page 30 for installation
instructions.
TR 622 top TERMINA ®
• 2 channels with 42 memory locations
• Holiday switching, random function and pulse
program separate for each channel
• Cycle program for channel 1
TR 622 top
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
*
*
*with terminal cover
24
*
Aerial DCF77
Terminal cover
Design:
• Standard enclosure 45 x 35 x 60 mm
• Quick fastening facility for 35 mm DIN rail (EN 50022)
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Built-on installation with an additional terminal cover
which can be fitted with a leadable seal
• Switch panel installation complete with installation kit
no. 907 0 001
• Captive hinged cover which can be fitted with a
leadable seal
Din rail program
Digital time switches 1–2 channels
7d 24 h ±1h I
–phasedown–
auto
II
Pulse
Cycle
DCF77
TR 610 top (1 channel)
Factory preset time and date
TR 611 top/TR 611 top DCF (1 channel)
Factory preset time and date
TR 612 top/TR 622 top (2 channels)
Factory preset time and date
Programs
• Day and week program
• For standard programs
• 28 memory locations
Programs
• Day and week program
• For more extensive programs
• 42 memory locations
Programme TR 612 top
• Day and week program
• For standard programs
• 42 memory locations
Connection diagram TR 610 top/TR 611 top/
TR 611 top DCF*
Special functions
• Holiday program: Programmed via start and end dates
• Pulse program for bell or break signals, can be set
accurately to the minute, pulse duration 1–59 s
• Cycle program, e.g. water flushing device in toilet
facilities (1 s–99 min pulse duration and pause time)
• Random switching – during the random program
controlled by the time window, the operating time
varies within a range of 10–120 minutes
Programme TR 622 top
• Day and week program
• For more extensive programs
• 42 memory locations
• Pulse program, programmable for each channel
separately
• For school bell and break signals – pulse duration
1–59 s
• Cycle program, can be programmed on 1 channel e.g.
water flushing device in toilet facilities
• Random switching
Connection diagram TR 652 S see page 27.
M
DCF77*
1 2 3
L N
L
N
Übersicht der Menüebenen
TR 611/622 top
TR 610/612 top
Menu
Menu
ok
Menu
ok
+
*
ok
+
Menu
ok
ok
+
*
Menu
ok
+
+
+
ok
ok
+
+
ok
+
ok
+
+
ok
+
+
+
+
*only TR 611/622 top
*only TR 622 top
Type
Program
Memory
locations
Power reserve
(Lithium)
Programmable
every ...
LCD
backlighting
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TR 610 top
1 channel
24 h
7 days
28
10 years
1 min
–
1 changeover switch
16 (10) A
610 0 002
–phasedown–
TR 612 top
2 channels
24 h
7 days
42
10 years
1 min
–
2 changeover switches
16 (10) A
612 0 002
–phasedown–
TR 611 top
1 channel
24 h/7 days
random switching, holiday
program, pulse
and cycle
program
42
10 years
1 min
yes
1 changeover switch
16 (10) A
611 0 002
–phasedown–
42
10 years
1 min
–
1 changeover switch
16 (10) A
611 0 312
–phasedown–
42
10 years
1 min
yes
2 changeover switches
16 (10) A
622 0 002
–phasedown–
TR 611 top DCF
1 channel
TR 622 top
2 channels
Aerial for DCF77 radio signal max. 5 TERMINA top devices can be connected, dimension drawings see page 30
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
907 0 243
907 0 064
25
Din rail program
Digital time switches 1–3 channels (3 modules)
TR 651 S
7d 24 h ±1h I
auto
Pulse
TR 651 S, TR 652 S, TR 653 S Termina ®
Function:
• Installation friendly digital time switch with times set at
the factory (Central European Time) and programmed
automatic Summer/Winter time change.
• Day, week and short program 1–59 s
• 140 memory locations with free block formation of
weekdays
• The pulse program can also be combined with day and
week program, e.g. for response time 7 h, 59 min, 37 s
or a switching interval of 7 min, 23 s for signal
switching
• Fully automatic summer/winter time adjustment in
accordance with central european, GB or USA switching
rules.
• The holiday program for interruption of the automatic
program during 1...45 days can be programmed up to
3 weeks in advance.
• Operator prompting by means of flashing symbols on
the display.
• Early manual over-ride switching for on and off. The
next contradictory program command cancels the
manual switching.
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage:
TR 651 S/652 S: 230–240 V~, +6 %/–10 %,
TR 653 S: 230 V~, ±10 % or 240 V~, +6 %/–10 %
Frequency: TR 651 S/652 S: 50–60 Hz
TR 653 S: 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Power consumption:
approx. 7 VA (TR 653 S approx. 14 VA)
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching capacity:
TR 651 S/652 S: 16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
TR 653 S:
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
6 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Time base: Quartz
Memory locations: 140
Accuracy: ≤ ± 1 s/day at 20 °C
Minimum switching time: 1 min/1 s
Switching accuracy: accurate to the second
Display: LCD display (time, weekday, pulse time, 1 x
switching times, holiday program, switching status and
permanent control)
Power reserve: approx. 8 years with display in full
operation (temperature 20 °C) by means of an environmentally friendly lithium battery
Admissible ambient temperature: –10 °C...+50 °C
Enclosure and insulation material:
high-temperature resistant,
self-extinguishing thermoplastics
Protection class:
II in compliance with EN 60 730-1 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in compliance with EN 60 529
Test approvals: national and international
depending on device type V W
Weight: approx. 250 g
Terminal cover
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 54 x 60 mm
• Quick fastening facility for 35 mm DIN rail
(EN 50 022)
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Built-on installation with an additional terminal cover
which can be fitted with a leadable seal
• Switch panel installation complete with installation kit
no. 907 0 001
• Captive hinged cover which can be fitted with a
leadable seal
TR 652 S
TR 653 S
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
65,5
70,5*
*with terminal cover
26
45
60
86
128*
54
55*
Din rail program
7d 24 h ±1h I
Digital time switches 1–3 channels (3 modules)
M
1 2 3
L N
auto
C1
C2
1 2 3
4 5 6
M
L N
C1
C2
1 2 3
4 5 6
C3
7 8
Pulse
M
L N
L
N
L
N
L
N
TR 651 S (1 channel)
Time set at factory
TR 652 S (2 channels)
Time set at factory
TR 653 S (3 channels)
Time set at factory
Program TR 651–653 S:
Pulse program:
In the case of pulse commands for a duration of 1–59
seconds, the start of the pulse is entered as with normal
switching commands, and then the pulse duration in
seconds is added, e.g.: Mon–Fri 7:05 am signalling
for 15 seconds.
Pulse commands can be programmed as ON or OFF
switching pulses and have priority over normal commands. This offers the following additional possibilities:
Delayed switch-on:
Switch-on can be delayed by 1–59 seconds with an
additional OFF pulse command, e.g. 35 s ON at 7 am
or for staggered switch-on of channels.
Day, week and pulse program:
Switching times can be set accurate to the second.
Thanks to the pulse program, it is also suitable for pause
signals or controlling sole-noid valves etc.
Memory locations:
140 memory locations can be distributed as required over
1, 2 or 3 channels, in addition to day, week or pulse
commands .
Blocking:
Free blocking of the days of the week
(even in the case of pulse commands) permits the
possible switching configurations to be duplicated.
Switching times which can be set accurate to the second.
Prolonged switching times:
Switching times can be prolonged by 1–59 seconds with
an additional ON pulse command, e.g. switching duration
7 min 25 s
Interrupting switch-on phases:
OFF pulse commands permit brief interruptions of
switch-on phases.
1x switching commands:
For public holidays for instance, switching commands can
be entered as a one-time switching operation, and this
operation is executed only once and then deleted
automatically. Switch-on commands on holidays or public
holidays can be suppressed once for instance. One-time
switching commands can be entered a maximum of 7
days in advance.
Type
Program
Memory
locations
Power reserve
(Lithium)
Programmable
every ...
Special
functions
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TR 651 S
1 channel
24 h
7 days
1–59 s pulse
140
8 years
1 min/
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
1 changeover
switch
16 (10) A
651 0 001
TR 652 S
2 channels
24 h
7 days
1–59 s pulse
140
8 years
1 min/
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
2 changeover
switches
16 (10) A
652 0 001
TR 653 S
3 channels
24 h
7 days
1–59 s pulse
140
8 years
1 min/
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
2 changeover
switches
1 NO contact
10 (6) A
653 0 001
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
907 0 050
27
Din rail program
year 7d 24 h I PC ±1h
Yearly time switch 1–4 channels (6 modules)
Pulse
Programming and simulation on the PC by means
of the OBELISK programming set is possible as
well as programming manually on the device by
keyboard.
Function:
• 10 standard week programs with ascending priority e.g.
for different programs (public holidays, holidays, seasons)
• The software has a database available containing
holidays that can be loadet as appropriate
• With date correction for holidays in succeeding years.
Integrated calendar until 2070.
• Permanent function ON/OFF programmable for each
channel and date
• Free block formation of channels and weekdays
• Simple programming possible by means of ten key
keyboard or PC
• New simulation of the program on PC with an overview
for the entire year for all channels
• Overview by wiring diagram in the zoom window
exactly to the minute for every channel
• Manual switching is possible by means of override and
permanent switching
• Activatable random program
• Programming possible even without power supply
• High battery reserve with lithium cell, easily replaceable
from the front
TR 641 S
TR 644 S
®
TR 641 S TERMINA
• 1 channel
• Calendar controlled automatic summer/winter time
adjustment
auto
DCF77
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230–240 V~, +6%/–10%
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 8 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching capacity: 16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Time base:
TR 641 S/642 S/644 S: quartz
TR 641 S/642 S/644 S DCF: quartz/DCF 77 time signals
Accuracy: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C or DCF77 synchronous
Shortest switching time: 1 minute/1 second
Switching accuracy: accurate to the second
Display: LCD-display
Operating control elements: 15 touch keys
Power reserve:
1.5 years at full operation (temp. 20 °C) by means of an
environmentally friendly lithium cell. Data security, when
switched off, approx. 10 years by means of EEPROM.
Permissible ambient temperature:
Time switch: –10 °C... +50 °C
Aerial: –10 °C... +70 °C
Max. aerial distance: 200 m
Housing and insulating material: high temperatureresistant, self extinguishing thermoplastics
Protection class:
II in accordance with EN 60730-1, if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60529
Weight: time switch approx. 500 g
Test approvals: V W S (TR 644 S/TR 644 S DCF)
®
TR 641 S DCF TERMINA , radio controlled
• 1 channel
• Automatic time synchronisation and summer/winter time
adjustment. Separate mains component and additional
DCF77 antenna
• Mains supply unit and DCF77 required additionnally
TR 644 S DCF, radio controlled
PC programming kit OBELISK
OBELISK memory card
with EEPROM for
program transfer between
PC and time switch
®
TR 642 S TERMINA
• as TR 641 S, but with 2 channels
®
TR 642 S DCF TERMINA , radio controlled
• as TR 641 S DCF, but with 2 channels
®
TR 644 S TERMINA
• as TR 641 S, but with 4 channels
®
Aerial for DCF77 radio signal, see page 30
TR 644 S DCF TERMINA , radio controlled
• as TR 641 S DCF, but with 4 channels
standard plug-in adapter
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
65,5
45
60
86
128*
105
125*
*with terminal cover
28
Terminal cover
55*
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 105 x 60 mm
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm top-hat-rail (EN 50022)
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover,
tamper prooofing
• Panel mounting with installation kit No. 907 0 001
• Transparent cover, tamper proofing
Din rail program
year 7d 24 h I PC ±1h
Yearly time switch 1–4 channels (6 modules)
Programming with OBELISK 2.1
Pulse
Public holidays
Simple and individual programming with the help of the
holiday data base. Also variable holidays only need to be
programmed once, since the date adjustment for the
subsequent years takes place automatically via the time
switch. Integrated calendar until 2070.
auto
DCF77
2
1
Easy installation:
Easy programming
By choice, with both versions, the whole switching
program can be effected at your desk with WINDOWS on
the PC by using the additional OBELISK 2.1 program kit.
The complete time program can be printed in tabular form.
Programming with the mouse
Bring up on the screen with the mouse the required fields
e.g. channel 2 and 3, ON, on Tuesday. By scrolling the
hours and minutes, set the switching time to the exact
minute and confirm with OK – ready.
Simulation of the time program
To obtain a quick overview, an entered switching program
can be displayed in the form of a graph. You first receive
an overview for the entire year for all channels. By clicking
the desired day and channel, you receive an overview in
the zoom window exactly to the minute.
1 Plug the interface of the OBELISK-plug adaptor into the
serial part of your PC.
2 Push on the OBELISK memory card.
3 Install the OBELISK software on the PC.
4 Necessary PC 486 or PENTIUM with WINDOWS
95/98/2000/NT/XP. Available capacity on two hard discs
about 4 MB.
5 Program can be read from PC into the memory card
OBELISK and from there be transferred into the time
switch. The OBELISK memory card may now serve as
back-up or for program transfer from time switch to
time switch.
Standard week programs
In addition to the standard program, additional programs
for public holidays, holidays, varying seasons or
“Open Day” can be created. Each program is allotted a
precedence rating. The higher precedence rating has
priority. The priority program is filed in the memory and
can be activated, when required, by entering the start and
end date.
3
OBELISK
4
5
Type
Program
Memory
locations
Power reserve
Programmable
every ...
Special functions
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TR 641 S
1 channel
24 h/7 d/year
1–59 s pulse
324
1.5 years
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
1 changeover switch
16 (10) A
641 0 001
TR 641 S
DCF
1 channel
radio controlled
24 h/7 d/year
1–59 s pulse
324
1.5 years
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
1 changeover switch
16 (10) A
641 0 301
(without aerial
+ power unit)
TR 642 S
2 channels
24 h/7 d/year
1–59 s pulse
324
1.5 years
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
2 changeover
switches
16 (10) A
642 0 001
TR 642 S
DCF
2 channels
radio controlled
24 h/7 d/year
1–59 s pulse
324
1.5 years
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
2 changeover
switches
16 (10) A
642 0 301
(without aerial
+ power unit)
TR 644 S
4 channels
24 h/7 d/year
1–59 s pulse
324
1.5 years
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
4 changeover
switches
16 (10) A
644 0 001
TR 644 S
DCF
4 channels
radio controlled
24 h/7 d/year
1–59 s pulse
324
1.5 years
1s
1x switching
1...7 days for
holiday setting
4 changeover
switches
16 (10) A
644 0 301
(without aerial
+ power unit)
Power unit for Aerial DCF77, standard housing 45 x 35 x 60 mm according to DIN 43880
Terminal cover TR 644 S for top mounting, sealable
Programmierset OBELISK (memory card, intermediate plug for PC interface, software)
OBELISK memory card (single)
Aerial for DCF77 radio control, required for radio controlled devices. Max. 5 devices can be connected per aerial. No power supply required.
907 0 182
907 0 053
907 0 230
907 0 165
907 0 243
29
Din rail program
Front kit plate for products installed in distributions panels
Function:
• The front plate kit is suitable for Theben products
installed in distribution panels with overall width of
17.5 to 107.5 mm
• Wall thickness of 1 to 5 mm.
• Easy installation.
Front panel cut-out
b
Fronttafeleinbausatz
Installation:
• Prepare switch panel cut-out dimensionally, see the
accompanying table.
• Shorten fixing components to the housing width.
• Install fixing components in the front plate
cut-out, insert product and fix with 2 clamping screws.
a
Front panel
Product width
Width a
Height b
17.5 +0.5
35 +1
52.5 +1.5
70 +2
105 +3
23.5 +0.5
41.1 ±0.2
59 ±0.2
77.1 ±0.2
113.5 ±0.2
46 ±0.2
46 ±0.2
46 ±0.2
46 ±0.2
46 ±0.2
1–5 mm
Type
Front plate kit for devices of 1–6 TE according to DIN 43880
Order No.
907 0 001
Wall mounting
DCF77 Aerial for time switches
DCF77 Aerial
Dimension drawing DIN 43 880
Radio control unit with antenna module for TR
611 DCF, TR 641 DCF –TR 648 DCF, SEL 173 DCF
The THEBEN radio time switch is synchronized automatically to the time standard of the most accurate clock of
the world. The built-in longwave receiver receives the time
telegrams sent every minute by the official time signal
radio station DCF77. The synchronization of the time
takes place after about 2 to 3 as soon as two equally
coded signals are received one after the other. Daily
synchronization takes place overnight. The range of the
radio station DCF77 in Mainflingen near Frankfurt on the
Tree-like antenna connection
Main is approx. 1000 km. For good reception, the
antenna should not be mounted in the cellar or in the
distribution.
It is connected via a separate 2-wire unshielded highvoltage line (max. 100 m), up to five Theben DCF devices
can be connected to. As mounting aid, polarity reversal,
short circuit and interruption of the antenna line are each
displayed optically.
Linear antenna connection
Star-shaped antenna connection
Aerial
DCF77
Aerial
DCF77
Aerial
DCF77
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
DCF device
max. 5 devices
Type
Aerial for DCF77 radio signal
Aerial top2 RC-DCF for DCF77 radio signal
30
max. 5 devices
max. 5 devices
Order No.
907 0 243
907 0 410
Wall/panel mounting
7d 24 h ±1h I
Digital timers 1–2 channels, Front frame 72 x 72 mm
auto
The text-oriented programming gives you a step
by step instruction through the entire programme.
Function:
• Week program
• Operator guidance by an integrated text line on the LCD
display
• Programming is shown graphically by a means of a bar
chart on the LCD display
• Preset ex-works – time (CET) and automatic
summer/winter time changeover
• Summer/winter time changeover can be alternatively
switched off or randomly programmed (GB, USA
changover norm selectable)
• High number of memory locations
• Guided copying of the switching times to other days of
the week (random block formation)
• Sorting of the switching times in memory by the day of
the week
• Switching preselection
• Permanent switching
• Lithium battery and EEPROM
• PIN encoding
TR 635 top
TR 635 top TERMINA ®
• 1 channel with 42 memory locations
• Holiday switching and random function
• Pulse and cycle program
TR 636 top TERMINA ®
• 2 channels with 42 memory locations
• With holiday, random and pulse program separate for
each channel
• Cycle program for channel 1
Pulse
II
Cycle
Common technical specifications:
Rated voltage: 230–240 V~, +6 %/–10 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Own consumption: max. 10 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power TR 635 top:
16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Switching power TR 636 top:
6 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
6 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Incandescent lamp load TR 635 top: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load TR 635 top: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps TR 635 top:
non compensated, series compensated 1000 VA,
parallel compensated 400 VA (42 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps TR 635 top:
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Timing basis: quartz
Working precision: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Shortest switching time: 1 min (pulse/cycle 1 s)
Switching precision: exact to the second
Display: LCD display with text line
Operating control elements:
4 touch keys and 1 reset key
Power reserve: approx. 10 years with display with full
controllability (temp. 20 °C) by means of an
environmentally friendly lithium battery
Permissible ambient temperature: –10 °C...+50 °C
Enclosure and insulation material:
high-temperature resistant, self-extinguishing
thermoplastics
Protection class: II in compliance with EN 60 730-1 if
installed in accordance with regulations
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in compliance with EN 60 529
Test approvals: V
Weight: appox. 170 g
For installation instructions see page 26.
TR 636 top
Dimension drawings
Design:
• Front frame 72 x 72 mm (DIN 43 700)
• Switch panel installation with clamp fixture. Optional
connection with flat plug (4.8 mm) or with screw
terminals when using the plug-in base.
• With additional parts, mounting is possible on a 35 mm
profile rail or with connector strip on PCB.
• Transparent cover
Installation possibilities see page 17.
Type
TR 635 top
1 channel
TR 636 top
2 channels
Program
24 h/7 days, random
switching, holiday program,
pulse and cycle programm
Memory
locations
Power reserve
(Lithium)
Programmable
every ...
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
42
10 years
1 min
1 changeover
switch
16 (10) A
635 0 002
42
10 years
1 min
2 changeover
switches
6 (6) A
636 0 002
31
Wall mounting
7d 24 h ±1h
Digital tariff time switch, 2 channels
auto
TR 685/2 top TERMINA ®
Function:
• Installation-friendly tariff time switch with factory preset
time (central European time) and programmed automatic summer/winter time adjustment
• 2 channels with 42 memory locations which due to free
block formation can be programmed on one, several or
all weekdays. Thanks to EEPROM, maximum fail-safe
operation of the program memory.
• Power reserve approx. 6 years thanks for
environmental-friendly lithium battery
• Control LED for battery change
• Day and week program with minimum switching time of
1 minute
• Simple programming by means of text-oriented operator
• Display and control panel with 90° rotation
• Autosleep
• PIN code
• Switching preselection
• Permanent ON/OFF switching
• Fully automatic summer/winter time adjustment in
accordance with central european, GB or USA switching
rules
• Programming possible even without power supply
TR 685/2 top
M
M
C1
Technical data:
Nominal voltage: 110/230 V~, +6 %/–10 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 10 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching capacity:
8 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
2 A/250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Time base: quartz
Accuracy: ≤ ±0.25 s/day at 23 °C
Shortest switching time: 1 minute
Switching accuracy: accurate to the second
Display: LCD-display
Operating control elements:
4 touch keys + 1 reset key
Power reserve: 6 years at full operation (temp. 20 °C)
Permissible ambient temperature:
–25 °C ... +50 °C
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature-resistent,
self extinguishing thermoplastics
Protection class: II in accordance with EN 61 038
Degree of protection:
IP 54 in accordance with EN 60 529
Weight: approx. 475 g
C2
230V~ 110V~
1 2 1a 3 4 5 6 7 8
L
N
Dimension drawings
Design:
• Front frame 175 x 105 x 74 mm
• Housing with 3-point fixing for wall mounting
and terminal cover mounting
• Screw clamps for 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
• Tamper proof transparent cover
• Accumulater exchangeable form front side (pluggable)
• Stackable housing
• Space for power supplier’s reference
74
175
121.5
6.5
105
84.5
101.5
Type
Program
Memory
locations
Power reserve
(Lithium)
Programmable
every ...
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TR 685/2 top
24 h
7 days
42
6 years
1 min
2 changeover
switches
8 (2) A
685 0 012
32
Flush mounting
7d 24 h ±1h I
Digital time switch, 1 channel
TR 030 top TERMINA ®
Function:
• The new flush mounted digital time switch is perfect for
modernising and new buildings
• Very easy programming by text oriented user guidance
in the display, leading step by step through the
programming
• Day and week programming with 42 memory locations
adjustable to the minute
• Guided copying of the switching times to other days of
the week (free block formation)
• Programming is shown graphically by means of a bar
chart on the LCD display
• Holiday program programmable via date
• Pulse and cycle program
• Random switching can be activated
by pressing of any key
• Automatic summer/winter time changeover can be
alternatively switched off or randomly programmed
(MEZ, GB, USA changeover norm selectable)
• Switching preselection and permanent switching
(permanent)
• Power reserve approx. 10 years by Lithium battery
• Program saving by EEPROM
• PIN code
TR 030 top
1 2 3
L N
L1
N
auto
L2
N
TR 030 top
Menu
Menu
ok
ok
+
Menu
+
ok
ok
ok
+
Menu
ok
ok
+
*
Menu
+
+
ok
+
+
+
ok
ok
+
+
+
Pulse
II
Cycle
Technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: max. 6 VA
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching capacity:
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
10 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps:
non compensated, series compensated 1000 VA,
parallel compensated 400 VA (42 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps: 9 x 7 W,
7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Timing base: quartz
Working precision: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Shortest switching time: 1 min (pulse/cycle 1 s)
Switching precision: exact to the second
Display: LCD display with text line
Operating control elements:
4 touch keys and 1 reset key
Power reserve:
approx. 10 years with display and full controllability
(temp. 20 °C) by means of an environmentally friendly
lithium battery
Permissible ambient temperature: –10 °C...+35 °C
Enclosure and insulation material:
high-temperature resistant,
self-extinguishing thermoplastics
Protection class:
II in compliance with EN 60730-1 if installed
in accordance with regulations
Degree of protection: IP 20 in compliance EN 60529
Weight: approx. 170 g
Test approvals: V F
+
+
ok
*only TR 611/622 top
Dimension drawings
Type
Program
Memory
locations
Power reserve
(Lithium)
Programmable
every ...
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TR 030 top
pure white
24 h/7 days, random switching, holiday program,
pulse and cycle program
42
10 years
1 min/1 s
1 changeover
switch
10 (10) A
030 0 002
33
Din rail program
0.1 s–100 h
Time lag relay
Function:
• Electronic time lag relays, universally insertable, for the
control of automatic timing on the machines, lighting,
ventilation, heating, cabinets, gates etc.
• Precise analog time setting in 7 zones
from 0.1 s to 100 h
• Multi-voltage input for all supply and control voltages
from AC/DC 12 to 240 V
(TM 345 B: AC 24–240 V, DC 24 V),
no wire straps or additional terminals required
• Output with floating change-over contact
• LED for the display of the products status
TM 345 M
B2
TM 345 M multifunction relay
• Latchign rotary switch for the selection of the time zone,
and for the following types of operation:
• Response delay, without control contact
• Wipe contact, without control contact
• Release delay, with control contact
• Pulse former, with control contact
• Response and release delay, with control contact
• Pulse output, with control contact
• Flip-flop, without control contact
TM 345 B
A1/B1
15
A2
16
18
L (L+)
N (L-)
TM 345 B timer relay
• Time lag relay with clock unit function
• Pulse duration and pause time are settable
independently of one another
AC/DC 12–240 V
TM 345 M
Common technical data:
Supply and control voltage:
TM 345 B: AC 24...240 V, DC 24 V ±10 %;
TM 345 M: AC/DC 12...240 V ±10 %
Nominal frequency: 50–60 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 1.5 W (230 V~)
Contact: floating, gap less than < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgNi
Switching capacity:
8 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1; 2000 VA/80 W
Maximum nominal current: 20 A < 10 ms
Minimum nominal current: 10 mA
Electrical service: 105 operation cycles
Mechanical service life: 106 operation cycles
Release value of the nominal input voltage:
< 10.8 V AC/DC (in accordance with EN 61812-1)
Repeating accuracy:
±0.2 % with parameters constant
Permissible ambient temperature at
nominal voltage: –20 °C... +60 °C
Housing and insulation material:
high-temperature resistant, flame retardant thermoplastics
Protection class:
II in accordance with EN 60335-1 if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60529
Weight: 70 g
TM 345 M connection without control contact
B2
A1/B1
15
A2
16
18
A1
A2
15
16
18
S
L (L+)
N (L-)
L (L+)
N (L-)
TM 345 M connection with control contact
TM 345 B
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
Terminal cover
64,5
44
45
81
128*
17,5
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 17.5 x 60 mm
• Snap-on mounting for 35 mm top hat rail (EN 50022)
• Surface-mounted installation with additional terminal
cover, sealable
• Panel mounting with installation kit No. 907 0 001
• Shock protection in accordance with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
55,5*
34*
*with terminal cover
Type
Time range
Function
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
TM 345 M
7 zones
0,1 s...100 h
response delay (AV), wipe contact (EW) and flip-flop (TG) without control contact
release delay (RV), pulse former (IF), response and release delay (VZ), pulse output (WR) with control contact
8A
345 0 731
TM 345 B
7 zones
0,1 s...100 h
pulse duration and pause time are adjustable independently of one another
8A
345 0 730
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
34
907 0 065
Din rail program
0.1 s–100 h
Time lag relay
AC/DC 12–240 V
TM 345 M
TM 345 M multifunction relay
A1 – A2
Input voltage
(Supply voltage)
B1 – B2
Control voltage
15 – 16 – 18 Relay contact
1 min
0.1 min
0.1 h
1s
1h
0.1 s
10 h
t1
5
T
6
7
4
3
8
2
9
1
10
xt
T = 1s x 4 = 4s
IF
RV
Response delay
without control contact
TG
EW
VZ
AV
WR
U
IF
T
RV
Release delay
with control contact
TG
EW
VZ
AV
WR
U
B2
R
T
R
IF
RV
EW
RV
Wipe contact flick contactors
without control contact
TG
EW
VZ
AV
WR
T
R
T
RV
Response and release delay
with control contact
TG
EW
VZ
AV
WR
T
T
T
T
R
WR
IF
U
U
VZ
AV
IF
Flip-flop (timer relay)
without control contact
TG
U
B2
T
T
T
T
R
IF
RV
Pulse former
with control contact
TG
EW
VZ
AV
WR
IF
U
B2
T
RV
Pulse output
with control contact
TG
EW
VZ
AV
WR
U
B2
R
R
TM 345 B pulse generator relay
A1 – A2
Input voltage
(Supply voltage)
15 – 16 – 18 Relay contact
1 min
0.1 min
0.1 h
1s
1 min
0.1 min
1h
0.1 s
0.1 h
1s
1h
0.1 s
10 h
10 h
t1
5
t2
T1
6
7
4
3
A1–A2
T1
8
2
T1
9
xt1
T2
6
7
3
8
2
10
1
T = 1s x 4 = 4s
5
4
9
10
1
15–16–18
xt2
T2
T2
T = 1s x 5 = 5s
35
Flush mounting
t
1h
0.5–20 min
Stairway-light time switch, electronic
New
ELPA 041
New
ELPA 047
ELPA 041 ELPA ®, with multifunction, multi-voltage input,
crossover circuit
Function:
• Electronic stairway-light time switch for flush mounting
• Suitable for retrofitting and new installation
• Switching duration infinitely adjustable from 0.5–20 min
• High accuracy
• Immediately resettable or disconnectable prematurely
• Switches or buttons can be connected, i.e., existing
switches can be used (e.g. for retrofitting)
• Crossover circuit for the protection of the relay contact
• In addition, the crossover circuit protects the luminous
medium, i.e., the life of the luminous medium is
increased
• Multifunction device with selectable functions,
to be set on the device front
- DIP switch 1:
ON = connection for switch
OFF = connection for button
- DIP switch 2:
ON = Current pulse switch function with
release delay (disconnectable prematurely)
OFF = stairway-light function
(immediately resettable)
- DIP switch 3:
ON = 60 min long-term function can be activated
via long button press
OFF = without long-term function
- DIP switch 4:
ON = switch-off pre-warning (double flashing
twice) according to DIN 18015-2 to avoid sudden
darkness
OFF = without switch-off pre-warning
• Button input with max. 30 mA glow lamp load and
electronic overload protection
• Connection for 3 or 4 wires (4 wires with connection for
floor lighting)
• Automatic 3-/4-wire recognition
• Additional control input (only buttons can be connected)
galvanically separated for AC/DC 8…230 V, e.g. for
intercoms
ELPA 041 switch-off pre-warning
10 s
1. warning signal
(double flashing)
60 min
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 220-230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Device consumption: 2 VA
Glow-lamp load: max. 30 mA
Setting range: 0.5 to 20 min, infinitely adjustable
3/4 wire setting: automatic
Resettable: immediately
Duty cycle: 100 %
Contact type: NO contact
Contact: not potential-free
Opening width: < 3 mm
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching capacity at 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 10 A
Switching capacity (fluorescent lamps): 6 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 1800 W
Halogen lamp load: 1800 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated:
1200 VA*
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series compensated:
1200 VA*
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt compensated:
580 VA* (54 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 1000 VA*
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 200 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1200 VA*
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
13 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 5 x 15 W, 5 x 20 W, 4 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material:
self-extinguishing thermoplasts of high temperature
resistance
Admissible ambient temperature:
–25 °C... +45 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60 529:
IP 20
Protection class when mounted in accordance
with its designated use: II
*With marked lamp loads, a switch-off pre-warning
(functions 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12) is not possible!
30 s
2. warning signal
(double flashing)
This switching power is achieved by an electronically
controlled connection of the load in the crossover of
the mains alternating voltage.
Through the permanent optimization of the switch-on
time in the continuous test, more than 40,000
switching cycles were carried out without problems
under full load.
ELPA 047 ELPA ®
• Electronic stairway-light time switch for flush mounting
• Suitable for retrofitting and new installation
• Switching duration infinitely adjustable from 0.5–20 min
• High accuracy
• Immediately resettable
• Crossover circuit for the protection of the relay contact
• In addition, the crossover circuit protects the luminous
medium, i.e., the life of the luminous medium is
increased
• Button input with max. 30 mA glow lamp load and
electronic overload protection
• Connection for 3 or 4 wires (4 wires with connection for
floor lighting)
• Automatic 3-/4-wire recognition
Dimensional drawing:
52
23,5
48,4
adjusted time
(0.5–20 min)
Input
8–230 V AC/DC
Type
Time range
Connection type
Function
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
ELPA 041
0.5–20 min
3- or 4-wire
12 functions, multi-voltage input
10 A (6 AX)
041 0 002
ELPA 047
0.5–20 min
3- or 4-wire
–
10 A (6 AX)
047 0 002
36
Flush mounting
t
Input
8–230 V AC/DC
1h
0.5–20 min
Stairway-light time switch, electronic
60 min
ELPA 041
t
1h
ON
1
2
3
4
OFF
DIP switch 1:
ON = connection for switch
OFF = connection for button
DIP switch 3:
ON = 60 min long-term function can be activated
via long button press
OFF = without long-term function
DIP switch 2:
ON = Current pulse switch function with
release delay (disconnectable prematurely)
OFF = stairway-light function (immediately resettable)
DIP switch 4:
ON = switch-off pre-warning (double flashes twice)
according to DIN 18015-2 to avoid sudden darkness
OFF = without switch-off pre-warning
t
Button functions: Stairway-light time switch
1
ON
8
+1h
>2s
9
0,5...20 min
4
<2s
+1h
+
0,5...20 min
OFF
>2s
>2s
10
0,5...20 min
10 s
1h
30 s
10 s
30 s
Switch functions*: Stairway-light time switch
ON
1h
10 s
30 s
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
+
ON
30 s
>2s
30 s
10 s
0,5...20 min
OFF
12
10 s
OFF
t
ON
0,5...20 min
+
0,5...20 min
ON
>2s
0,5...20 min
OFF
11
0,5...20 min
6
+1h
+
>2s
1h
<2s
<2s
OFF
Switch functions*: Current pulse switch with release delay
t
5
+1h
ON
30 s
>2s
<2s
<2s
ON
1h
10 s
0,5...20 min
OFF
>2s
<2s
OFF
+
ON
30 s
10 s
ON
0,5...20 min
OFF
+
0,5...20 min
3
t
7
0,5...20 min
2
Button functions: Current pulse switch with release delay
t
10 s
0,5...20 min
OFF
30 s
ON
OFF
*Long-term function not switchable
AC/DC
8...230 V
AC/DC
8...230 V
+
+
–
–
4
3
*
B2 B3
B2 B3
B2 B3
N L
N L
L
N
N L
L
N
L
N
ELPA 041 3-wire
ELPA 041 4-wire
ELPA 041 with switch (two-way wiring)
* When a switch is connected, the multi-voltage input
cannot be used
4
3
N L
N L
L
N
L
N
ELPA 047 3-wire
ELPA 047 4-wire
37
Din rail program
1–7 min
Staircase time switch, electromechanic
Function:
• Electromecanical time delay
• Maximum reliability thanks to synchronous motor drive
• Switching period adjustable from 1–7 min
• Tumbler switch for permanent light or minute light
• Tastereingang mit max. 50 mA Glimmlampenlast
• Extremely simple time setting and direct indication of
the delay time on an absolute scale
• Precision mechanics and by that exact switching period
• Not sensitive to faults
• Low device consumption
V
ELPA 8
ELPA 8 ELPA ®
• Preselection switch for 3-wire and 4-wire connection
• 4-wire rising main with connection for loft illumination
• 3-wire rising main without loft illumination
ELPA 9
L
IE G U A R
3
N
ELPA 9 ELPA ®, for retrofitting in already existing systems
• With 3-wire rising main and ground illumination,
but without resetting. Device is no longer permitted
for new systems.
max. 50 mA
L
N
ELPA 9 3-wire
3
auto
i
4
on
n
1–7 min
L
3
L
3
N
4
N
4
Stairway-light time switch with integrated
switch-off pre-warning according to DIN 18 015-2
see page 40.
Additional device switch-off pre-warning
according to DIN 18 015-2 see page 42.
max. 50 mA
L
N
L
N
ELPA 8 3-wire
ELPA 8 4-wire
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
Terminal cover
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 17.5 x 60 mm
• Snap-on mounting facility for 35 mm
top-hat rail (EN 50 022)
• Surface-mounted installation with additional terminal
cover, sealable
• Switch panel installation complete with installation kit
No. 907 0 001
• Contact protection in accordance with the accident
prevention regulation BGV A3
• Large captive terminal screws
64
37
17,5
34*
45
83,5
128*
NT
A
NT
A
GAR
Jahre
year
EE
3
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: max. 1 VA
Glow-lamp load: max. 50 mA
Setting range: 1 to 7 min
3/4 wire setting ELPA 8: yes (rotary switch)
3/4 wire setting ELPA 9: only 3-wire
Resettable ELPA 8: after 30 s
Resettable ELPA 9: no
Switch for permanent light: toggle switch
Contact type: NO contact
Contact: not potential-free
Opening width: > 3 mm
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 16 A
Switching power (fluorescent lamps): 10 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series compensated:
2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt compensated:
1300 VA (70 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 300 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 2000 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
9 x 7 W, 6 x 11 W, 5 x 15 W, 5 x 20 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C... +50 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60 529:
IP 20
Protection class when mounted in accordance
with its designated use: II
Labels: V O
55,5*
*with terminal cover
Type
Time range
Connection type
Switching function
Nominal current
at 230 V~
Order No.
ELPA 8
1–7 min
switchable
3- or 4-wire
resettable, 3-wire or 4-wire
rising main withloft lighting
16 A (10 AX)
008 0 002
ELPA 9
1–7 min
3-wire
not resettable, retrofit model,
rising main withloft lighting
16 A (10 AX)
009 0 001
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
Installation kit for switch panel installation
38
907 0 065
907 0 001
Din rail program
Input
8–240 V AC/DC
Staircase time switch, electronic
ELPA 7 ELPA ®
Function:
• Electronic time delay
• Switching duration infinitely adjustable
from 0.5–20 min
• High accuracy
• Immediately resettable
• Slide switch for permanent light or minute light
• Button input with max. 150 mA glow lamp load and
electronic overload protection
• Connection for 3 or 4 wires (4 wires with connection for
floor lighting)
• Automatic 3-/4-wire recognition
• Additional control input galvanically separated for
AC/DC 8…240 V, e.g. for intercoms
• Terminal assignment as ELPA 8
• Operational safety through high switching performance
V
ELPA 3
ELPA 7
ELPA 3 ELPA ®, as ELPA 7 but
• With multi-voltage input
max. 150 mA
max. 150 mA
AC/DC
8...240 V
AC/DC
8...240 V
B2 B3
3
B2 B3
4
auto
i
on
n 0,5–20 min
L
3
L
3
N
4
N
4
L
N
0.5–20 min
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 220–240 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: 6 VA
Glow-lamp load: max. 150 mA
Setting range: 0.5 to 20 min, infinitely adjustable
3/4 wire setting: automatic
Resettable: immediately
Duty cycle: 100 %
Switch for permanent light: slide switch
Contact type: NO contact
Contact: not potential-free
Opening width: < 3 mm
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 230 V~, cos j = 1: 16 A
Switching power (fluorescent lamps): 10 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series compensated:
2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt compensated:
400 VA (42 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 300 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1500 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature: –25 °C... +50 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60 529:
IP 20
Protection class when mounted in accordance
with its designated use: II
Labels: V
L
N
ELPA 3/ELPA 7 3-wire
Multi-voltage input only at ELPA 3
ELPA 3/ELPA 7 4-wire
Multi-voltage input only at ELPA 3
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
Terminal cover
Design
• Standard housing 45 x 17.5 x 60 mm (DIN 43880)
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm profile rail (DIN EN 50022)
• Top mounting with additional terminal box cover plate
(907 0 065), sealable
• Switch panel installation with installation kit
No. 907 0 001
• Contact protection to comply with accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Large captive terminal screws
65,5
60
45
85,5
128*
17,5
55,5*
34*
*with terminal cover
Type
Time range
Connection type
Switching function
Nominal current
at 240 V~
Order No.
ELPA 3
0.5–20 min
3- or 4-wire
resettable, 3- or 4-wire
rising main with loft lighting
16 A (10 AX)
003 0 002
ELPA 7
0.5–20 min
3- or 4-wire
automatic
resettable, 3- or 4-wire
rising main with loft lighting
16 A (10 AX)
007 0 002
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
Installation kit for switch panel installation
907 0 065
907 0 001
39
Din rail program
7
Stairway-light time switch, electronic (1 TE)
V
ELPA 1
8 9
10
0.5–20 min
6
5
4
3 2
1
ELPA 1 ELPA ®, with multifunction, multi-voltage input,
crossover circuit
Function:
• Switching duration infinitely adjustable from 0.5–20 min
• High accuracy
• Immediately resettable
• Crossover circuit for the protection of the
relay contact
• In addition, the crossover circuit protects the luminous
medium, i.. e. the life of the luminous medium is
increased
• By means of the crossover circuit very high lamp loads
are possible (e. g. 3600 W glow lamp load or a higher
number of energy saving lamps)
• Multifunction device with 10 selectable functions,
adjustable on the device front
- switch-off pre-warning (double flashing twice) The
function can be connected and disconnected on the
device front.
- 60 min long-term function activatable by long button
press. The function can be connected and disconnected on the device front.
- Immediately resettable (stairway light switch) or
disconnectable prematurely (current pulse switch,
current pulse switch with release delay). The function
can be selected on the device front.
- Permanent light
• Button input with max. 150 mA glow lamp load and
electronic overload protection
• Connection for 3 or 4 wires
(4 wires with connection for floor lighting)
• Automatic 3-/4-wire recognition
• Additional control input galvanically separated
for AC/DC 8…240 V, e. g. for intercoms
• Terminal assignment as ELPA 8
• Operational safety by very high switching power (e. g.
3600 W glow lamp load)
ELPA 6
Input
8–240 V AC/DC
60 min
3600 W
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 220–240 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Device consumption: 6 VA
Glow-lamp load: max. 150 mA
Setting range: 0.5 to 20 min, infinitely adjustable
3/4 wire setting: automatic
Resettable: immediately
Duty cycle: 100 %
Switch for permanent light: rotary switch
Contact type: NO contact
Contact: not potential-free
Opening width: < 3 mm
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 16 A
Switching power (fluorescent lamps): 16 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 3600 W
Halogen lamp load: 3600 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 3600 VA*
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series compensated:
3600 VA*
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt compensated:
1200 VA (120 µF)*
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 3600 VA*
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 1000 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1500 VA*
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
34 x 7 W, 27 x 11 W, 24 x 15 W, 22 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature: –25 °C... +50 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60 529:
IP 20
Protection class when mounted in accordance with
its designated use: II
Labels: V
*With marked lamp loads, a switch-off pre-warning
(switch position 2, 4, 7, 9) is not possible!
ELPA 6 ELPA ®, with multifunction, crossover circuit
• as ELPA 1, but without multi-voltage input
For design, dimensional drawing and terminal
cover, see page 39.
ELPA 1/ELPA 6
Functions: Stairway-light timer
t
1
5
+1h
+1h
+
t
6
10 s
<2s
ON
30 s
>2s
7
>2s
8
10 s
30 s
1h
10 s
0,5...20 min
OFF
>2s
0,5...20 min
OFF
+
ON
1h
<2s
ON
0,5...20 min
OFF
>2s
0,5...20 min
4
OFF
OFF
+
0,5...20 min
3
ON
ON
0,5...20 min
2
Functions: Current pulse switch, pulse switch with release delay
10 s
30 s
+1h
<2s
ON
9
+1h
+
<2s
<2s
40
ON
OFF
>2s
10 s
PERM
Permanent ON
>2s
1h
0,5...20 min
10
OFF
>2s
<2s
0,5...20 min
OFF
ON
30 s
ON
OFF
30 s
>2s
1h
10 s
30 s
ON
OFF
Din rail program
7
Stairway-light time switch, electronic (1 TE)
8 9
10
0.5–20 min
6
5
4
3 2
1
Input
8–240 V AC/DC
60 min
3600 W
AC/DC
8...240 V
AC/DC
8...240 V
B2 B3
B2 B3
3
3
4
n 0,5–20 min
n 0,5–20 min
3
4
max. 150 mA
L
N
L
3
N
4
max. 150 mA
3
N
4
max. 150 mA
4
max. 150 mA
ELPA 6 3-wire
Bewegungsmelder
ELPA 1 4-wire
4
L
3
L
N
L
N
ELPA 1 3-wire
L
N
L
3
N
4
L
3
N
L
3
N
4
Bewegungsmelder
L
N
L
4
N
max. 50 mA
max. 50 mA
L
L
L
N
N
ELPA 6 4-wire
ELPA 1/ELPA 3/ELPA 6/ELPA 8 3-wire
ELPA 1/ELPA 6 switch-off pre-warning
adjusted time
(0.5–20 min)
10 s
1. warning signal
(double flashing)
230 V~ ±10 %
N
W
0
0
36
30 s
2. warning signal
(double flashing)
230 V~ ±10%
ELPA 1/ELPA 3/ELPA 6/ELPA 8 4-wire
This switching power is achieved by an electronically
controlled connection of the load in the crossover of
the mains alternating voltage.
Through the permanent optimization of the switch-on
time in the continuous test, more than 40,000
switching cycles were carried out without problems
under full load.
Selection table ELPA series installation devices:
Device type
Order No.
ELPA 8
008 0 002
ELPA 9
009 0 001
ELPA 4 (Pre-warning) ELPA 7
004 0 001
007 0 002
ELPA 3
003 0 002
ELPA 6
006 0 002
ELPA 1
001 0 002
Design
electromechanical
electromechanical
electronic
additional device
electronic
electronic
electronic
electronic
Time setting
Switching power
Incandescent lamp load
Cross over cicuit
Glow lamp load
3-/4-wire
Resettable
Multi-voltage input
Multifunction
Switch-off pre-warning
60 min long-term function
Current pulse switching function
1–7 min
16 A
2300 W
–
50 mA
selector switch
after 30 s
–
–
–
–
–
1–7 min
16 A
2300 W
–
50 mA
only 3-wire
–
–
–
–
–
–
20–60 s
not relevant
2300 W
–
not relevant
not relevant
not relevant
not relevant
not relevant
50 % dimming
not relevant
–
0.5–20 min
16 A
2300 W
–
150 mA
automatic
immediately
–
–
–
–
–
0.5–20 min
16 A
2300 W
–
150 mA
automatic
immediately
8–240 V AC/DC
–
–
–
–
0.5–20 min
16 A
3600 W
•
150 mA
automatic
immediately
–
•
selectable
selectable
selectable
0.5–20 min
16 A
3600 W
•
150 mA
automatic
immediately
8–240 V AC/DC
•
selectable
selectable
selectable
Type
Time range
Connection type
ELPA 1
0.5–20 min
3- or 4-wire
ELPA 6
0.5–20 min
3- or 4-wire
Terminal cover for surface mounting for ELPA, sealable
Installation kit for control panel installation
Function
Nominal current
at 230 V~
Order No.
10 functions, multi-voltage input
10 functions
16 A (16 AX)
16 A (16 AX)
001 0 002
006 0 002
907 0 065
907 0 001
41
Din rail program
20–60 s
Cut-out warning device
ELPA 4 ELPA ®
Function:
• ELPA 4 add-on device for staircase light time switch
ELPA 3/ELPA 8 or other makes
• At the end of the lighting period set with the staircase
light time switch ELPA 3/ELPA 8, ELPA 4 changes to
reduced brightness
• Setting range 20–60 s
• Suitable only for switching incandescent lamps
and 230 V~ halogen lamps
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: 1 VA
Setting range: 20–60 s
Resettable: immediately
Duty cycle: 100 %
Contact type: NO contact
Contact: not potential-free
Opening width: < 3 mm
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 10 A
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W
Housing and insulation material:
self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C... +50 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60 529: IP
20
Protection class when mounted in accordance
with its designated use: II
For design, dimension drawings and terminal
cover, see page 39.
ELPA 4 combined with ELPA 8
max. 50 mA
max. 50 mA
3
L
3
N
4
L
3
L
N
4
L
3
N
4
3
L
L
230 V~ ±10%
N
230 V~ ±10%
ELPA 8 + ELPA 4 3-wire
ELPA 8 + ELPA 4 4-wire
DIN 18015-2
Reduced brightness warning function
recommends the type and minimum
equipment of electrical systems in housing
facilities.
Extract from section 4.2:
In lighting with adjustable automatic
switch-off system, the automatic switchoff system must be provided with a warning function, e. g. dimming down, in order
to avoid sudden darkness.
Type
Time range
% Illumination
100
ELPA 3/ELPA 8
or other
50
ELPA 4
0
Connection type
ELPA 4
20–60 s
3- or 4-wire
Terminal cover for top mounting for ELPA 4, sealable
Terminal cover for top mounting for ELPA 4 + e.g. ELPA 8, sealable
42
Secondary switching
e.g. 0.5–20 min
20 – 60 s
t
Switching function
Nominal current
at 230 V~
Order No.
cutout warning by reduced brightness
10 A
004 0 001
907 0 065
907 0 064
Din rail program
2–100 Lux
Twilight switch
For controlling the lighting facilities of streets,
external stairways, shop windows, entrances, etc.
Automatic On/Off switching depending on the
level of the Lux value set by the twilight switch.
LUNA 108 LUNA ®
• Space-saving dimming switch for distribution cabinet
installation
• 17.5 mm structure width
• Separate built-in light sensor or surface-mounted light
sensor
• Brightness infinitely variable between 2–100 Lux on the
adjusting screw
• Immediate display of the switched condition by means
of a red LED
• Display of channel condition by means of a green LED
• Operational safety through high switching performance
V
LUNA 108
r
3
4
1
2
N
L
L
N
LUNA 108
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880 65,5
17,5
Terminal cover
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 220–240 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: approx. 6 VA
Brightness range: 2–100 lx
Switching delay ON: about 20 s
Switching delay OFF: about 80 s
Switching state display (without delay): red LED
Display of channel status: green LED
Contact type: NOC
Contact: potential-free
Opening width: < 3mm(µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 16 A
Switching power (fluorescent lamps): 10 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamps: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series compensated: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt comp.: 400 VA (42 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 300 VA
Mercury discharge lamp uncompensated: 1000 VA
Mercury discharge lamp series compensated: 1000 VA
Mercury discharge lamp shunt comp.: 400 VA (42 µF)
Sodium discharge lamp uncompensated: 1000 VA
Sodium discharge lamp series compensated: 1000 VA
Sodium discharge lamp shunt comp.: 400 VA (42 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1500 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature:
Control unit: –25 °C…+50 °C
Light sensor: –40 °C ... +70 °C
Types of protection according to DIN EN 60 529:
Control unit: IP 20
Surface-mounted sensor: IP 54 with cable connection at the bottom
Built-in sensor: IP 65
Protection class if installed as directed:
Control unit: II
Light sensor: II
Labels: V
Accessories
45
85,5
128*
60
55,5*
34*
Surface-mounted light sensor
Built-in light sensor
*with terminal cover
Type
Brightness
range
Adjustment
Light sensor
(included in the delivery)
Switching delay
ON/OFF
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
bei 250 V~
Order No.
LUNA 108
2–100 lx
1 brightness range
Surface-mounted light sensor (IP 54)
with screw terminals
20/80 s
1 NO contact
16 A (10 AX)
108 0 710
LUNA 108
2–100 lx
1 brightness range
Built-in light sensor (IP 65)
with 1.5 m cable
20/80 s
1 NO contact
16 A (10 AX)
108 0 700
Built-in light sensor, 1.5 m connecting cable, Type of protection IP 65 (spare part)
Surface-mounted light sensor including fastening bracket and screw-type terminals (spare part)
907 0 011
907 0 008
43
Din rail program
2–200 Lux 2–2000 Lux 2–7500 Lux
Twilight switch
For controlling lighting systems for streets,
outside staircases, shop windows, entrances etc.
Automatic switch-on and off according to the set
lux value via the twilight switch.
LUNA 110 LUNA ®
• Twilight switch for distribution panel installation with
separate surface-mounted or built-in light sensor.
• Switching brightness can be adjusted continuously
between approx. 2–200 lux with the adjusting screw
• Immediate indication of the switching status by LED
• Approx. 40 s switch-ON/switch-OFF delay in order to
avoid switching errors owing to lightning flashes or
car headlamps etc.
For design and terminal cover, see page 24.
LUNA 110
LUNA 112 LUNA ®
• Twilight switch for distribution panel installation with
separate light sensor as above, but:
• Control unit with range selector switch for 2 brightness
ranges:
Range 1: approx. 2–35 lux
Range 2: approx. 35–2000 lux
• Approx. 80 s switch-ON/switch-OFF delay in order to
avoid switching errors owing to lightning flashes or car
headlamps etc.
For design and terminal cover, see Page 26.
LUNA 113 LUNA ®
• 2 channel twilight switch with separate surfacemounted light sensor.
• Control unit with range selector switch for 2 brightness
ranges per channel
Range 1: approx. 2–150 lux
Range 2: approx. 150–7500 lux
• Approx. 40 s switch-ON/switch-OFF delay
• Up to 10 devices can be connected to one light sensor
For dimension drawing, see Page 46.
LUNA 112
LUNA 113
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
*
Accessories
*
*
LUNA 110
* with terminal cover
44
Terminal cover e. g. LUNA 112
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Special voltages: see appendix
Frequency: 45–60 Hz, LUNA 113: 50 Hz
Device consumption: approx. 5 VA
Overall brightness range: LU 110: 2–200 lx,
LU 112: 2–2000 lx, LU 113: 2–7500 lx
Switching delay ON: about 40 s, LUNA 112: 80 s
Switching delay OFF: about 40 s, LUNA 112: 80 s
Switching state display (without delay): red LED
Contact type: change-over contact,
LUNA 113: 2 change-over contacts
Contact: potential-free
Opening width: < 3mm(µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 10 A
Switching power (fluorescent lamps): 6 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamps: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series comp.: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt comp.: 400 VA (42 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 300 VA
Mercury discharge lamp uncompensated:
4 x 125 W, 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W, 1 x 700 W
Mercury discharge lamp series compensated:
4 x 125 W, 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W, 1 x 700 W
Mercury discharge lamp shunt compensated:
6 x 50 W (7 µF), 4 x 125 W (10 µF), 2 x 250 W (18 µF),
1 x 400 W (25 µF), 1 x 700 W (40 µF)
Sodium discharge lamp uncompensated:
2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W
Sodium discharge lamp series compensated:
2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W
Sodium discharge lamp shunt compensated:
2 x 150 W (20 µF), 1 x 250 W (32 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1000 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature:
Control unit: –10 °C…+50 °C
Light sensor: –40 °C ... +70 °C
Types of protection according to DIN EN 60 529:
Control unit: IP 20
Surface-mounted sensor: IP 54 with cable connection at the bottom
Built-in sensor: IP 65
Protection class if installed as directed:
Control unit: II
Light sensor: III
Label: depending on device type V W
*
LUNA 112
Surface-mounted light sensor
Built-in light sensor
Din rail program
2–200 Lux 2–2000 Lux 2–7500 Lux
Twilight switch
r
r
4
5
4
L
5
L
N
II
I
1
2
1
N
3
2
3
L
N
L
N
LUNA 110 (1 channel)
LUNA 112 (1 channel)
r
*
4
5
6
L
N
4
II
II
C1
1
2
7
8
L
N
2
7
8
L
N
I
II
II
C1
C2
3
6
I
1
9
2
C2
3
7
8
9
L
N
L
N
L
N
5
II
C1
1
9
4
I
II
C2
3
6
I
I
I
5
LUNA 113 (2 channels)
max. 10 devices LUNA 113 connectable to one light sensor.
*bridge from ➄ to ➅ is not applicable for subsequent devices
Type
Brightness
range
Adjustment
Light sensor
(included in the delivery)
Switching delay
ON/OFF
Switching
contacts
Nominal current Order No.
at 250 V~
LUNA 110
2–200 lx
1 brightness range
Surface-mounted light sensor (IP 54)
with screw terminals
40/40 s
1 changeover
switch
10 A (6 AX)
110 0 710
LUNA 110
2–200 lx
1 brightness range
Built-in light sensor (IP 65)
with 1.5 m cable
40/40 s
1 changeover
switch
10 A (6 AX)
110 0 700
Terminal cover for top mounting LUNA 110, sealable
907 0 064
LUNA 112
2–35 lx
35–2000 lx
2 brightness ranges
Surface-mounted light sensor (IP 54)
with screw terminals
80/80 s
1 changeover
switch
10 A (6 AX)
112 0 700
LUNA 112
2–35 lx
35–2000 lx
2 brightness ranges
Built-in light sensor (IP 65)
with 1.5 m cable
80/80 s
1 changeover
switch
10 A (6 AX)
112 0 711
Surface-mounted light sensor (IP 54)
with screw terminals max. 10 devices attachable
40/40 s
2 changeover
switches
10 A (6 AX)
113 0 700
Terminal cover for top mounting LUNA 112, sealable
LUNA 113
2–150 lx
2 brightness ranges
150–7500 lx 2 channels
907 0 050
Terminal cover for top mounting LUNA 113, sealable
Built-in light sensor, connection cable 1.5 m, degree of protection IP 65 (spare part), (except LUNA 113)
Surface-mounted light sensor with fastening square and screw terminals, (except LUNA 113)
Surface-mounted light sensor with fastening square and screw terminals, (only for LUNA 113)
907 0 049
907 0 011
907 0 008
907 0 031
45
Din rail program
2–2000 Lux 7d ±1h
Twilight switch with digital switch
auto
Twilight switch e. g. for road and street lighting
with time-controlled night switch-off.
Common functions:
• User guidance through integrated text line in the
LCD display
• Weekly program including 42 memory locations,
adjustable to the nearest minute
• Guided copying of the switching times to other
weekdays (free block formation)
• Automatic summertime/wintertime change, can be
switched off or freely programmed as desired (Europe,
GB, USA/CAN rule of change can be selected)
• Programming is displayed graphically through a bar
display in the LCD display
• Control unit equipped with range switch for
2 brightness ranges:
range 1: about 2–35 lux
range 2: about 35–2000 lux
• Holiday program programmable via date
• Switching pre-selection and permanent switching
ON/OFF
• Program backup by EEPROM
• PIN encoding
LUNA 118 top
LUNA 118 top LUNA ® with digital time switch
• Like LUNA 112, but combined with digital timer
TR 610 top
• Dimming switch e.g. for road and street lighting with
time-controlled nighttime switch-off, outside of working
hours or at weekends
LUNA 119 top LUNA ® with 2-channel digital time switch
• Twilight switch with 2-channel digital time switch e.g.
for brightness-dependent shop windows and shop
lighting as a function of the opening hours
• Channel 1 has a pure time switch function
• In channel 2, the twilight switch and timer are connected in series
LUNA 119 top
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
Terminal cover
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: max. 5 VA
Overall brightness range: 2–2000 lx
Switching delay ON: about 80 s
Switching delay OFF: about 80 s
Switching state display (without delay): red LED
Display of channel status: via LCD
Power reserve at 20 °C: 10 years
Time basis: Quartz
Accuracy at 20 °C: ≤± 1 s/d
Shortest switching interval: 1 min
Switching accuracy: to the nearest second
Contact type: Change-over contact, LUNA 119 top: 2
change-over contacts
Contact: potential-free
Opening width: < 3mm(µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 10 A
Switching power (fluorescent lamps): 6 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamps: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series comp.: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt comp.: 400 VA (42 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 2300 VA
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 300 VA
Mercury discharge lamp uncompensated:
4 x 125 W, 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W, 1 x 700 W
Mercury discharge lamp series compensated:
4 x 125 W, 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W, 1 x 700 W
Mercury discharge lamp shunt compensated:
6 x 50 W (7 µF), 4 x 125 W (10 µF), 2 x 250 W (18 µF),
1 x 400 W (25 µF), 1 x 700 W (40 µF)
Sodium discharge lamp uncomp.: 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W
Sodium discharge lamp series compensated:
2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W
Sodium discharge lamp shunt compensated:
2 x 150 W (20 µF), 1 x 250 W (32 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1000 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature:
Control unit: –10 °C…+50 °C
Light sensor: –40 °C ... +70 °C
Types of protection according to DIN EN 60 529:
Control unit: IP 20
Surface-mounted sensor: IP 54 with cable connection at the bottom
Built-in sensor: IP 65
Protection class if installed as directed:
Control unit: II
Light sensor: III
Accessories
*
*
* with terminal cover
46
*
Surface-mounted light sensor
Built-in light sensor
Din rail program
2–2000 Lux 7d ±1h
Twilight switch with digital switch
auto
r
r
4
5
L
N
4
5
L
N
II
I
II
I
C1
1
2
3
1
2
C2+Lux
3
7
8
9
L
N
L
N
LUNA 118 top (1 channel)
LUNA 119 top (2 channels)
Programming of LUNA 118 top/LUNA 119 top
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
ok
ok
ok
+
ok
ok
+
ok
+
+
ok
+
+
ok
+
ok
*only LUNA 119 top
Type
Brightness
range
Adjustment
Light sensor
(included in the delivery)
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
LUNA 118 top
2–2000 lx
2 brightness ranges
Surface-mounted light sensor (IP 54)
with screw terminals
1 changeover switch
10 A (6 AX)
118 0 702
LUNA 118 top
2–2000 lx
2 brightness ranges
Built-in light sensor (IP 65)
with 1.5 m cable
1 changeover switch
10 A (6 AX)
118 0 752
LUNA 119 top
2–2000 lx
2 brightness ranges
Surface-mounted light sensor (IP 54)
with screw terminals
2 changeover switches
10 A (6 AX)
119 0 702
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
907 0 049
47
Wall mounting
Lux Digital 2–2000 Lux 24 h ±1h
Twilight switch
auto
LUNA star Serie LUNA ®
LUNA 126 star
LUNA 127 star
LUNA 128 star
LUNA 129 star-time
Dimension drawings
48
Common functions:
• Twilight switch in a modern, innovative design
• Integral light sensor with a very large light-entry angle
(approx. 180°) and specially formed lens
• Immediate LED display of switching status
• Variable ON/OFF delay settings of approx.
2–100 s, LUNA® 129 star-time: 0–10 min,
LUNA® 126 star: 40 s fixed setting
• Test button for checking the installation, independent
of brightness setting (except LUNA® 126 star)
• Infinitely variable brightness range of
approx 2–2000 lux (model dependent)
• Preset brightness value of approx. 15 lux as delivered
(LUNA® 127 star and LUNA® 129 star-time)
• High-quality relay ensures safe, secure
switching of lamp loads
LUNA 129 star-time LUNA ®
(Functions as above, but in addition)
• Digital twilight switch with integrated time function
(daily program)
• LCD display plus 3 control keys
• Simple programming through control philosophy similar
to TR top
• Brightness switching threshold for switch-on and
switch-off separately and digitally adjustable between 2
and 200 lux via keyboard
• Switch-on and switch-off delay separately digitally
adjustable between 0 and 10 min
• Time function can be switched off
• Automatic change between summertime and wintertime
• Integrated replaceable lithium cell
(power reserve at least 1.5 years) allows programming
already before mounting
• Preset nighttime switch-off (11 pm OFF/
5 am ON), lux values and switching delay
• Semi-automatic function (e.g. at night light on,
11 pm nighttime switch-off)
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~/220 V~, ± 10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Device consumption: LUNA 126 star: about 3.5 VA;
LU 127/128 star: about 4.5 VA; LU 129 star-time:
approx. 2 VA
Switching status display (without delay): red LED
Channel status display LU 129 star-time: via LCD
Power reserve at 20 °C LU 129 star-time: about 1.5
years allowing full operation by non-polluting lithium cell
Contact type: NOC
Contact: not potential-free
Opening width: < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1:
16 A; LU 126 star: 10 A
Switching power (fluorescent lamps):
10 AX; LU 126 star: 6 AX
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W (LU 126 star: 1000 W)
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W (LU 126 star: 1000 W)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated:
2300 VA; LU 126 star: 1000 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series compensated:
2300 VA; LU 126 star: 1000 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt compensated:
400 VA (42 µF); LU 126 star: 120 W (18 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit:
2300 VA; LU 126 star: 1000 VA
Mercury discharge lamp uncompensated:
1000 VA; LU 126 star: Use contactor
Mercury discharge lamp series compensated:
1000 VA; LU 126 star: Use contactor
Mercury discharge lamp shunt compensated:
250 VA (40 µF); LU 126 star: Use contactor
Sodium discharge lamp uncompensated:
1000 VA; LU 126 star: Use contactor
Sodium discharge lamp series compensated:
1000 VA; LU 126 star: Use contactor
Sodium discharge lamp shunt compensated:
250 VA (40 µF); LU 126 star: Use contactor
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG):
1500 VA; LU 126 star: 400 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG): 9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W,
7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W; LU 126 star: 4 x 7 W,
3 x 11 W, 3 x 15 W, 3 x 20 W, 3 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature: –35 °C... +55 °C
Type of protection according to EN 60529 with
mounting connection at the bottom: IP 55
Protection class when mounted in accordance
with its designated use: II
Labels: W V
Design
• Generous terminal space for connecting and extending
wiring as needed
• 5 connecting terminals including an extra (PE) terminal
(except LUNA® 126 star)
• Compact and unobtrusive housing for exterior installation
• Splash-proof housing (IP 55)
• Mast installation possible with standard
tubing clamp (not included)
• Cables can be connected at the bottom or back of device
housing (2 cables possible)
• Quick-clamping screws for securing the
hinged housing cover
• 4 mm2 connection cross section
• Housing color: white
Wall mounting
Lux Digital 2–2000 Lux 24 h ±1h
Twilight switch
auto
LUNA® 127 star/ LUNA® 128 star
simply by…
… switching delay can be set
… quick-clamping screws for securing
the hinged housing cover
… degree of protection IP 55
… immediate LED display
… very large light-entry angle
… cabels can be connected at the
bottom or back of device housing
… generous terminal space
… lux values can be set
from outside
LUX setting
Mast mounting of all
devices possible with
a standard tubing
clamp. No extra
mounting bracket
needed.
Test button
LUNA 129 star-time programming sequence
Standard view
Setting the switching
brightness value
ON (evenings)
Start of night-time
switch OFF
Programming the
ON switching delay
End of night-time
switch OFF
Programming the
OFF switching delay
Setting the switching
brightness value
OFF (mornings)
L
L
N
N‘ N
L
N
L
N
LUNA® 126 star
LUNA® 127 star / LUNA® 128 star / LUNA® 129 star-time
Type
Brightness
range
Installation
Switching delay
ON/OFF
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 230 V~
Order No.
5–200 Lux
LUNA® 126 star
LUNA® 126 star incl. adapter plate for LUNA star
LUNA® 127 star
2–200 Lux
LUNA® 128 star
2–2000 Lux
Wall mount or mast mount
ca. 40 s fixed
1 working contact
10 A (6 AX)
Wall mount or mast mount
Wall mount or mast mount
2–100 s (Potenziometer)
2–100 s (Potenziometer)
1 working contact
1 working contact
16 A (10 AX)
16 A (10 AX)
126 0 700
126 0 701
127 0 700
128 0 700
LUNA® 129
star-time
Wall mount or
mast mount
0–10 min
digital adjustable
1 working contact
16 A (10 AX)
129 0 700
2–200 Lux
digital adjustable
Adapter plate for LUNA star
907 0 486
49
Din rail program
Solar time clock
Astro
SELEKTA 170 top
L
S
1
2
3
N
L
N
Type
Program
SELEKTA 170 top astro program,
weekly program
Terminal cover for top mounting, sealable
Installation kit for switch panel installation
50
7 d 24 h ±1h
auto
SELEKTA 170 top SELEKTA
Function:
• Solar 1-channel weekly clock with “top”
operating philosophy, i.e. simplest possible operation
through text-oriented programming
• Precise calculation of sunrise and sunset times through
inputting date, time and location coordinates
(longitude and latitude)
• Alternatively, the location coordinates can be specified
via a country-specific and pre-programmed list of cities.
• The switching on and off of the connected consumer
depends on the sunrise and sunset times and can be
offset forwards or backwards for fine adjustment by up
to 120 minutes
• Factory-set date and time
• Text-based programming in 4 easy steps, supported by
self-explanatory symbols.
• Energy-saving night switch-off with simple
programmable weekly program
• Semi-automatic function (e.g. light on during evenings,
night switch-off at 2300 hrs)
• Guided copying of switching times to other weekdays
(block formation)
• The daily switching times are graphically illustrated by a
segment bar in the LCD
• Date-controlled holiday program
• Continuous switching (continuous on or continuous off)
• Switching pre-selection
• An external input “S” enables the output to be
switched via a control signal (e.g. manual switch)
• PIN code, 10 year power reserve
• Automatic summer/winter time correction, can be
disabled or freely selected (Europe, GB, USA/CAN
changeover rule also selectable)
• Flexible alternative to twilight switch
(brightness sensor does not need to be wired)
• Switching times guaranteed through EEPROM
• Space-saving housing, width 35 mm
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230–240 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Special voltage: see appendix
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: max. 6 VA
Power reserve at 20 °C: about 10 years allowing full
operation by non-polluting lithium cell
Time basis: Quartz
Accuracy at 20 °C: ≤± 1 s/d
Shortest switching interval: 1 minute
Switching accuracy: to the nearest second
Display: LCD display with text line
Operating elements: 4 touch keys/1 reset key
Rated voltage external input “S”:
230–240 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Rated frequence external input “S”: 50–60 Hz
Input current external input “S”: max. 0.5 mA
Device consumption external input “S”: max. 130 mW
Cable length external input “S”: max. 50 m
Contact type: Change-over contact
Contact: potential-free
Opening width: < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 16 A
Switching power at 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6: 10 A
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 1000 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series comp.: 1000 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt comp.: 400 VA (42 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 1000 VA
Mercury discharge lamp uncompensated:
4 x 125 W, 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W, 1 x 700 W
Mercury discharge lamp shunt compensated:
6 x 50 W (7 µF), 4 x 125 W (10 µF), 2 x 250 W (18 µF),
1 x 400 W (25 µF), 1 x 700 W (40 µF)
Sodium discharge lamp uncomp.: 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W
Sodium discharge lamp shunt compensated:
2 x 150 W (20 µF), 1 x 250 W (32 µF), 1 x 400 W (45 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1000 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature: –30 °C... +55 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60 529: IP 20
Protection class according to EN 60 730-1 if
installed as directed: II
Labels: W V
Terminal cover
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 35 x 60 mm to DIN 43 880
• Quick fastening for 35 mm profile rail
(DIN EN 50 022)
• Contact protection to comply with accident prevention
regulation BVG A3
• Top mounting with additional terminal box cover plate,
sealable (No. 907 0 064)
• Control panel installation
with assembly kit (No. 907 0 001)
• Captive cover flap, sealable
SELEKTA 170 top (1 channel)
Dimension drawings
j
Power reserve
(Lithium)
Programmable
every...
Special functions
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
10 years
1 minute
Local database
1 changeover switch
16 (10) A
170 0 002
907 0 064
907 0 001
Din rail program
Astro Year
Solar time clock
SELEKTA 173 DCF SELEKTA
2-channel digital time switch with astronomical
program specially for light control. The device has
astronomical channels which can be superimposed
by varying programs for night switch-off, e.g. for
half-light switching. Channel 2 can alternately be
used as a time switch only with easy-to-use yearly
program.
• The device calculates the sun rising and setting times for
the entered geographical location for every day of the year
exactly to the minute
• Automatic summer/winter time adjustment
• Individual setting of energy-saving night switch-off or halflight switching due to superimposed yearly program for
weekends, public holidays or holidays
• Channel 2 can be occupied by an astronomical program or
with a time switch program only
• 120 switching times with weekday block formation are
available for both channels
• Geographical adaptation possible with degree of longitude
and latitude to 1 degree exactly
• Separate time correction possibility of ±120 minutes for
the astronomical ON and OFF switching intervals
• Astronomical program for 1 or 2 output channels. Both
channels can be superimposed by varying time-controlled
night switch-off, e.g. for half-light switching
• To achieve the same operating hours of 2 connected light
fixtures, the time switch enables the night switch-off
program to be periodically changed from one channel to
the other
• Encoding of the program against unauthorized access
• Manual early override switching for both channels
• Particularly suitable for communal street lighting
• Easy program printouts possible
• Copying of the program from device to device possible by
means of OBELISK
SELEKTA 173 DCF
DCF77 Aerial
N
L1
4
5
µ
C2
L
6
C1
µ
1
2
L
N
110 V~
230 V~
DCF
3
L2
N
SELEKTA 173 DCF (2 channel)
PC programming set OBELISK
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
*
*
*
OBELISK (EEPROM)
for program transfer between PC and
time switch
Standard
plug-in adapter
CD containing
software
for WINDOWS
95/98/2000/NT/XP
j
7 d 24 h ±1 h PC
auto
Technical data:
Rated voltage:
230–240 V~, + 6 %/–10 %, 110 V~, ± 10 %
Special voltage: see appendix
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: approx. 8 VA
Power reserve at 20 °C: about 1.5 years allowing full
operation by non-polluting lithium cell Data backup in the
switch-off state about 10 years by EEPROM
Time basis: Quartz
Accuracy at 20 °C:
≤± 1 s/d, synchronous with DCF77 antenna
Shortest switching interval: 1 minute
Switching accuracy: to the nearest second
Display: LCD display
Operating elements: 15 touch keys/1 reset key
Contact type: 2 change-over contacts
Contact: potential-free
Opening width: < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching power at 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 16 A
Switching power at 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6: 10 A
Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W
Halogen lamp load: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated: 1000 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) series comp.: 1000 VA
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt comp.: 400 VA (42 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit: 1000 VA
Mercury discharge lamp uncompensated:
4 x 125 W, 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W, 1 x 700 W
Mercury discharge lamp shunt compensated:
6 x 50 W (7 µF), 4 x 125 W (10 µF), 2 x 250 W (18 µF),
1 x 400 W (25 µF), 1 x 700 W (40 µF)
Sodium discharge lamp uncomp.: 2 x 250 W, 1 x 400 W
Sodium discharge lamp shunt compensated:
2 x 150 W (20 µF), 1 x 250 W (32 µF), 1 x 400 W (45 µF)
Compact fluorescent lamps (KVG): 1000 VA
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG):
9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Admissible ambient temperature:
Timer: –10 °C…+50 °C
DCF antenna: –20 °C… +70 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60529: IP 20
Protection class according to EN 60 730-1 if
installed: II
Design:
• Standard housing 45 x 105 x 60 mm
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm top-hat rail EN 50 022
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover,
tamper proof
• Switchboard installation
with mounting set No. 907 0 001)
• Contact protection to comply with accident prevention
regulation BVG A3
• Captive terminal screws
• Captive hinged cover, tamper proof
SELEKTA 173 DCF * with terminal cover
Type
Program
SELEKTA 173 DCF astronomical year program,
24 h/7 days/year
Power reserve
Programmable
Special functions
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
1.5 years
1 min
holiday or weekend,
switching channel change
2 changeover
contact
16 (10) A
173 0 001
(without aerial and power unit)
907 0 243
907 0 230
907 0 165
Aerial for DCF77radio signal, makes DCF77 time synchronisation possible. Power supply is integrated in the device SELEKTA 173 DCF.
Programming set OBELISK (chip card, intermediate plug for PC interface, software)
OBELISK chip card (separately)
Order No.
51
Ceiling mounting
5–1200 Lux
Presence detector
New
SPHINX 380
3
2
4
test
30
15
10
1
5
1
1 min
2
On
3
6
5
4
lux
5
0 … 90°
Description of the presence detector
a Setting potentiometer for run-on time
(lighting output S1)
s Brightness setting potentiometer
d Detector lenses
f Brightness measuring sensor
g Control light
SPHINX 380 SPHINX
Function:
• 360 ° presence detector with a channel for mounting on
ceiling and for automatic light control, depending on
presence and brightness
• Possible application examples: Detection of slight
movement? in offices, conference rooms, hotel rooms,
classrooms, hallways, toilets, staircases, and the like
• The presence or motion is detected by two pyroelectric
sensors (PIR sensors) mounted below the detector lenses.
• An integrated brightness sensor continuously measures
the brightness in the room and compares it with the
specified brightness
• The lighting output S1 is activated as soon as the
brightness drops below the specified value and the
presence of a person is detected
•Brightness range adjustable between 5 and 1200 lux
• Run-on time of the lighting output S1 adjustable between
1 and 30 min
• The detector head can be swiveled by 90° and allows the
detection area to be adapted to the room configuration
• For surface mounting, the surface-mounting box (Order
No. 907 0 385) is required
• Large rectangular detection area of 13 x 7 m at a
mounting height of 2.5 m (18 x 9 m at a mounting height
of 3.5 m)
• Intelligent twin-lens design for improving the detection
area below the lens This allows even the slightest of
movements to be detected.
• The pulse function allows the SPHINX 380 to activate
stairway-light switches
• Master/Slave operation of SPHINX 380 (slave) and
SPHINX 382 (master) or SPHINX 385 (master) possible.
This allows also larger monitoring areas to be set up.
• Test function for checking the monitoring area
Surface-mounting box for SPHINX 380, SPHINX 382,
SPHINX 385
• For surface mounting
• Color: white
• Dimensions: 70 x 42 mm
2
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: 1.2 W
Number of PIR sensors: 2
Optimum mounting height: between 2.5 m and 3.5 m
Detection area at 2.5 m: 13 m x 7 m
Detection area at 3.5 m: 18 m x 9 m
Master/slave operation possible: Slave
Relay output S1 (lighting output)
Run-on time (output S1): 1 min … 30 min, test, pulse
Setting range (output S1): 5 … 1200 lx
Contact type (output S1): NO contact
Contact type (output S1): not potential-free
Opening width (output S1): < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material (output S1): AgSnO2
Switching power 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 16 A
Switching power 230 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6: 8 A
Incandescent lamp load: 1500 W
Halogen lamp load: 1500 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt compensated:
290 W (32 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 580 W
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG): 10 x 18 W
Maximum cable length for master/slave operation
(output S2): 50 m
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Ambient temperature: 0 °C to +45 °C
Type of protection according to DIN EN 60529:
IP 40
Protection class control unit if installed as
directed: II
For the dimensional diagram, see page 55
For the mounting instructions, see page 56.
For the circuit diagrams, see page 57
1
SPHINX 380 power module
Brightness
Type of room
recommended
value
Recommended
setting on
potentiometer 2
5 Lux
100 Lux
200 Lux
300 Lux
500 Lux
800 Lux
1
2
3
4
5
6
–
hallway
hallway, toilet
PC-workstation
offices
classenrooms, lab
Type
Detection area
3.5 m mounting height
Brightness range
Run-on time
output S1
Switching
contact
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
SPHINX 380
1 channel
18 m x 9 m
5–1200 lx
1–30 min
1 NO contact
16 (8) A
106 0 380
Surface-mounting box for SPHINX 380, SPHINX 382, SPHINX 385 (white, dimensions: 70 x 42 mm)
52
907 0 385
Ceiling mounting
5–1200 Lux
Presence detector
New
SPHINX 382
4
2
5
3
60
45
30s
30
test
15
1
3
6
4
5
lux
5 min
10
1
2 30
On
15
5
10
min
1
6
0 … 90°
Description of the presence detector
a Setting potentiometer for run-on time
(lighting output S1)
s Brightness setting potentiometer
d Setting potentiometer for run-on time
(presence output S2)
f Detector lenses
g Brightness measuring sensor
h Control light
2
3
1
Brightness
Type of room
recommended
value
Recommended
setting on
potentiometer 2
5 Lux
100 Lux
200 Lux
300 Lux
500 Lux
800 Lux
1
2
3
4
5
6
–
hallway
hallway, toilet
PC-workstation
offices
classenrooms, lab
SPHINX 382 SPHINX
Function:
• 360° presence detector with two channels for mounting
on ceiling and for automatic light control as a function
of presence and brightness (channel 1) and for automatic heating or ventilator control (channel 2) as a
function of brightness
• Possible application examples: Detection of movement
and presence in offices, conference rooms, hotel rooms,
classrooms, hallways, toilets, staircases, and the like
• The presence or motion is detected by two pyroelectric
sensors (PIR sensors) mounted below the detector
lenses.
• An integrated brightness sensor continuously measures
the brightness in the room and compares it with the
specified brightness
• The lighting output S1 is activated as soon as the
brightness drops below the specified value and the
presence of a person is detected
• Brightness range adjustable between 5 and 1200 lux
• Run-on time of the lighting output S1 (channel 1)
adjustable between 1 and 30 min
• The presence output S2 (channel 2) is activated for the
period set on the potentiometer (run-on time), as soon
as movement is detected. You can select between two
operating modes.
- In operating mode 1, the potentiometer is set to a
time delay of T2 < 10 min. After a monitoring period
(= switch-on delay) of 30 seconds has expired, the
output S2 is activated for the duration T2 (application:
switching on of the ventilation, notice lighting, etc.)
- In operating mode 2, the potentiometer is set to a
time delay of T2 ≥ 10 min. After a monitoring period
(= switch-on delay) of 15 minutes has expired, the
output S2 is activated for the duration T2 (application:
changing the heating setpoint value, etc.)
• Run-on time of the presence output S2 (channel 2)
adjustable between 30 s and 60 min
• The detector head can be swiveled by 90° and allows
the detection area to be adapted to the room configuration
• For surface mounting, the surface-mounting box (Order
No. 907 0 385) is required
• Large rectangular detection area of 13 x 7 m at a
mounting height of 2.5 m (18 x 9 m at a mounting
height of 3.5 m)
• Intelligent twin-lens design for improving the detection
area below the lens This allows even the slightest of
movements to be detected.
• Master/Slave operation of SPHINX 380 (slave) and
SPHINX 382 (master) possible. This allows also larger
monitoring areas to be set up.
• Test function for checking the monitoring area
• Button input (= slave input) to reverse the relay output
S1 (status reversal)
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: 1.2 W
Number of PIR sensors: 2
Optimum mounting height: between 2.5 m and 3.5 m
Detection area at 2.5 m: 13 m x 7 m
Detection area at 3.5 m: 18 m x 9 m
Master/slave operation possible: Master
Relay output S1 (lighting output)
Run-on time (output S1): 1 min … 30 min, test
Setting range (output S1): 5 … 1200 lx
Contact type (output S1): NO contact
Contact type (output S1): not potential-free
Opening width (output S1): < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material (output S1): AgSnO2
Switching power 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 16 A
Switching power 230 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6: 8 A
Incandescent lamp load: 1500 W
Halogen lamp load: 1500 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt comp.: 230 W (32 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 580 W
Compact fluorescent lamps (EVG): 10 x 18 W
Relay output S2 (presence output)
Run-on time (output S2): 30 s … 60 min
Switch-on delay (output S2):
Operating mode 1: 15 min
Operating mode 2: 30 s
Contact type (output S2): NO contact
Contact (output S2): potential-free
Opening width (output S2): < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material (output S2): AgNi
Switching power 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1 (output S2): 2 A
Maximum cable length for master/slave operation
(output S2): 50 m
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Ambient temperature: 0 °C to +45 °C
Type of protection control unit according to DIN
EN 60529: IP 40
Protection class control unit if installed as directed: II
For the dimensional diagram, see page 55, for the
mounting instructions, see page 56, for the circuit
diagrams, see page 57
SPHINX 382 power module
Type
Detection area
3.5 m mounting height
Brightness
range
Run-on time
output S1
Run-on time
output S2
Switch-on delay
Switching
contact
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
SPHINX 382
2 channels
18 m x 9 m
5–1200 lx
1–30 min
30 s–60 min
Mode 1: 15 min
Mode 2: 30 s
1 NO contact (S1)
1 NO contact (S2)
16 (8) A
2A
106 0 382
Surface-mounting box for SPHINX 380, SPHINX 382, SPHINX 385 (white, dimensions: 70 x 42 mm)
907 0 385
53
Ceiling mounting
5–1200 Lux
Presence detector
New
SPHINX 385
4
2
5
3
50%
40%
30%
test
auto 30
1
15
2
On
5
4
10
3
lux
20%
0%
mini
10%
1
5
min
1
6
0 … 90°
Description of the presence detector
a Setting potentiometer for run-on time
s Brightness setting potentiometer
d Setting potentiometer for minimum dimming value
f Detector lenses
g Brightness measuring sensor
h Control light
2
3
1
SPHINX 385 SPHINX
Function:
• 360 ° presence detector with 1–10 V output for
mounting on ceiling and for automatic light control or
constant light control as a function of presence and
brightness
• Relay output for activation of electronic ballast units
(EVG) and 1–10 V output for activation of dimmers
• Possible application examples: Detection of movement?
and presence in offices, conference rooms, hotel rooms,
classrooms, hallways, toilets, staircases, and the like
• The presence or motion is detected by two pyroelectric
sensors (PIR sensors) mounted below the detector lenses.
• An integrated brightness sensor continuously measures
the brightness in the room and compares it with the
specified brightness
• The detector head can be swiveled by 90° and allows the
detection area to be adapted to the room configuration
• The potentiometers allow you to set three different
operating modes:
- Operating mode 1: without constant light control
- Operating mode 2: Constant light control with
specified dimming value
- Operating mode 3: Constant light control with
variable dimming value
• For surface mounting, the surface-mounting box (Order
No. 907 0 385) is required
• Large rectangular detection area of 13 x 7 m at a
mounting height of 2.5 m (18 x 9 m at a mounting
height of 3.5 m)
• Intelligent twin-lens design for improving the detection
area below the lens This allows even the slightest of
movements to be detected.
• Brightness range adjustable between 5 and 1200 lux
• Run-on time of the lighting output S1 (channel 1)
adjustable between 1 and 30 min
• Master/Slave operation of SPHINX 380 (slave) and
SPHINX 385 (master) possible. This allows also larger
monitoring areas to be set up.
• Test function for checking the monitoring area
• Button input (= slave input)
- To reverse the relay output (status reversal)
- for manual dimming
- To set/change the light value (long key press)
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: 1.2 W
Number of PIR sensors: 2
Optimum mounting height: between 2.5 m and 3.5 m
Detection area at 2.5 m: 13 m x 7 m
Detection area at 3.5 m: 18 m x 9 m
Master/slave operation possible: Master
Relay output S1
Run-on time (output S1): 1 min … 30 min, test
Setting range (output S1): 5 … 1200 lx
Contact type (output S1): NO contact
Contact (output S1): not potential-free
Opening width (output S1): < 3 mm (µ)
Contact material (output S1): AgSnO2
Switching power 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1: 10 A
Fluorescent lamps (EVG): 580 W
1–10 V output
Switching power: max. 50 mA for fluorescent lamps EVG
Maximum cable length for master/slave operation
(output S2): 50 m
Housing and insulation material: self-extinguishing
thermoplasts of high temperature resistance
Ambient temperature: 0 °C to +45 °C
Type of protection control unit according to DIN
EN 60529: IP 40
Protection class control unit when mounted in
accordance with its designated use: II
For the dimensional diagram, see page 55
For the mounting instructions, see page 56
For the circuit diagrams, see page 57
SPHINX 385 power module
Brightness
Type of room
recommended
value
Recommended
setting on
potentiometer 2
50 Lux
200 Lux
300 Lux
500 Lux
800 Lux
2
3
4
5
6
Type
hallway
hallway, toilet
PC-workstation
offices
classenrooms, lab
Detection area
3.5 m mounting height
SPHINX 385
18 m x 9 m
3 operating modes
Brightness range
Run-on time
output S1
Switching
contact
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
5–1200 lx
1–30 min
1 NO contact
10 A
50 mA (1–10 V output)
106 0 385
Surface-mounting box for SPHINX 380, SPHINX 382, SPHINX 385 (white, dimensions: 70 x 42 mm)
54
907 0 385
Ceiling mounting
5–1200 Lux
Presence detector
SPHINX 385 operating modes
The setting potentiometers are used for selecting the operating mode of the presence detector:
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
Operating mode 1:
without constant light control
Operating mode 2:
Constant light control with specified dimming
value
Operating mode 3:
Constant light control with variable dimming
value
Upon detecting a presence, SPHINX 385 is switched on
(100 % basic setting) To switch to a new setpoint
dimming value, a connected button can be used (long
button press). The output is activated for the duration set
on the potentiometer a (run-on time). After the run-on
time has expired, the output is reset to the value in
percent set on the potentiometer d for a fixed duration of
15 minutes.
Upon detecting presence, the 1–10 V output controls the
brightness to a constant light level (constant light control)
using the specified LUX setpoint value. The specified
setpoint value can be switched temporarily to a local
dimming value by using a connected button (long button
press). The output is activated for the duration set on the
potentiometer a (run-on time).
When presence is detected, the 1–10 V output will control
brightness using the LUX setpoint value specified by the
button input. The setpoint default setting is 500 lux.
The output is activated for the duration set on the
potentiometer (run-on time).
Detection areas SPHINX 380, SPHINX 382, SPHINX 385
Y
X
Area of presence
h
Y
Y
X
h
2.5 m
3m
3.5 m
X
13
15.5
18
Y
7
8
9
Dimension drawings SPHINX 380, SPHINX 382, SPHINX 385
X
Passageway
Passageway
Dimension drawings surface-mounting box
42 mm
60 mm
31 mm
70 mm
120 mm
55
Ceiling mounting
5–1200 Lux
Presence detector – Mounting
Surface mounting by means of surface-mounting box
Semi-flush mounting
Mounting socket
Ceiling
SPHINX surface-mounting box
(907 0 385)
Screw Ø 3
Power modules
(Switch insert)
Clamp springs
Metal plate
Detector head
56
Ceiling mounting
5–1200 Lux
Presence detector – Connection diagrams
SPHINX 380
SPHINX 380
ELPA
S1 L N S2
S1 L N S2
15
20
10
L
N
L
min 5
0.5
3
4
L
N
N
SPHINX 380
SPHINX 380 with stairway-light time switch ELPA
SPHINX 382
SPHINX 382
SPHINX
380
S1 L N S2
SPHINX 380
SPHINX
380
S1 L N S2
S1 L N S2
SPHINX 380
2A
HVAC
2A
HVAC
L N
L
L N
L
N
N
SPHINX 382
SPHINX 382 with SPHINX 380 (master/slave)
SPHINX 385
SPHINX 385
SPHINX
380 1/10 V
SPHINX
380 1/10 V
+ –
L N S1
SPHINX 380
L N S1
ballast
–
+
L
N
1–10 V
L
+ –
S1 L N S2
SPHINX 380
–
+
L
N
L
N
N
SPHINX 385 fluorescent lamps with EVG
SPHINX 385 with SPHINX 380 ( master/slave)
SPHINX 385
SPHINX
380 1/10 V
L N S1
+ –
–
+
L
N
L
N
SPHINX 385 with dimmer (1–10 V)
57
Plug-in time switches
7d 24 h
Digital plug-in timer
eltimo 020 S
• Electronic security time switch of contemporary
functional design
• Day- and week program with 36 individually
programmable switching times and free block formation
for week days
• Automatical summer/winter time changeover
• Easy handling by buttons for weekdays (d), hours (h)
and minute (m) as well as buttons for time setting (E),
and programmation (Prog), random switching (z) and
manual switching (i)
• Random switching: by the press of the “dye“ button the
random switching is defined running during the programmed switching time. The switching on intervals vary
between 10 to 120 minutes.
• Manual switch for premature switching ON or OFF or
permanent switching
• Switching status indication
• Net independent programming
• Time function and programming by NiMH
accumulator
• Switching capacity 3500 W
theben-eltimo 020 S
DCF77
Technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: max. 5 VA
Contact: gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgSnO2
Switching capacity: 16 A, 230 V~, cos ϕ =1
2 A, 230 V~, cos ϕ =0.6
Time base: quartz/DCF-synchron
Accuracy: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C (quartz)
Switching accuracy: accurate to the second
Display: LCD display for time, switching time, switching
status, manual switching and random switching
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C...+40 °C
Protection class:
II in accordance with EN 60 730-1 for housing
Protection class: I for plug system
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Weight: ca. 170 g
eltimo 020 S DCF
• Same as above, but with DCF 77 signal receiver
• Automatic summer/winter time changeover
• 33 memory locations
theben-eltimo 020 S DCF
Dimension drawings
Type
Program
theben-eltimo
020 S
theben-eltimo
020 S DCF
58
Memory
locations
Net independent
programming
Programmable
every ...
Switching times
Housing
colour
Nominal current
at 230 V~
Order No.
24 h/7 days
36
random switching
500 h
NiMH-Akku
1 minute
from 1 min to 24 h
.
/. 1 min, random switching
light blue
16 (2) A
020 0 000
24 h/7 days
33
random switching
500 h
NiMH-Akku
1 minute
from 1 min to 24 h
.
/. 1 min, random switching
light blue
16 (2) A
020 0 300
Plug-in time switches
7d 24 h
EE
Jahre
A
NT
NT
year
A
GAR
theben-timer 26 day
n-timer
be
26
the
Analog plug-in timer
IE G U A R
Function:
• Compact plug-in time switch for house, hobby and work
• Without connection cable plugs straight into the socket
outlet
• Normal household electrical appliances, lights etc. can
be switched on or off automatically at the required time
• Simple programming by segments
• Manual over-ride switch for switching on or off the
connected electrical appliance without influencing the
subsequent program sequence
• ON/OFF switching status indication
theben-timer 26 with segments
• Day program programmable by
15 min segments
theben-timer 26 blue edition
same as theben-timer 26, but
• Blue transparent housing
theben-timer 27 with segments
• Week program programmable by
2 hour segments
theben-timer 26 blue edition
Technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: max. 0.8 VA
Contacts: gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: hard silver
Switching capacity: 16 A, 230 V~, cos ϕ = 1
4 A, 230 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Accuracy: corresponds to the mains frequency
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C...+55 °C,
timer 26 IP 44: –40 °C...+55 °C
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature-resistant,
fireproof thermoplastics
Protection class:
I in accordance with EN 60 730-1
Degree of protection:
IP 20 and timer 26 IP 44 in accordance with EN 60 529
Test approvals: national and international
depending on device type V T W F A
Weight: approx. 160 g
theben-timer 26 IP 44 with segments
• Day program programmable by 15 min segments
• Weatherproof protection for damp locations and
outdoor areas
• Permissible ambient temperature: –40 °C...+55 °C
• Transparent cover
theben-timer 27 week
theben-timer 26 IP 44
10
13
12 11 10 9
14
5
19 18 17
6
16
7
15
8
10
Dimension drawings
4
20
3
2
1
24 23 22 2
1
theben-timer are also available for foreign plug systems
Type
Program
dial
Special functions
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
Switching
switching interval segments
Housing
colour
Nominal current
at 230 V~
Order No.
theben-timer 26
24 h
switching preselection
15 min
15 min
96
white
16 (4) A
026 0 030
theben-timer 26
blue edition
24 h
switching preselection
15 min
15 min
96
blue
transparent
16 (4) A
026 0 080
theben-timer 26 IP 44
theben-timer 27
24 h
7 Tage
switching preselection
switching preselection
15 min
2h
15 min
2h
96
84
white
white
16 (4) A
16 (4) A
026 0 855
027 0 930
59
Socket devices
30 mA
Personal protection and surge protector
theben-sidos 010 n
Common functions:
theben-sidos 010 n/theben-sidos 011 n
• Personal protection switch for improved safety when
handling electrical appliances in the bathroom, kitchen,
workshop and garden.
• Suitable for electric lawn mower, hedge shears, drill,
water pump, cable roller
• Mobile fault current protector (PRCD)
• Improved safety without modifying installation
• Triggers on mains power failure, protecting
unintentional restart of machines
• Manual switch ON/OFF
• Function test possible at all times
• Child safety lock
theben-sidos 010 n
Personal protection intermediate connector
• Intermediate connector for personal protection
to DIN VDE 0661 Part 19
• Efficient personal protection through nominal triggering
current of 30 mA (fault current)
theben-sidos 011 n
theben-sidos 011 n
Personal protection connector
• DI connector for personal protection as above except for
connecting to device power cables or extension cables
up to cross section of 1 x 2.5 mm2 and 11 mm diameter
IP 54 set for outdoor use
• 2-part rubber grommet as accessory for
theben-sidos 011 n (splash proof)
theben-sidos 013
theben-sidos 013
Surge protection intermediate connector
• Simple to retrofit
• Efficient device protection against surges e.g. lightening
strikes near your building
• Protects electrical appliances such as computers, fax
machines, copiers, TV sets, stereo systems, satellite
systems, DVD players, telecommunication systems etc.
against dangerous surges in 230 V supplies
• Over 30 % of damage to appliances is caused by
surging!
• Child safety lock
6 kV
Technical data on theben-sidos 010 n/011 n:
Nominal voltage: 230 V, ±10 %
Nominal frequency: 45 to 60 Hz
Nominal current: 16 A
Nominal trigger current: 30 mA
2-pole switch-off (L, N)
Nominal short circuit current: 1500 A (EN 61 540)
Low voltage triggering: U<
Permissible ambient temperature:
–25 °C to +40 °C
Protection class connector: I
Protection class housing: II
Pulse current sensitive:
Protection rating: IP 21 to EN 60 529
Test mark: V N F S
Weight: approx. 200 g
Technical data on theben-sidos 013
Nominal voltage: 230 V
Nominal current: 16 A
Maximum continuous voltage: 260 V~
Requirement class to EN 61643-11: Type 3
Idling voltage: 6 kV (1.2/50 µs)
Short circuit pulse current: 3 kA (8/20 µs)
Short circuit strength with max. prefusing:
3 kA with C16/16AgL
Protection level Up: ≤ 1.2 kV
Ambient temperature: –25 °C to +40 °C
Protection class connector: I
Protection class housing: II
Protection rating: IP 21 to EN 60 529
Weight: 200 g
Test mark: V
Dimension drawings
theben-sidos 010 n
Type
theben-sidos 010 n
theben-sidos 011 n
IP 54 Set
theben-sidos 013
60
theben-sidos 013
theben-sidos 011 n
Description
Mobile personal protection intermediate connector, nominal trigger current 30 mA
Mobile personal protection connector, nominal trigger current 30 mA
Accessories for theben-sidos 011 n
Mobile personal protection intermediate connector, idling voltage 6 kV
Accessory kit IP 54
Nominal voltage
230 V ~
230 V ~
Nominal current
16 A
16 A
230 V ~
16 A
Housing colour
white
white
orange
white
Order No.
010 0 001
011 0 001
907 0 327
013 0 001
Front panel/connection socket
99,999 h
Runtime meter
BZ 142, BZ 143
Function:
• Runtime meter with synchronous motor drive
• For control panel installation or wall mounting
• Designs for direct voltage provided with quartzcontrolled stepping motor
• Counters up to 99,999.99 hours
• Count display
BZ 142/143
Designs BZ 142-1, BZ 143-1:
• Front panel built-in devices with snap-on clamp or
tension bracket up to 10 mm in wall thickness
• Terminal or flat plug connection 6.3 mm
BZ 142 -3 with plug-in socket
Design BZ 142-3:
• with socket for wall mounting (terminal cover required)
• Socket with quick fastening device for
35 mm profile rail (DIN EN 50 022)
• Screw terminals
• Contact protection according to accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Housing color anthracite
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Special voltage: see appendix
Frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: approx. 1 VA
Admissible ambient temperature
for BZ 142/143: –20 °C... +70 °C
for BZ 145: –10 °C... +70 °C
Counting range: 99,999.99 hours without zero position
Digit size: 1.5 x 3.5 mm,
white on black, decimal places black on white
Protection class: II according to EN 60335-1
when mounted in accordance with its designated use:
Types of protection for BZ 142/143:
Front frame IP 65 according to EN 60529
for BZ 145: IP 65 according to DIN EN 60529
Test voltage: 2500 V~ winding and contacts grounded
Weight for BZ 142/143: approx. 50 g
for BZ 145: approx. 70 g
Design BZ 145:
• Standardized housing 45 x 35 x 60 mm according to
DIN 43 880
• Distributor built-in device with quick fastening device for
35 mm profile rail (DIN EN 50022)
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover,
sealable
• Control panel installation using mounting
kit no. 907 0 001
• Contact protection according to accident prevention
regulation BGV A3
• Captive terminal screws
BZ 145
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
65,5
60
52,5 *
45
86
128 *
35
55 *
*with terminal cover
Type
Counting
range
Installation
Front panel
mm
Mounting recess
mm
Order No.
BZ 142–1
99,999.99 h
Front panel installation with snap-on fastener or tension bracket
(Order No. 907 0 043)
48 x 48
46 x 46
142 0 721
Cover 72 x 72 mm for BZ 142-1
Cover 55 x 55 mm for BZ 142-1
BZ 142-3
99,999.99 h
Socket (Order No. 907 0 042) with quick fastening
for 35 mm standardized mounting rail included
907 0 074
907 0 041
48 x 48
For wall mounting, an additional terminal cover is required
BZ 143-1 99,999.99 h
Front panel installation with snap-on clamp or tension bracket fastening (Order No. 907 0 043) included 52 x 52
BZ 145
99,999.9 h
Distributor installation with quick fastening for 35 mm profile rail
35 x 45
Terminal cover for surface mounting, sealable
46 x 46
142 0 723
46 x 46 or Ø 50
35 x 45 (depth 60)
907 0 075
143 0 721
145 0 000
907 0 064
61
Front panel mounting
99,999 h
Digital runtime meters
BZ 146
BZ 147
BZ 146
• Digital runtime meters with EEPROM memory ensure
reliable operating time recording, even in case of power
failure
• Control panel installation
• Front frame 24 mm x 48 mm
• Mounting recess 22 mm x 45 mm
• 7-digit high-contrast LCD display
• Digit height 7 mm
• Counter up to 99,999.99 hours maximum
• Terminal screws
• Count shown on the display
• Tension bracket fastening up to 5 mm in wall thickness
• Quartz-controlled design
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 110–240 V AC, ±10 %
Special voltage BZ 147: see appendix
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: 0.77–3.6 VA
Admissible ambient temperature: –30 °C... +70 °C
Counting range: 99,999.99 hours without zero position
Protection class according to EN 610 10 when
mounted in accordance with its designated use: II
Schutzart: IP 65
Gewicht:
BZ 146: approx. 39 g
BZ 147 approx. 57 g
BZ 147
as BZ 146, but
• Front frame 48 mm x 48 mm
• Mounting recess 45 mm x 45 mm
BZ 146 (BZ 147) connecting terminals
Terminals 1 + 4
Terminal 2
Supply voltage
Time meter input
Dimension drawings
*with terminal cover
Type
Counting
range
Mounting
Front panel
mm
Mounting recess
mm
Order No.
BZ 146
99,999.99 h
Front panel installation with tension bracket
24 x 48
22 x 45
146 0 000
BZ 147
99,999.99 h
Front panel installation with tension bracket
48 x 48
45 x 45
147 0 000
62
Din rail program
99,999 h
Digital runtime meter
BZ 148
• Digital runtime meter with EEPROM memory ensures
reliable operating time recording, even in case of power
failure
• Standardized housing 45 mm x 35 mm x 60 mm for
series installation with quick fastening for 35 mm profile
rail (DIN 50 022)
• Surface mounting with additional terminal cover
possible
• 7-digit high-contrast LCD display
• Digit height 5 mm
• Captive terminal screws
• Count shown on the display
• Counter up to 999,999.9 hours maximum
• Multi-voltage inputs 12–150 V DC and
24–240 V AC, 50–60 Hz
BZ 148
Terminals 1 + 2
Terminal 4
Technical data:
Rated voltage:
12–150 V DC/24–240 V AC, ± 10 %
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Device consumption: max. 0.8 VA
Admissible ambient temperature: –10 °C... +70 °C
Counting range: 999,999.9 hours without zero position
Electrical connection:
up to 2.5 mm2 fine-wire
up to 4.0 mm2 single-wire
Protection class according to EN 610 10 when
mounted in accordance with its designated use: II
Protection type: IP 65 (front side)
Weight: approx. 75 g
Supply voltage
Time meter input
Dimension drawings DIN 43 880
66
60
35
52,5 *
45
90
128 *
44
55 *
*with terminal cover
Type
Counting range
Mounting
Front panel
mm
Order No.
BZ 148
999,999.9 h (1/10 h)
Distribution cabinet installation with quick fastening for 35 mm profile rail
35 x 45
(depth 60 mm)
148 0 000
Terminal cover for surface mounting, sealable
907 0 064
63
Wall mounting
☎ 10–30 °C
Analog clock thermostats
Function:
Flat design clock thermostate for independent monitoring
and control of room temperature. Simple setting of the
energy-saving night set-back on the program dial.
Alternative 24 h segment or changeable tappet dial
for 24 hours or 7 days. Suitable for oil or gas heating.
The clock thermostat controls e.g. circulation pump,
thermal actuator, magnetic valve, motorised mixer or
the gas heater directly with a relay contact.
RAM 721
RAM 722/782/784
RAM 722 RAMSES ®
Electronic clock thermostat for time-dependent
monitoring and control of room temperature.
• Electronic temperature control
• Operating point and electronic feed-back adjustable
from the beginning
• Normal and set-back temperature separately settable,
range +10 °C ... +30 °C
• Party switch and program display
• Selection switch for operating mode:
m permanent set-back temperature
r permanent normal temperature
j automatic operation
f frost and plant protection +6 °C
• Synchronised motor drive
• Changeover contact 6 (1) A/250 V~
RAM 782 RAMSES ® as RAM 722 but
• Quartz mechanism with approx. 3 days power reserve
• Connection for external telephone remote switch
RAM 784 s
with opened hinged cover and segment program dial
Tappet program dial
Place the hands at
16.00 hr ...
RAM 784 RAMSES ® as RAM 782 but
• For 2 or 3 lead connection
• Battery monitoring with display for battery change when
necessary with flashing LED
• Jamming and pump protection function (activatable)
RAM 721 RAMSES ® as RAM 722 but
• 24 hour tappet program dial
• Normal temperature adjustable from +10 °C...+30 °C
• Set-back temperature at approx. 5 K lower,
related to set comfort temperature
• Without selection switch operating mode
RAM 725 RAMSES ® as RAM 722 but
• Comfort temperature control by existing thermostatic
valves on the radiator
• Central regulation of the set-back temperature by
RAM 725 in the range +10 °C...+30 °C dependent on
time program
• Selection switch for 4 operating modes
Technical data:
Clock thermostats are a combination consisting of time
switch and thermostat (two point control). Tappets or
segments make possible multiple reductions each day.
Segment program dial:
24 hours program, programmable every 15 min,
minimum switching interval 15 min
Tappet program dial:
changeable for 24 hour and 7 day program
24 hour program:
programmable every 5 min,
minimum switching interval 20 min
7 day program:
programmable every 30 min,
minimum switching interval 2 hours
Setting time: by analog time display, also anitclockwise
Temperature control: two point control,
adjustment range +10 °C...+30 °C,
frost protection +6 °C, operating point (±4 K)
Adjustable switching differential by electronic
feedback: 0.4–1.2 K (4...20 min)
Type RAM 721/725: fixed 1.5 K (20 min)
Contacts: Changeover switch,
floating, gap less than 3 mm
Switching capacity: 6 (1) A/250 V~
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Protection class:
II in accordance with EN 60730-1, if installed as directed
Test approvals: national and international depending
on device type V (RAM 721/722/725/782)
Housing dimensions: 90 x 150 x 35 mm
RAM 722/721/725 without power reserve
Operating voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Accuracy: mains frequency dependent
RAM 782 with power reserve
Operating voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50...60 Hz
Accuracy: ≤ ± 1 s/day at 20 °C
RAM 784 with battery operation
Operating voltage: 2 LR 6 alkaline cells
Accuracy: ≤ ± 1 s/day at 20 °C
... remove the
graduated ring ...
Individual room control
see page 86.
... turnover and clip on
with week program.
Red tappet for normal
temperature.
Blue tappet for set-back
temperature.
Tappets:
red: switches normal temperature on
Order No. 934 3 236
blue: switches reduction on
Order No. 934 3 111
64
7 d 24 h
Wall mounting
☎ 10–30 °C
Analog clock thermostats
1
2
3
1
2
3
M
* 10
4
5
M
11
+
11
L
N
RAM 7… controls circulation pump,
thermal mixing valve or oil/gas burner
RAM 7…controls motorised mixing valves
60
Fixing onto flush-type box or wall mounting.
Fixing dimensions as RAM 3… product types.
10
1
2
3
+
* 10
* 10
11
11
L
N
L
N
RAM 784 controls circulation pump,
thermal mixing valve or oil/gas burner
RAM 784 controls motorised mixing valves
Functions and plug-in plinth connection RAM 722s/782s
-
* 10
4
5
L
N
1
2
3
7 d 24 h
Control lamp
for heating mode
Program display and
party switch
for premature manual switching to
normal or set-back temperature
i
TF
11
* Connection for remote telephone switch
RAM 782/784 control by telephone is possible,
constant 21 °C with closed contact.
(Remote telephone switch to be ordered separately)
Normal temperature control
r for setting a comfortable room temperature
m
Energie saving control for setting the
set-back temperature e.g. at night
Time display with
adjustable hand forwards
and back for summer/
±1h winter time correction
j
L
N
Adjustable
switching differential
Selection switch for the operating mode
j automatic Program
r permanently normal temperature
m permanently set-back temperature
f frost and plant protection ( +6 °C)
Adjustable
operating point
Type
Power
reserve
Temperature
range r/m
Switching
differential
Connection*
Switching
contacts
Display
RAM 722
RAM 722 s
RAM 782
RAM 782 s
RAM 784
RAM 784 s
–
–
3 days
3 days
1 year
1 year
+10 °C to +30 °C
+10 °C to +30 °C
+10 °C to +30 °C
+10 °C to +30 °C
+10 °C to +30 °C
+10 °C to +30 °C
adjustable 0.4–1.2 K
adjustable 0.4–1.2 K
adjustable 0.4–1.2 K
adjustable 0.4–1.2 K
adjustable 0.4–1.2 K
adjustable 0.4–1.2 K
3- or 4-wire
3- or 4-wire
3- or 4-wire
3- or 4-wire
2- or 3-wire
2- or 3-wire
1 changeover switch
1 changeover switch
1 changeover switch
1 changeover switch
1 changeover switch
1 changeover switch
1 LED heating mode
1 LED heating mode
1 LED heating mode
1 LED heating mode
1 LED battery monitoring
1 LED battery monitoring
24 h/7 days tappets
24 h segments
24 h/7 days tappets
24 h segments
24 h/7 days tappets
24 h segments
722 0 030
722 0 801
782 0 030
782 0 801
784 0 030
784 0 801
RAM 721
–
fixed 1.5 K
3- or 4-wire
1 changeover switch
–
24 h tappets
721 0 030
RAM 725
–
+10 °C to +30 °C r
–∆5Km
Set-back range
+10 °C to +30 °C
fixed 1,5 K
3- or 4-wire
1 changeover switch
1 LED heating mode
24 h/7 days tappets
725 0 030
Wallpaper/wall cover plate when exchanging RAM 3... devices for new clock thermostats, e.g. RAM 722...
Frame for surface wiring
Program
Order No.
907 0 245
938 4 263
* only if a 3 wire cable is installed, terminals 2 and 4 can be bridged, in this case the clock of the clock thermostat stops, when the heating system is switched off in summer.
If more than 3 leads are installed, it is possible to supply a separate voltage to the clock thermostat from another phase.
65
Flush mounting
6 – 30 °C 7 d 24 h holidays ± 1h
Digital clock thermostat
auto
RAM 822 top RAMSES ®, mains version
• Digital timer thermostat with an elegant, flush fitting
design, which can be installed into any living room
• Suitable for energy-saving room temperature control in
houses, apartments, offices, doctor’s practices, holiday
homes
• Fully automatic summer/winter switchover
• The day-to-day main functions are quick
and simple to use
• INFO key for the display of important settings in plain
text
• Text line in the display guides the user step-by-step
through the simple programming
• Quick startup through 2 basic programs with individually adjustable comfort temperature/lowering temperature
• Individual program with 22 programmable time phases
also allows lowering phases during the day, e.g. when
working away from home
• Comfort temperature and lowering temperature
adjustable between 10 °C and 30 °C
• Protection against frost adjustable between 6 °C
and 10 °C
• Party/ECO program with adjustable duration for comfort
temperature or lowering temperature without changing
standard program
• Text display available in 5 languages
• Holiday program with frost protection or
datecontrolled heating program e.g. for holiday homes
• Easy upgrade of existing system
• Stecksockel for flush-mounted box required with 2- or
3-wire connection
RAM 822 top, weiß (mains version)
RAM 820 top, weiß (battery version)
RAM 820 top RAMSES ®, battery version
as RAM 822 top but
• Digital timer thermostat with 2- or 3-wire connection,
power supply by 2 batteries 1.5 V AAA included
• Battery monitoring with display for battery change
Installation
118
Flush box
mounted
17
RAMSES 822 top
Operating voltage: 230 V~,±10 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Power reserve:
about 5 hours of permanent heating operation
in case of power failure
RAMSES 820 top
Operating voltage:
Battery operation, 2 x 1.5 V (AAA) alkaline batteries
Service life of battery:
about 1 year depending on frequency of switching
Battery replacement time:
max. 10 min without losing time
INDIVIDUAL ROOM CONTROL
80
Dimension drawings
Technical data:
Mode of operation:
Type 1 B according to EN 60730-1
Contact rating:
max. 6 (1) A 250 V~, min. 1 mA 5 V....
Contact material: AgSnO2
Contact: Change-over contact, potential-free
galvanically separated
Accuracy: 1 s/day at 20 °C
Time basis: Quartz
Control accuracy: ≤ ± 0.2 °C
Temperature display: to the nearest 0.1 °C
Temperature setting range:
+6 °C... +30 °C in steps of 0.2 degrees
Possible control types:
Pulse width modulation or hysteresis controller
Control period: 5..30 min
Control capture range: ± 0.2 K... 5 K
Protection class: II according to EN 60 730-1
System of protection:
IP 20 according to DIN EN 60529
By combining the above clock
thermostats with THEBEN actuators
creates a convenient, needs-driven
individual room control.
The actuators are simply screwed onto the
individual radiators or into the heating circuit
distributor in underfloor heating systems.
60
See Page 86 for a detailed description.
Type
Program
Voltage supply
Temperature
range r/m
Control
accuracy
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
RAMSES 822 top
pure white RAL 9010
24 h/7 d
Holiday program
230 V/50 Hz
+10 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
< 0.2 K
1 changeover switch
6 (1) A
822 0 031
RAMSES 820 top
pure white RAL 9010
24 h/7 d
Holiday program
2 x 1.5 V AAA
+10 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
< 0.2 K
1 changeover switch
6 (1) A
820 9 011
66
Flush mounting
6 – 30 °C 7 d 24 h holidays ±1 h
Digital clock thermostat
auto
Displays the day of the week
(1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday,
etc.)
Symbol line for displaying
programming level
(Sliding switch MENU)
OK button
(confirm settings/selection
or program)
Change button +
Multifunktionsanzeige, z.B.
“Raumtemperatur 20,0 ˚C”
Display PARTY - or ECO program active
Info button
for viewing settings
RESET button
Change button –
ESC button (cancels the
programming entries)
Heating On
Indicates battery
replacement due
Sliding switch
for program selection
Displays the switching phases
P1
P2
Basic program*
A standard energy-saving program is pre-configured,
thereby reducing installation time.
Daytime comfort temperature 20 °C, reduced temperature
17 °C at night.
Basic program*
Comfort temperature on workdays, mornings and evenings.
Reduced temperature while at work and at night.
Comfort temperature all day at weekends.
Mo–Fr
20 °C
17 °C
0
0
20 °C
17 °C
Installation and electrical connection
RAMSES 820 top
Connection terminals
Consumers
1
2
3
Individualised program (weekly program)*
The comfort program can be adapted to suit individual
requirements (e.g. free Wednesday afternoons). There are 23
memory locations with comfort and reduced phases available.
Connection examples for RAMSES® 822 top
5
4
3
2
1
Control of a burner
5
4
3
2
1
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
Mo–Fr
0
20 °C
17 °C
Sa–Su
0
P3
6
Sa–Su
20 °C
17 °C
* The program temperatures can be changed.
(Comfort and reduced temperature)
Connection examples for RAMSES® 820 top
3
2
1
Control of a burner
3
2
1
1,5V AAA
Control via the recirculation pump or
storage/hot air heating
Control via the recirculation pump or
storage/hot air heating
67
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Digital clock thermostats
RAM 812 top RAMSES ®, standard power
• Digital clock thermostat in extremely flat, attractive
design that can easily be integrated into any living room
• The external design can be suit to the personal taste or
trends by changing the coloured covers
• Suitable for energy-saving room temperature control in
single-family houses, apartments, heated areas, offices,
sales rooms, workshops, professional practices, holiday
homes
• Quick and easy operation for setting general
daily functions
• INFO button for querying important settings in plain text
• Textzeile im Display führt den Bediener Schritt für Schritt
durch die Programmierung
• You can use the text guid for individual settings to meet
their own requirements
• Can be optimally set: adjustable operating point and
switching differential
• Easy setup and startup with 2 pre-programmed basic
programs, each having individual settings for comfort and
set-back temperatures
• Individual program with 22 programmable time-periods
allows setting of daily set-back phases, such as when a
house/office is temporarily unoccupied
• Comfort and set-back setting ranges from
10 °C–30 °C
• Frost protection setting ranges from 6 °C–10 °C
• ”Party“ and ”Eco“ mode buttons for temporarily setting
an overriding comfort or set-back temperature for specific
periods without changing your standard program.
• Fully automatic switchover to and from daylight savings
time (DST).
• Power reserve (approx. 5 hours) during power outages
• Vacation program with set-back temperature or
date-controlled heating phase, such as for holiday homes
• 3-wire or 4-wire connection in mounting base
• Plug-in base for wall or flush-mount boxes
RAM 812 top (standard power)
RAM 811 top (battery version)
7 d 24 h holidays ±1 h
Technical Data:
Control system type:
type 1 B according to EN 60730-1
Contact rating:
max. 2 (1) A, 250 V~, min. 1 mA 5 V....
Contact material: AgSnO2
Contact: changeover contact, floating, isolated
Accuracy: ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Time base: quartz
Control accuracy: ±0.2 K
Temperature display: 0.1 °C accuracy
Temperature setting range:
+6 °C to +30 °C in 0.2 ° steps
Selectable control types:
pulse-width modulation or hysteresis control
Control periods: 5…30 min
Control look-in range: ±0.2 K…5 K
Protection class: II in accordance with EN 60 730-1
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60529
RAM 812 top
Operating voltage: 230 V~, ± 10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Power reserve: approx. 5 hours,
system defaults to heating mode in event of power failure
RAM 811 top
Operating voltage: battery-operation,
2 x 1.5 V alkaline-cells, type LR 6
Battery life:
approx 1 year, depending on frequency of switching
Battery changing time:
max. 10 min without losing clock setting
Housing dimensions: 95 x 145 x 32 mm
RAM 811 top RAMSES ®, battery power
• Digital clock thermostat with same features as the
RAM 812 top, except with 2-wire or 3-wire connection
Power supply: 2 x 1.5 V LR 6 alkaline cells
• Battery monitoring with display indicating need for
battery replacement
Cover set in 6 colours 907 0 290
Dimension drawings
Installation
INDIVIDUAL ROOM CONTROL
32,2
Fixing onto
flush-type box
or wall
mounting.
98,3
145
60
68
auto
By combining the above clock
thermostats with THEBEN actuators
creates a convenient, needs-driven
individual room control.
The actuators are simply screwed onto the
individual radiators or into the heating circuit
distributor in underfloor heating systems.
See Page 86 for a detailed description.
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Digital clock thermostats
i
7 d 24 h holidays ±1 h
auto
Info button shows customers the most important settings in sequence: room temperature –>
set temperature –> date and time –> program display –> display indicator
24-hours temperature program display: standard comfort temperature and set-back phases
Battery monitor (RAM 811 top)
Manual switching: Party mode setting (holds override comfort setting for 10 min–23 h 50 min)
ECO switching (hold override set-back setting for 10 min–23 h 50 min)
RAM 812 top controls motorized mixing valves
Text information and text-driven operator quidance
Settings menu bar: standard comfort temperature, set-back temperature, frost-protection
temperature time, date, custom program (P3), vacation/summer program, control settings, etc.
Weekday display
Heating status display
RAM 812 top controls circulation pump or actuator
T1
T2
L
N
RAM 811 top controls oil or gas burners
Setting buttons +/– for manual temperature
change in the current program phase
RAM 811 top controls circulation pump or actuator
Operating mode selector switch
P1
P2
Basic program*
A standard energy-savings program is already
pre-programmed, thus reducing installation time
Daily comfort temperature: 20 °C
Set-back temperature (night): 17 °C
Basic program*
Comfort temperature: mornings and evenings on workdays,
Set-back temperature: during working hours and at night,
Comfort temperature: all day on weekends.
Mo–Fr
20 °C
17 °C
0
0
20 °C
17 °C
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
Mo–Fr
0
20 °C
17 °C
Sa–Su
0
P3
6
Sa–Su
20 °C
17 °C
Custom program (week program)*
* Program temperatures can be changed
This comfort program can be customized to meet individual requirements (comfort and set-back temperatures)
(such as with different settings for Wednesday afternoons, etc.)
22 memory settings are available for comfort and set-back phases
Type
Program
Nominal
voltage
Temperature
range r/m
Control
accuracy
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
RAMSES 812 top
pure white RAL 9010
24 h/7 d
Holiday program
230 V/50 Hz
+10 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
≤ ± 0.2 K
1 changeover switch
6 (1) A
812 0 032
RAMSES 811 top
pure white RAL 9010
24 h/7 d
Holiday program
2 x 1.5 V AA
+10 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
≤ ± 0.2 K
1 changeover switch
6 (1) A
811 9 032
Cover set with 6 covers, light grey, dove blue, ivory, white-green, grey transparent, green transparent
907 0 290
69
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Digital timer thermostat with optimizing function
RAM 832 top RAMSES ®, mains version
• Suitable for energy-saving room temperature control in
single-family houses, apartments, heating zones, offices,
sales rooms, workshops, doctor’s practices, holiday
homes
• Ideal device for shift workers since 3 different weekly
programs can be programmed for early and late shifts
and non-working days. When required, one of the three
programs can be selected by simply using the rotary
switch.
• The day-to-day main functions are quick and simple to use
• INFO key for the inquiry of important settings in plain text
• Text line in the display guides the user step-by-step
through the programming
• A technically knowledgeable user can individually adjust
different control types
• Optimum adjustment through the possibility of adjusting
working point and switching difference
• Quick startup via 2 basic programs. Comfort and lowering
phases can be correctly individually in terms of time.
3 comfort and 2 lowering temperatures can be assigned
to each phase.
• Individual program with 32 programmable time phases
also allows lowering phases during the day,
e.g. when working away from home
• Comfort temperature and lowering temperature
adjustable between 6 °C and 30 °C
• Optimization function for the automatic correction of the
start of heating, allowing the comfort temperature to be
reached earlier
• Protection against frost adjustable between
6 °C and 10 °C
• Party/ECO program with adjustable duration for comfort
temperature or lowering temperature without changing
standard program
• Fully automatic summer/winter time correction
• Power reserve approx. 5 h in case of power failure
• Holiday program with lowering temperature or datecontrolled heating phase programmable, e.g. for holiday
homes
• Temperature shock detection saves heating costs during
short ventilation periods. (function can be switched off)
• Pump safety function prevents recirculating pumps from
seizing outside the heating period by regular short switchon periods. (function can be switched off)
• Runtime meter for recording the relay switching times
e.g. burner running time
• 3- or 4-wire connection in socket
• Socket for wall or flush-mounted box
RAM 832 top (mains version)
RAM 831 top (battery version)
7 d 24 h Optimization ±1 h
Technical data:
Mode of operation: Type 1 B according to EN 60730-1
Contact rating: max. 6 (1) A 250 V~, min. 1 mA 5 V....
Contact material: AgSnO2
Contact: Change-over contact, potential-free
galvanically separated
Accuracy: 1 s/day at 20 °C
Time basis: Quartz
Control accuracy: ≤ ± 0.2 °
Temperature display: to the nearest 0.1 °C
Temperature setting range:
+6 °C... +30 °C in steps of 0.2 degrees
Possible control types:
Pulse width modulation or hysteresis controller
Control period: 5..30 min
Control catch range: ± 0.2 K..5 K
Protection class: II according to EN 60 730-1
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60529
RAM 832 top:
Operating voltage: 230 V~, ± 10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Power reserve: approx. 5 hours
RAM 831 top:
Operating voltage: Battery operation,
2 alkaline batteries 1.5 V AA
Service life of battery:
about 1year depending on frequency of switching
Time for changing battery:
max. 10 min without losing time
RAM 831 top RAMSES ®, battery version
• Digital clock thermostat as before, but
2- or 3-wire connection, power supply by 2 batteries
1.5 V AA alkaline
• Battery monitoring with display for battery change
Dimension drawings
Installation
INDIVIDUAL ROOM CONTROL
32,2
Fixing onto
flush-type box
or wall
mounting.
98,3
145
60
70
auto
By combining the above clock
thermostats with THEBEN actuators
creates a convenient, needs-driven
individual room control.
The actuators are simply screwed onto the
individual radiators or into the heating circuit
distributor in underfloor heating systems.
See Page 86 for a detailed description.
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Digital timer thermostat with optimizing function
7 d 24 h Optimization ±1 h
auto
Programs set in-factory
P1 Basic program*
A standard energy saving program has already
been pre-programmed, thus shortening installation.
During the day comfort temperature 20 °C, lowering
temperature 17 °C overnight.
Mo–Fr
20 °C
17 °C
0
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
Sa–Su
20 °C
17 °C
0
Basic programs can be supplemented with further comfort
phases (comfort levels 1, 2, 3) and lowering phases (lowering
levels 1, 2) of different temperatures.
P2 Basic program*
Weekdays, in the morning and evening comfort temperature.
Lowering temperature during working hours and at night.
At weekends, comfort temperature the entire day.
RAM 832 top controls motorized mixing valves
20 °C
17 °C
Mo–Fr
0
20 °C
17 °C
0
The basic programs P1 and P2 can also be deleted, allowing
the individual weekdays to be programmed individually
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
Sa–Su
* Zeiten und Temperaturen der Programme sind veränderbar
(Komfort- und Absenktemperatur)
RAM 832 top controls circulation pump or actuator
P3 Separate weekly program with 5 temperature levels
The comfort program can be adapted to the individual
requirements (e.g. Wednesday afternoon off). 22 memory
locations for comfort and lowering phases are available
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
We
Tu
Mo
0
6
12
18
RAM 831 top controls oil or gas burners
Separate programs for early shift and late shift
P2 Early shift
The lowering phases are programmed on the individual
weekdays in accordance with the shift hours. On weekends,
comfort is programmed during the day and lowering at night.
Mo–Fr
20 °C
17 °C
0
The lowering phases are programmed according to the late
shift. On weekends, comfort is programmed during the day and
lowering at night.
20 °C
17 °C
Comfort program during the day during presence in the house
and lowering at night on all weekdays. If you are absent during
holidays, the date and time for the start and end of
holidays are entered, so that you will come back to the
comfortably warm apartment after the holidays.
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
6
12
18
24 h
Mo–Fr
0
20 °C
17 °C
Sa–Su
0
P1 Non-working days
6
Sa–Su
20 °C
17 °C
0
P3 Late shift
T1
T2
L
N
24 h
RAM 831 top controls circulation pump or actuator
Mo–Fr
20 °C
17 °C
0
Sa–Su
20 °C
17 °C
0
The large rotary switch lets you select the desired program at any time.
If the basic programs are deleted, a total of 32 memory locations are
available for all 3 programs.
Type
Program
Nominal
voltage
Temperature
range r/m
Control
accuracy
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
RAMSES 832 top
pure white RAL 9010
24 h/7 d
Holiday program
230 V/50 Hz
+6 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
≤ ± 0.2 K
1 changeover switch
6 (1) A
832 0 032
RAMSES 831 top
pure white RAL 9010
24 h/7 d
Holiday program
2 x 1.5 V AA
+6 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
≤ ± 0.2 K
1 changeover switch
6 (1) A
831 9 032
Cover set with 6 covers, light grey, dove blue, ivory, white-green, grey transparent, green transparent
907 0 290
71
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Digital clock thermostat for underfloor auxiliary heating
with high-speed heating and runtime meter
RAM 818 top 6/16 A RAMSES ®
• Clock thermostat for floor heating, suitable for energysaving control of:
- electric additional floor heating systems
- quickly reacting floor heating systems
- high-speed heating for 1 h by a long key press of the
Info key
• Runtime meter for recording the duty cycle
• 3 different weekly programs can be selected using the
rotary switch
• Ideal device for shift workers since 3 different weekly
programs can be programmed for early and late shifts
and non-working days.
• The day-to-day functions can be quickly started and are
simple to use through 2 basic programs
• 3 comfort and 2 lowering temperatures can be assigned
to 32 programmable time phases.
• Info key for the inquiry of important settings
• Text line in the display guides the user step-by-step
through the programming
• Different control types can be set individually
• Optimum adjustment through the possibility of
adjusting working point and switching difference
• Comfort and lowering phases can be adjusted between
6 °C and 30 °C, thus setting a pleasant floor surface
temperature
• Optimizing function for the automatic correction of the
start of heating
• Protection against frost adjustable between
6 °C and 10 °C
• Party/ECO program with adjustable duration for comfort
temperature or lowering temperature
• Power reserve approx. 3 h in case of power failure
• Easy to mount through socket for flush-mounted box
• Special encapsulated temperature sensor (IP 65)
including a 4 m connecting cable for mounting in empty
pipes
RAM 818 top
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
auto
Technical data:
Control type: RS type 2 B according to
EN 60 730-1:1991
Operating voltage: 230 V–240 V, ±10 %
Rated frequency: 50–60 Hz
Power reserve: 3 hours
Accuracy: ±1 s/d at 20 °C
Contact: switchover contact, potential-free
max. 6 A/250 V~, min.1 mA/5 V
Control accuracy: ± 0.2 K
Temperature display: to the nearest 0.1 °C
Temperature meas. range: 0 °C... +50 °C
Temperature setting range:
+6 °C... +30 °C in steps of 0.2 degrees
Control period: 5...30 min (PD controller)
Control catch range: ±0.2 K… ±5 K (PD controller)
Switching hysteresis: ±0.2 K… ±1.0 K (hysteresis
controller)
Memory locations: 32 temperature changes, programmable for Mo-Fr, Sa-Su, each day or for individual days
Protection class: II according to EN 60 730-1
when mounted in accordance with its designated use
Protection type: IP 21 according to EN 60 529-1
RAM 818 top 16 A
Control type:
RS type 1 B according to EN 60 730-1:1991
Contact: NO contact, max. 16 A/250 V~
Protection class: II according to EN 60 730-1 when
mounted on a flush-mounted box in accordance with its
designated use
Basic programs:
Program 1:
Mo–Fr
Comfort 5.30– 9.00 am and 9.00–11.00 pm
Sa/Su
Comfort 7.30–10.30 am and 9.00–11.00 pm
Program 2:
Mo–Fr
Comfort 6.00– 8.00 am and 4.00–10.00 pm
Sa/Su
Comfort 6.00– 8.00 am and 4.00–11.00 pm
Program 3: Freely programmable
2
RAMSES 818 top
2
230 V~
Electric heating
Electric under-floor heating
Dimension drawings
145
32,2
4000
98,3
6
32
Type
Program
Nominal
voltage
Temperature
range r/m/f
Connection
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
RAMSES 818 top
6A
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
230 V/50 Hz
+6 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
3- or 4-wire
+ 2-wire sensor
1 changeover switch
6 (1) A
818 0 035
RAMSES 818 top
16 A
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
230 V/50 Hz
+6 °C...+30 °C
+6 °C...+10 °C Frost protection
3- or 4-wire
+ 2-wire sensor
1 working contact
16 (2) A
818 0 036
72
Wall mounting
5–39 °C
Digital clock thermostat with radio control
Function:
THEBEN offers an innovative system for room temperature
control in combination with under-floor and radiator heating.
Cost-efficient and convenient retrofitting for all systems through
radio-controlled communication. This creates completely new
opportunities, not only for new-build but predominantly in
habited flats, apartments and functional buildings. Each system
comprises a clock thermostat per room with integrated radio
transmitter and a receiver. For control over several rooms/
heating circuits, several sets can be operated in parallel.
• RAMSES 813 top HF, the new radio system enables
optimal energy saving while ensuring an individual
pleasant, comfortable room climate
• The sets can be upgraded with further modules for
operation over several heating zones without mutual
interference
• Operation is especially simple thanks to step-by-step user
guidance through text lines in the display
• A rotary switch can be set to one of 3 different programs
(2 pre-programmed basic and one individualised program
with a max. of 22 temperature phases)
• Further comfort functions include Party and ECO program,
date-controlled holdiay program and automatic
summer/wintertime changeover.
• The highly-modern radio system is digitally-coded and
protected against interference from other radio systems
• The central control unit reliably receives the radio signals
of the battery-powered room transmitter in the building
through walls and ceilings
• High interference immunity through repeated transmission
of coded ON and OFF signals for each channel, ensuring zero
failure even in large buildings with individual room control
• Level display with 5 LEDs for checking reception quality and
detecting interference fields at the installation location
• Extremely reliable thanks to battery monitoring and
battery replacement indicator
• Simple battery replacement without loss of time of program
• Emergency receiver function, in the event of transmitter
failing or radio receiver being defective over a prolonged
period
RAM 813 top HF (radio control)
Receiver REC 11 for top mounting (Set A)
Receiver REC 21
as earthed intermediate connector (Set S)
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
auto
Technical data:
Mode of operation: Type 1 B to EN 60730-1
Control accuracy: < ± 0.2 K
Control period: 5...30 min
Transmission frequency: 868 MHz
Transmission power: < 10 mW
Supply voltage:
2 x 1.5 V AA alkaline batteries
Battery life:
approx. 2 years, depending on switching frequency
Range:
approx. 25–30 m in buildings, depending on type
REC 11/21 receiver
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %, 50/60 Hz
Switching capacity: 16 (2) A/250 V~ (Set A)
16 (2) A/230 V~ (Set S)
Coding: 65536 Codes
Field strength display: 5 LED's
Relay status display: 1 LED
Protection class: ll to EN 60730-1
subject to designated installation
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60529
RAM 813 top HF, Set A, RAMSES ® 1 zone controller
• Comprising a RAM 813 top HF clock thermostat and a REC 11
receiver with a NO contact, 16 (2) A/250 V for wall-mounting
RAM 795 HF, Set S, RAMSES ® 1 zone controller
• Comprising a RAM 813 top HF clock thermostat and a REC 21
receiver as earthed intermediate connector (16 (2) A), e.g.
for heated towel rail or fan heater
Dimension drawings
INDIVIDUAL ROOM CONTROL
32,2
By combining the above clock
thermostats with THEBEN actuators
creates a convenient, needs-driven
individual room control.
The actuators are simply screwed onto the
individual radiators or into the heating circuit
distributor in underfloor heating systems.
See Page 86 for a detailed description.
98,3
145
Type
Clock thermostat
Programs
Temperature
range r/m
RAMSES 813 top HF
Set A
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
RAMSES 813 top HF
Set S
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
Switching
differential
Connection
+6 °C to 30 °C
Frost protection
± 0,2 K
wireless
+6 °C to 30 °C
Frost protection
± 0,2 K
wireless
Receiver
Nominal
voltage
Switching contacts
Nominal
current
Order No.
230 V
50/60 Hz
1 working contact
16 (2) A/250 V~
813 9 403
230 V
50/60 Hz
1 working contact
16 (2) A/230 V~
813 9 405
73
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Digital clock thermostat with radio control
Function:
THEBEN offers an innovative system for room temperature
control in combination with under-floor and radiator
heating. Cost-efficient and convenient retrofitting for all
systems through radio-controlled communication. This
creates completely new opportunities, not only for newbuild but predominantly in habited flats, apartments and
functional buildings. Each system comprises a clock
thermostat per room with integrated radio transmitter and a
receiver. For control over several rooms, several sets can be
operated in parallel.
RAM 813 top HF (radio-control)
• RAMSES 813 top HF, the new radio system enables
optimal energy saving while ensuring an individual
pleasant, comfortable living climate
• The sets for 1/2 heating zones can be upgraded with
further modules for operation over several heating zones
without mutual interference
• Operation is especially simple thanks to step-by-step user
guidance through text lines in the display
• A rotary switch can be set at any time to one of 3 different
programs (2 pre-programmed basic and one individualised
program with a max. of 22 temperature phases)
• Further comfort functions include Party and ECOprogram,
date-controlled holdiay program and automatic
summer/wintertime changeover.
• The highly-modern radio system is digitally-coded and
protected against interference from other radio systems
• The central control unit reliably receives the radio signals
of the battery-powered room transmitter in the building
through walls and ceilings
• High interference immunity through repeated transmission
of coded ON and OFF signals for each channel, ensuring
zero failure even in large buildings with individual room
control
• Level display with 5 LEDs for checking reception quality
and detecting interference fields at the installation location
• Projection antenna for optimisng reception quality
• Extremely reliable thanks to battery monitoring and
battery replacement indicator
• Simple battery replacement without loss of time of program
• Control unit with floating changeover switch 6 (1) A/250 V
• Emergency receiver function, in the event of transmitter
failing or radio receiver being defective over a prolonged
period
REC 1 (1-channel receiver, 868 MHz)
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
auto
Technical data:
Mode of operation: Type 1 B to EN 60 730-1
Control accuracy: < ± 0.2 K
Control period: 5...30 min
Transmission frequency: 868 MHz
Transmission power: < 10 mW
Supply voltage:
2 x 1.5 V AA alkaline batteries
Battery life:
approx. 2 years, depending on switching frequency
Range:
approx. 20–30 m in buildings, depending on type
If the standard projection antenna proves inadequate
in unfavourable reception conditions, a rod antenna
can be used to improve reception quality
Order No. 907 0 334
REC receiver
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %, 50/60 Hz
Switching capacity: 6 (1) A/250 V~
Antenna system: Projection antenna
Field strength display: 5 LED's
Relay status display: 1 LED per channel
Protection class: ll to EN 60730-1
subject to designated installation
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60529
RAM 813 top HF, Set 1, RAMSES ® 1 zone controller
• Comprising a RAM 813 top HF clock thermostat and a
receiver with a changeover switch,
6 (1) A/250 V and wall-mounting set
RAM 813 top HF, Set 2, RAMSES ® 2 zone controllers
• Comprising two RAM 813 top HF clock thermostats and a
2-channel receiver with 2 changeover switches,
6 (1) A/250 V and wall-mounting set
REC 2 (2-channel receiver, 868 MHz)
RAM 813 top HF, Set 4, RAMSES ® 4 zone regulations
• Comprising four clock thermostats RAM 813 top HF and
two 2-channel receivers with 4 changeover contacts
Dimension drawings
INDIVIDUAL ROOM CONTROL
32,2
By combining the above clock
thermostats with THEBEN actuators
creates a convenient, needs-driven
individual room control.
The actuators are simply screwed onto the
individual radiators or into the heating circuit
distributor in underfloor heating systems.
See Page 86 for a detailed description.
98,3
*
145
*
74
*
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Digital clock thermostat with radio control
Radio pilot room controller,
e.g. for 2 flats (2 zone controller)
➊ RAM 813 top HF clock thermostat per flat with
transmitter in the mostly used room (pilot room), no
connection wires required.
➋ Receiver with 2 channels controls the heat supply to
the two flats via the respective recirculation pump.
REC
C1
M
4 5 6
RAM 813 top HF
C1
C1
1 2 3
auto
RAM 813 top HF
RAM 813 top HF
REC
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
7 8
C1
1 2 3
L N
C2
C2
M
4 5 6
7 8
L N
L
N
L
N
RAM 813 top HF, Set 1, REC receiver
REC receiver controls thermal actuator for hot water
heating or radiator valve and/or recirculation pump or
electric heating
RAM 813 top HF, Set 2, REC receiver
REC receiver controls e.g. two heating circuits with
actuator for hot water heating or radiator valve and/or
recirculation pump or electric heating
➊
Flat 1
Flat 2
➋
e.g. bathroom
Individual radio room control
for 2 and more rooms with under-floor heating
➊ RAM 813 top HF clock thermostat with transmitter in
each living room or office.
➋ Receiver in heating circuit distributor switches the
THEBEN actuator drives that control the heat supply
to the individual heating circuits.
➌ Actuators can be screwed onto existing valves in
heating circuit distributor.
Type
Clock thermostat
Programs
Temperature
range r/m
RAMSES 813 top HF
Set 1
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
RAMSES 813 top HF
Set 2
RAMSES 813 top HF
Set 4
e.g. lounge
➋
➌
➊
Switching
differential
Connection
+6 °C to 30 °C
Frost protection
± 0.2 K
wireless
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
+6 °C to 30 °C
Frost protection
± 0.2 K
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
+6 °C to 30 °C
Frost protection
± 0.2 K
Receiver
Nominal voltage
Switching contacts
Nominal current
Order No.
230 V
50/60 Hz
1 changeover contact
6 (1) A
813 9 401
wireless
230 V
50/60 Hz
2 changeover contacts 6 (1) A
813 9 402
wireless
230 V
50/60 Hz
4 changeover contacts 6 (1) A
813 9 404
UHF rod antenna for 868 MHz with wall holder and 2 m screened connection cable (required only for unfavourable reception quality).
Terminal box cover plate for receiver is included in delivery.
907 0 334
75
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Open Therm – Digital clock thermostat
for 2- or 3-point control
Function:
Clock thermostat as RAMSES 812 top, except with modem
interface for telephone remote control.
Switchable for 2 or 3-point control or 2-stage control
with sequence-controlled contact.
RAM 816 top RAMSES ®
• Clock thermostat for universal application
• Simple retrofitting through 2-wire connection in lounge,
no battery operation
• Telephone remote switching option for comfort and
reduced temperature with additional voice modem
• Switchable for 2 or 3-point control with
8 A/250 V switching outputs.
• 2. Switching step controllable by adjustable switching
differential temperature
• Suitable for 2-phase burners, blowers, convectors,
additional heaters for under-floor heating etc.
• An additional feed sensor is required for mixer control
• 2-wire BUS connection from room thermostat to control
unit with power pack and 2 output relays
• Both units with plug-in base and large terminal area
• Simple connection through short-circuit proof
and non-reversible 2-wire BUS (protection class III)
RAM 815/816 top
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
auto
Technical data:
Mode of operation: Type 1 B to EN 60730-1
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz
Power reserve: approx. 4 h after 3 days charging time
Switch load: max. 8 (1) A/250 V
Contact material: AgNi
Contact: floating, 1 changeover switch
and 1 working contact (RAM 816 top)
Time based on: Quartz
Control accuracy: ≤ ±0.2 K
Temperature display: accurate to 0.1 °C
Temperature measuring range: 0 °C... +50 °C
Temperature setting range:
+10 °C... +30 °C in 0.2 degree increments
+6 °C... +10 °C frost protection
Memory locations:
32 freely programmable memory locations with free
weekday block formation
Protection class: ll to EN 60730-1
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60529
RAM 815 top RAMSES ®
• As above, except with 2-point controller only
• 2-stage control not possible
OT-Box RAM 815/816 top
Accessories:
* with RAM 816 top only
MODEM
RAMSES 816 top
2-wire BUS
RS 232
3-point *
control
Heating stage II
ϑ
2
M
Flow temperature sensor
required for mixer control
*
2
OT-Box
230 V~
2/3
2
Connection diagrams see page 90.
Dimension drawings
32,2
98,3
145
GSM modem
Type
Program
Voice modem
Nominal
voltage
Temperature
range r/m/f
Temperature differential for
sequence-controlled contact
Connection
control unit
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
RAMSES 815 top 24 h/7 days
Holiday program
230 V/50 Hz
+6 °C to +30 °C
–
2-wire
1 changeover switch
8 (1) A
815 9 032
RAMSES 816 top 24 h/7 days
Holiday program
230 V/50 Hz
+6 °C to +30 °C
0.5 to 2.5 K
2-wire
1 working contact
1 changeover switch
8 (1) A
816 9 032
Flow temperature sensor required for mixer control with RAM 816/817 top
Voice modem incl. power supply and connection cables
GSM modem incl. aerial, power supply and connection cables
76
907 0 371
907 0 372
907 0 396
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Open Therm – Digital clock thermostat
with remote sensor
RAM 817 top RAMSES ®
As RAMSES 816 top, with separate temperature sensor
for wall mounting (included in set)
• Also suitable for temperature control in dusty or humid
rooms
• External temperature sensor in wall-mounted housing
with protection rating to IP 65 and protection class III,
cable length 4 m
• RAMSES 382 FA sensor can be connected to OT-Box as
an option
• Maximum sensor cable length 50 m, Ø > 0.75 mm2
• Both units with plug-in base and large terminal area
• Simple connection through short-circuit proof
and non-reversible 2-wire BUS (protection class III)
• An additional feed sensor is required for mixer control
RAM 817 top
OT-Box RAM 817 top
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
auto
Technical data:
Mode of operation: Type 1 B to EN 60730-1
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz
Power reserve: Approx. 4 h after 3 days charging time
Switch load: max. 8 (1) A, 250 V
Contact material: AgNi
Contact: 1 working contact and
1 floating changeover switch contact
Time based on: Quartz
Control accuracy: ≤ ±0.2 K
Temperature display: accurate to 0.1 °C
Temperature measuring range: 0 °C... +50 °C
Temperature setting range:
+10 °C... +30 °C in 0.2 degree increments
+6 °C... +10 °C frost protection
Memory locations:
32 freely programmable memory locations with free
weekday block formation
Protection class: ll to EN 60730-1
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60529
Temperature sensor: IP 65
External temperature sensor IP 65
Accessories :
Sensor connection on room thermostat also possible
2
MODEM
2
RAMSES 817 top
2-wire BUS
External temperature sensor IP 65
Flow temperature sensor
required for mixer control
RS 232
3-point
control
Heating stage II
ϑ
2
OT-Box
2
230 V~
M
2/3
2
Connection diagrams see page 90.
Dimension drawings (For dimension drawing of OT-Box, see page 72)
32,2
98,3
c 67
145
c 74
5
23.3
Type
Program
RAMSES 817 top 24 h/7 days
Holiday program
GSM modem
Voice modem
Nominal
voltage
Temperature
range r/m/f
Temperature differential for
sequence-controlled contact
Connection
control unit
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
230 V/50 Hz
+6 °C to +30 °C
0.5 to 2.5 K
2-wire
1 working contact
1 changeover switch
8 (1) A
817 9 032
Flow temperature sensor required for mixer control with RAM 816/817 top
Voice modem incl. power supply and connection cables
GSM modem incl. aerial, power supply and connection cables
907 0 371
907 0 372
907 0 396
77
Wall mounting
6–30 °C
Open Therm – heating controller for 2- or 3-point control,
weather-dependent, service water and circulation control
RAM 855 top
Installation in the sitting room or boiler room
OT-Box RAM 855 top
Installation in the boiler room
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
7d
auto
RAM 855 top RAMSES(r)
Universal digital heating controller with 4-channel digital
control, complete room operation and monitoring.
Additional modem interface (RS 232) for remote
temperature setting by telephone. Extremely simple
operation through text guideance display and
pre-configured programs for families and working people.
Fast installation through 2-wire control device to
controller connection in the heating room.
• Boiler/runup temperature (control circuit 1) controlled
by switching the burner
• Runup temperature (control circuit 2) controlled via
pump or mechanically-adjustable mixer
• 3-point controller with feed sensor
• Mixer control with runup temperature limiter for
under-floor heating
• Hot water controlled by switching load pump
• Highly economical control of hot water circulation pump,
as time and temperature dependent
• Simple to operate due to selector switch for 8 different
connection /function types
• Automatic sensor detection for weather-dependent or
room-dependent control
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz
Power reserve: Approx. 4 h after 3 days charging time
Memory locations: 32
Switch load: 8 (1) A, 250 V
Contact material: AgNi
Contacts: floating
Switching hysteresis: 2–20 K
Mixer runtime: 2–10 min
Heating curves:
infinite, individual adjustment for radiator and under-floor
heating through low end and final point adjustment
Adjustment ranges for room-dependent control:
– Comfort temperature: +15 °C... +30 °C
– Reduced temperature: +10 °C... +29.8 °C
– Frost protection: +6 °C... +15 °C
Special features:
• Simple selection of 3 room temperature time at rotary
switch. An individual weekly program, e.g. for shift
workers, 2 pre-configured programs for families and
working people.
• 3 constant temperatures selectable at rotary switch:
Comfort, reduced, frost-protection
• Info button for viewing key data such as program,
time, date and setpoint/actual temperature and
ambient temperature. Displays the switching status
of the outputs.
• Party/Eco program with adjustable period for
comfort or reduced temperature
• Date-controlled holiday program
• Automatic summer/winter time switchover
• Pump block protection
• Additional time program for service water
utilisation times
• Adjustable service water storage temperature and
additional legional protection can be configured
through short-term interval based runup
• Party/ECO program with adjustable duration for
comfort temperature or lowering temperature
• Date-controlled holiday program
• Automatic summertime/wintertime change
• Pump antilock system
Outputs:
• 4 working contacts
Inputs:
• External sensor (contained in set)
• Heating circuit feed sensor(contained in set)
• Feed or plunge sensor for service water
• Feed sensor for circulation
Accessories:
Feed temperature sensor
required for mixer control
Ambient temperature sensor
Dimension drawings
32,2
98,3
145
GSM modem
Type
Program
RAMSES 855 top 24 h/7 days
Holiday program
Nominal
voltage
Temperature
range r/m/f
Adjustable feed
temperature-limited
Connection
control unit
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V
Order No.
230 V/50 Hz
+6 °C to +30 °C
+40 °C to +90 °C
2-wire
4 working contacts
8 (1) A
855 9 032
Feed temperature sensor additionally required for applications with 2 feed sensors
Plunge sensor (Ø 6 mm) additionally required for applications with service water control or boiler plunge sensor
Voice modem incl. power supply and connection cables
GSM modem incl. aerial, power supply and connection cables
78
Voice modem
907 0 371
907 0 379
907 0 372
907 0 396
Wall mounting
j
6–30 °C
Open Therm – heating controller for 2- or 3-point control,
weather-dependent, service water and circulation control
7 d 24 h ±1 h 24
holidays
h
auto
The RAM 855 enables the following control types:
ϑ
1.) Weather-dependent heating control
with outside temperature sensor. The control device can be
installed in the living room or heating room. The OT-Box
with power unit and relay is installed in the heating room.
2
2
2.) Room-temperature driven control
without outside temperature sensor. The control device has an
integrated room temperature sensor that takes into account
sunlight, fireplace and other heat sources, in conservatories for
instance. A voice modem in the room-dependent controller
enables remote temperature setting by telephone.
OT-Box
Heating control via circulation pump with boiler control
OT-Box
OT-Box
Flow temperature control via burner control
Flow temperature control via burner control with
service water and circulation control (connection diagram 1)
Heizungsregelung über Motormischer
OT-Box
OT-Box
OT-Box
M
M
Flow temperature control via mixer control
M
Flow temperature control via mixer control with service
water control (connection diagram 2)
Flow temperature control via mixer and burner control
Connection diagram 1
Connection diagram 2
OTBUS
OTBUS
M
closed
2 3 4 5 6
1
7
8 9
OT-Box
RAM 855
2 3 4 5 6
1
M
ϑ
10 11
AF
ϑ
ϑ
L
N
BWRF
8 9
ϑ
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ϑ
BWT
open
M
OT-Box
RAM 855
ϑ
7
Mixer
ϑ
10 11
AF
ZP
LP
KF/VLF
RAM 855 top
weather-dependent or room-dependent
heating control. Mixer control and service
water temperature control.
BWT
HP
AF
= Outside temperature sensor
BWF = Household water temperature sensor
KF/VLF= Boiler/Forward flow temperature sensor
BWRF = Household water return flow sensor
LP
= Loading pump household water
HP
= Heating pump
ZP
= Circulation pump
L
N
ϑ
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ϑ
LP
HP
VLF
RAM 855 top
weather-dependent or room-dependent
heating control. Mixer control and service
water temperature control.
AF = Outside temperature sensor
BWF = Household water temperature sensor
VLF = Forward flow temperature sensor
LP = Loading pump household water
HP = Heating pump
79
Din rail program
7 d 24 h ±1 h holidays
Temperature and time zone control
auto
Function
Clock thermostat for installation to remote temperature
control. Protection against unauthorized adjustment,
therefore suitable for shops, school and conference room.
RAM 366/1 top RAMSES ®, 1 zone
• Digital time switch with day, week and holiday program
for programming normal and set-back temperature
phases.
• Day temperature settable in the range +6 °C...+30 °C and
night temperature in the range +6 °C...+26 °C
• Day and week program adjustable exactly to the minute
• 42 memory locations holiday program programmable
via date
• User guidance by integrated text line in the LCD display
(see page 21)
• Programming is shown graphically by means of a bar
chart on the LCD display
• Automatic summer/winter time changeover can be
alternatively switched off or randomly programmed (MEZ,
GB, USA changeover norm selectable)
• Guided copying of the switching times to other days of
the week (free block formation)
• Power reserve 10 years
• Manual over-ride switching and mode select switch for:
automatic, comfort, set-back, frost protection
• Connection for remote telephone switch to switch to
comfort mode or frost protection by telephone
• LED display for the active operating condition and the
relay condition
• Remote temperature sensors necessary, see ”accessory“
• Change-over contact, floating 10 (2) A/250 V~
• Terminal cover for wall mounting,
sealable ref. 907 0 053
• Flush mounting with installation kit No. 907 0 001
• Program saving by EEPROM
• PIN code
RAM 366/1 top
RAM 366/2 top
RAM 366/1 top
ϑ
M
1 2 3
4 5 6
L
N
ϑ
*
7 8 9
L N
**
RAM 366/2 top
ϑ
1 2 3
ϑ
4 5 6
M
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
L N
L
N
**
ϑ ϑ
*
*
* Control of circulating pump, electronic actuating drive,
thermal mixing valve or oil/gas burner
RAM 366/2 top RAMSES ®, 2 zones
• Clock thermostat as before, but with variable time
temperature phases.
• 42 memory locations
• 2 remote temperature sensors required, see “accessory“
• 2 change-over contacts, floating 10 (2) A/250 V~
Dimension drawings RAM 366 top + remote sensor
Terminal cover
☎
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ±10 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Power consumption: max. 3 VA
Time base: Quarz
Ganggenauigkeit: ≤ ±1 s/day at 20 °C
Shortest switching time: 1 min
Power reserve:
10 years by means of lithium battery (20 °C)
Connection voltage at the sensor:
protective low voltage
Contact: floating, gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgCdO
Permissible ambient temperature: –10 °C... +50 °C
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature-resistant,
elf extinguishing thermo plastic
Max. cross section for connection: 4 mm2
Protection class:
II in accordance with EN 60 730-1 if installed as directed,
protection class III for remote temperature sensor 1 and 2
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Accessories:
Remote sensor 1
Remote sensor 2 with
temperature adjustment ±3 K
** Connection for
separate remote
telephone switch
TF
INDIVIDUAL ROOM CONTROL
By combining the above clock
thermostats with THEBEN actuators
creates a convenient, needs-driven
individual room control.
The actuators are simply screwed onto the
individual radiators or into the heating circuit
distributor in underfloor heating systems.
See Page 86 for a detailed description.
*with terminal cover
Type
Program
Power
reserve ca.
Temperature
range r/m
Switching
differential
Special functions
RAMSES 366/1 top
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
10 years
+6 °C to +30 °C
+6 °C to +26 °C
≤ 0,5 K
RAMSES 366/2 top
24 h/7 days
Holiday program
10 years
+6 °C to +30 °C
+6 °C to +26 °C
≤ 0,5 K
Remote sensor 1, suitable for RAM 366/1 top and RAM 366/2 top
Remote sensor 2, with temperature adjustment suitable for RAM 366/1 top and RAM 366/2 top
80
Switching
contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
connection for remote 1 changeover
telephone switch
switch
10 A
366 0 002
connection for remote 2 changeover
telephone switch
switch
10 A
366 0 052
907 0 191
907 0 192
Wall mounting
5–30 °C
Room thermostats
Function:
Room temperature control with thermal feedback, suitable
for all types of heating, e.g. gas, water, electric heating with
central/single room control.
• Setting control for +5 °C to +30 °C, including mechanical limiting device
• RAM 708/709 also suitable for air conditioning devices
RAM 701 RAMSES ®
New
RAM 702 RAMSES ®
• Integrated temp. lowering (about 4 K) through external
activation (e.g. timer SYN 161 h, TR 610 top) possible
RAM 701
RAM 703 RAMSES ® as RAM 702, but internal setting
• Temperature cannot be set externally. The temperature is set
internally when the device is switched on
RAM 704 RAMSES ®
• Switch for additional heating ON/OFF+ control lamp
Technical data:
Operating voltage:
230–240 V~, +10 %, –15 %, 50–60 Hz
NC contact:
10 (4) A, 230 V~
max. 10 THEBEN actuators can be activated (see page 86)
Change-over contact:
10 (4) A (heating),
max. 10 THEBEN actuators can be activated (see page 86),
5 (2) A (cooling)Temperature range: +5 °C... +30 °C
Switching difference, dynamic:
about 1 K, thermal feedback
Protection class: II when mounted in accordance with its
designated use
Type of protection: IP 30
Color of housing: pure white (RAL 9010)
Label: V
Weight: approx. 80 g
For the connecting diagrams, see page 91.
RAM 705 RAMSES ®
• Switch for heating ON/OFF
New
RAM 706 RAMSES ®
• Integrated temperature lowering (about 4 K) through
external activation (e.g. time switch) possible
• Switch for heating ON/OFF + control lamp
RAM 706
RAM 707 RAMSES ®
• Switch for heating ON/OFF
• Switch for heating ON/OFF + control lamp
RAM 708 RAMSES ®
• Changeover contact for heating or cooling
New
RAM 709 RAMSES ®
• Changeover contact for heating or cooling
• 3-position selector switch for: comfort mode, lowering
mode, external lowering (time-controlled via time switch)
• Control lamp
RAM 707
70,7
Dimension drawings
75
Type
5,5
24
28
Nominal voltage
Temperature
range r/m
RAM 701
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 702
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 703
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 704
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 705
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 706
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 707
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 708
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 709
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
Adapter plate for flush-mounted socket 79 x 79 mm
83
11,5
Adapter plate for flush-mounted socket
Switching difference
dynamic about
Connection
Switching contacts
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
2-/3-wire
3-/4-wire
3-/4-wire
3-/4-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
4-/5-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 changeover switch
1 changeover switch
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A/5 (2) A
10 (4) A/5 (2) A
701 0 001
702 0 001
703 0 001
704 0 001
705 0 001
706 0 001
707 0 001
708 0 001
709 0 001
907 0 480
81
Flush mounting
5–30 °C
Room thermostats
Function:
Room temperature control with thermal feedback for
mounting in flush-mounted boxes. Ideal control for modernization and new buildings owing to its integratability without
any problems, thus adapting itself perfectly to the living
environment.
• Setting range +5 °C to +30 °C
• An option to limit the temperature range is provided
below the setting button
• Simple connection by screwless terminals
• Available as replacement unit or complete with frame,
including a building site protection cap
New
RAM 741 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
RAM 746 RA (with frame)
RAM 742 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
• Integrated temperature lowering (about 4 K) through
external activation (e.g. timer SYN 161 h,
TR 610 top 2) possible
50
RAM 746 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
• Integrated temperature lowering (about 4 K) through
external activation (e.g. timer) possible
• Switch for heating ON/OFF + control lamp
Technical data:
Operating voltage:
230–240 V~, +10 %, –15 %, 50–60 Hz
NC contact:
10 (4) A, 250 V~
max. 10 THEBEN actuators can be activated (see page 86)
Change-over contact:
10 (4) A (heating),
max. 10 THEBEN actuators can be activated (see page 86),
5 (1) A (cooling)
Temperature range: +5 °C... +30 °C
Switching difference, dynamic:
about 0.5 K, thermal feedback
Electrical connection:
screwless terminals for 2 x (1.5 mm2–2.5 mm2) wire
Protection class:
II when mounted in accordance with its designated use
Type of protection: IP 30 (with built-in cover)
Color of housing: pure white glossy (RAL 9010)
Label: V
Weight: approx. 80 g
Flush-mounted digital time switch
see page 33.
For the connecting diagrams, see page 91.
RAM 748 RAMSES ®
• Changeover contact for heating or cooling
New
RAM 746
(excluding cover, rotary button and frame)
Replacement unit for area switching programs
RAM 749 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
• 3-position selector switch for: comfort mode, lowering
mode, external lowering (time-controlled via time
switch)
• Control lamp
Dimension drawings
80,5
70,6
50
24,5
19
60
56
56
50,5
70,6
for
socketnach DIN 49073
für device
Gerätedose
according to DIN 49073
24,5
19
50,5
43,5
for
socketnach DIN 49073
für device
Gerätedose
according to DIN 49073
60
Type
Front
Nominal voltage
Temperature range
adjustable r/m
Switching difference
dynamic approx.
Connection
Switching contacts
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
RAM 741
RAM 742
RAM 746
RAM 748
RAM 749
RAM 741 RA
RAM 742 RA
RAM 746 RA
RAM 748 RA
RAM 749 RA
without frame
without frame
without frame
without frame
without frame
with frame
with frame
with frame
with frame
with frame
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
2-/3-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
2-/3-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 changeover switch
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 changeover switch
1 NC contact
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A/5 (1) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A/5 (1) A
10 (4) A
741 0 130
742 0 130
746 0 130
748 0 130
749 0 130
741 0 131
742 0 131
746 0 131
748 0 131
749 0 131
82
Wall mounting
Electronic room thermostats
5–30 °C
–phasedown–
Function:
Our room temperature controller of contemporary design
can be used for new or existing installations.
Suitable for all types of heating, e.g. gas, water, electric
heating etc. individual room control.
• Regulator for +5 °C to +30 °C, including mechanical
limiting device
RAM 701 RAMSES ®
RAM 702 RAMSES ®
• Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K), by external
control (e.g. time switch SYN 161 h, TR 610 top) possible
RAM 701
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %/50–60 Hz
NC contact: 10 (4) A, 250 V~
Changeover switch:
10 (4) A (heating), 5 (2) A (cooling),
max. 10 THEBEN actuators can be controlled (see page 76)
Temperature range: +5 °C...+30 °C
Differential: approx. 0.5 K, thermal feedback
Protection class:
II according to EN 60 730-1 if mounted as directed
Degree of protection: IP 30
Color of housing: Pure white (RAL 9010)
Approval symbol: V (RAM 701–707)
RAM 703 RAMSES ® Same as RAM 702 but internal setting
• External temperature setting not possible. Temperature is
set inside the device on start-up.
RAM 704 RAMSES ®
• Switch for additional heating ON/OFF + control lamp
RAM 705 RAMSES ®
• Switch for heating ON/OFF
RAM 706 RAMSES ®
• Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K) by
external control (e.g. time switch) possible.
• Switch for heating ON/OFF + control lamp
RAM 706
RAM 707 RAMSES ®
• Switch for heating ON/OFF + control lamp
• Switch for additional heating ON/OFF + control lamp
RAM 708 RAMSES ®
• Changeover switch for heating and/or cooling
RAM 709 RAMSES ®
• Changeover switch for heating and/or cooling
• 3 x selection switch for: easy operation, reduction, external
reduction (time-controlled with time switch)
• Control lamp
RAM 707
Surface mounting or directly on the flush-mounted socket,
also suitable for large-scale switching programs.
Depending on the make, the adapter plate (79 x 79 mm)
may be required to completely cover the flush-mounted
socket.
Dimension drawings
Adapter plate for flush-mounted socket
Type
Nominal voltage
Temperature
range r/m
RAM 701
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 702
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 703
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 704
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 705
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 706
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 707
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 708
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 709
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
Adapter plate for flush-mounted socket 79 x 79 mm
Switching
differential
Connection
Switching contacts
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
2-/3-wire
3-/4-wire
3-/4-wire
3-/4-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
4-/5-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 changeover switch
1 changeover switch
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A/5 (2) A
10 (4) A/5 (2) A
701 0 000
702 0 000
703 0 000
704 0 000
705 0 000
706 0 000
707 0 000
708 0 000
709 0 000
907 0 212
83
Wall mounting
5–30 °C
Electronic room thermostats
Function:
The electronic room temperature controller in modern
design can easily replace existing room temperature
controllers. Surface mounting or directly on flush box,
fitting as well to big surface switches.
Depending on type an adapter plate (79 x 79 mm) is
necessary for covering the complete flush box.
RAM 714 RAMSES ®
• Precise electronic two step controller for all heating
types, ex. gas-, water-, electrical heating etc.
• Individual room control is possible in combination with
Theben actuators
• Exact temperature control in the range of 5…30 °C
• Status indication of the heating by LED
• Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 3.5 K)
by external control (ex. time switch SYN 160 a,
TR 610 top) possible. Temperature reduction
can be reduced to 2 K by opening a wire bridge.
RAM 714
10–60 °C
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %, 50 Hz
Protection class: II if mounted as directed
Degree of protection: IP 30
Colour of housing: pure white (RAL 9010)
RAM 714:
Temperature range: +5 °C…+30 °C
Control accuracy: ± 0.25 K
NC contact: 8 A/230 V~
RAM 714 A:
Temperature range: +10 °C…+60 °C
Control accuracy: ± 0.5 K
Sensor cable: length 4 m, Ø 6 mm, (IP 54)
NC contact: 16 A/230 V~
Wiring diagram see page 91.
RAM 714 A RAMSES ®
Precise electronic two step controller
same as RAM 714 but:
• External temperature sensor for floor heating
(humid rooms or bathroom heating)
• Can be switched over to connect existing NTC sensors
(33 KΩ/25 °C)
• Setting range 10…60 °C
• ON/OFF switch for heating
• Sensor cable IP 54, length 4 m
RAM 714 A
Dimension drawings
INDIVIDUAL ROOM CONTROL
By combining the above clock
thermostats with THEBEN actuators
creates a convenient, needs-driven
individual room control.
The actuators are simply screwed onto the
individual radiators or into the heating circuit
distributor in underfloor heating systems.
See Page 86 for a detailed description.
RAM 714
Type
Nominal voltage
RAM 714 A
Temperature
range r/m
RAM 714
230 V/50 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
RAM 714 A
230 V/50 Hz
+10 °C to +60 °C
Adapter plate for flush-mounted socket 79 x 79 mm
84
Adapter plate for flush-mounted socket
Connection
Switching contacts
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
2-/3-wire
4-/5-wire
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
8A
16 A
714 0 002
714 0 016
907 0 212
Flush mounting
Room thermostats
5–30 °C
–phasedown–
50
Function:
The room thermostats can be combined with the
intermediate frames (50 x 50 mm) of the switch
manufacturers of surface switches.
Alternatively the thermostats are offered as a complete
Theben frame set. The new room thermostats are perfect
for retrofitting and new buildings, because they can easily
be integrated and fit perfect in your facilities.
RAM 741 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
RAM 746 (without frame)
can be combined with the surface switches of the switch
manufacturers using the specific intermediate frame
(50 x 50 mm)
RAM 742 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
• Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K),
by external control (e.g. time switch SYN 161 h,
TR 610 top) possible.
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %, 50–60 Hz
NC contact: 10 (4) A, 250 V~
Changeover switch:
10 (4) A (heating), 5 (1) A (cooling), max. 10 THEBEN
actuators can be controlled (see page 76)
Temperature range: +5 °C...+30 °C
Switching differential: ca. 0.5 K, thermal feedback
Protection classe: II if mounted as directed
Degree of protection: IP 30
Housing colour: pure white (RAL 9010)
Approval symbol: V
Flush mounting digital time switch
see page 35.
Wiring diagram see page 74.
RAM 746 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
• Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K)
by external control (e.g. time switch) possible.
• Switch for heating ON/OFF + control lamp
RAM 748 RAMSES ®
• Changeover switch for heating and/or cooling
RAM 749 RAMSES ®
• NC contact
• 3 x selection switch for: easy operation, reduction,
external reduction (time-controlled with time switch)
• Control lamp
RAM 746 RA (with frame)
Type
Front
RAM 741
without frame
RAM 742
without frame
RAM 746
without frame
RAM 748
without frame
RAM 749
without frame
RAM 741 RA
with frame
RAM 742 RA
with frame
RAM 746 RA
with frame
RAM 748 RA
with frame
RAM 749 RA
with frame
Accessories: frame set Theben
Nominal voltage
Temperature range
adjustable r/m
Switching
Connection
differential approx.
Switching contacts
Rated current
at 230 V~
Order No.
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
230 V/50–60 Hz
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
+5 °C to +30 °C
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
0.5 K
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 changeover switch
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 NC contact
1 changeover switch
1 NC contact
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A/5 (1) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A
10 (4) A/5 (1) A
10 (4) A
741 0 030
742 0 030
746 0 030
748 0 030
749 0 030
741 0 031
742 0 031
746 0 031
748 0 031
749 0 031
907 0 322
2-/3-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
2-/3-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
3-/4-wire
4-/5-wire
85
Accessories
Actuator for individual room control
Individual room control
with individual night set-back
For new buildings and modernisations Theben offers the
elegant solution. The proven clock thermostats RAMSES,
combined with an electrothermal actuator make possible
the up-grading of existing systems to individual room
control. Ideal for the electrician, for intervention into the
heating pipes is not necessary. Electrothermal actuators
can be installed on almost any room radiator with a broad
range of adapter pieces. With any clock thermostat from
THEBEN, a room such as a living room, bed room, kitchen
or, of course, even an office can be controlled in
accordance with your personal requirements, with one or
more actuators. The automatic set-back of the room
temperature during absence or at night makes possible
the strived for energy saving of up to 20 %.
For driving the following actuator,
a Theben clock thermostat is required.
Actuator ALPHA 4
VA 78
Actuator ALPHA 4 230 V~
• Elegant actuator for radiators, heating circuit distributors or individual heating circuits
• “First open function” for simple mounting and heating
startup
• Plug-in mounting on valve adapter
• 100% protection against leaking valves
• Function and adaptation control
• Dismounting safety through removable SaveGuard
• Guaranteed overvoltage protection
Order No. 907 0 438
VA 80
Common technical data:
Operating voltage:
230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
24 V, 0–60 Hz
Functional principle:
Silently working expandable element
Valve currentless: closed
Switch-on current:
max. 300 mA for max. 200 ms
max. 250 mA for max. 2 min
Rated power: 1.8 W
Closing/opening times: approx. 2.5 min
Stroke: 4 mm
Spring force: 100 N, ± 5 %
Admissible ambient temperature: 0 °C… 60 °C
Storage temperature: –25 °C… 60 °C
Type of protection: IP 54 according to EN 60529
Protection class:
II according to EN 60 730-1
Length of the plug-in connecting cable: 1000 mm
Color of housing: white (RAL 9003)
Housing: 60 x 44 x 61 mm (H/W/L)
Screw on
actuator
Screw off e
lv
radiator va
Valve adapter
Actuator ALPHA 4 24 V
• Actuator as before, but for 24 V AC/DC
Order No. 907 0 439
Mounting without intervention into the heating pipes!
Valve adapter VA 78
• Valve adapter for Danfoss RA
Order No. 907 0 436
Valve adapter VA 80
• Valve adapter for Onda, Schlösser (from year of
construction 93), Oventrop (M 30 x 1,5), Heimeier,
Herb, Therm-Concept, Frank, Roth (distributor),
Dinotherm (distributor)
Order No. 907 0 437
Regulation of the radiator heating:
Regulation of the individual floor heating circuits:
Sittingroom
Kitchen
More valve adapters upon request:
VA 02
VA 16
VA 16 H
VA 26
VA 59
VA 81
M 30 x 1.5
M 28 x 1.5
M 28 x 1.5
Flansch
M 30 x 1.5
Velta
Herz
Poly Therm
Giacomini
Danfoss RAVL
Cosmotherm,
Cosmoline (GC distributor),
StrawaMore valve adapters
n using
w voltage whe
Safety extra lo ing transformer
an isolat
Bathroom
Office
L
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+
L1
N
_
0 • • 3 • • 6 • • 9 • • 12 • • 15 • • 18 • • 21 • •
230 V~
24 V~
Connection
example to
RAMSES-Thermostat
86
Accessories
Actuator for individual room control
Individual room control with actuators
on all radiators
➊ Clock thermostat with mains supply in each room or
office.
➋ The Theben actuators on the radiators are controlled
by the clock thermostats. The Theben actuators are
suitable for most of the heating valves.
➋
➊
➋
➋
➊
Room 1
Room 2
➋
➊
Room 3
➋
➋
➊
Room 4
Wall mounting
5–30 °C
Humidistat, 74 x 74 mm
SOTHIS 715
SOTHIS 715
• SOTHIS 715 humidistat in an attractively
shaped housing suitable for mounting
• Setting range 35...100 % rF
• Switching capacity:
humidification 2 A/250 V~
dehumidification 5 A/250 V~
• Suitable for controlling air humidification or ventilation
and dehumidification systems
• Humidity of the air is measured by molecular chain
changes in a synthetic polymer fiber
• Use a low protective voltage if there is a risk of water
drops falling or condensation forming in the housing
• White housing, 74 x 74 mm
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V, ±10 %, 50–60 Hz
Switching capacity:
humidification 2A/250 V~
dehumidification 5 A/250 V~
Protection class: II if installed as directed
Degree of protection: IP 30
Colour of housing: pure white (RAL 9010)
Wiring diagram see page 91.
Dimension drawing see page 83.
Type
Description
SOTHIS 715
Humidistat
Adapter plate for flush-mounted socket 79 x 79 mm
Adjustment range
35…100 % rF
Contact
2/5 A, 250 V~
Order No.
715 0 002
907 0 212
87
Wall mounting
CO2 24 h
CO2 sensor for monitoring the room air quality
New
AMUN 716 USB
200 000
Lethal to human beings
100 000
A candle going out
40 000…50 000
Concentration of
exhaled air
5000
Maximum allowable workplace
concentration (MAC value)
4000
Poorly ventilated room
1000
Sensation of stale air
330…350
Outdoor air
AMUN 716 USB AMUN, USB interface
When you inhale, you take up oxygen from the air and
when you exhale, you give off carbon dioxide to the air.
The inhaled air contains 21% of oxygen and 0.035% of
carbon dioxide. The exhaled air contains 16 % of oxygen
and 4 % of carbon dioxide. Carbon dioxide is not lifethreatening until it reaches a concentration of 20%,
but a person’s well-being, capacity of concentration and
performance are already impaired, initially without being
aware of it, starting from 0,08%. DIN 1946 recommends
a maximum value of 0.1%. Given today’s construction
stage and the high density of the building exterior, this
value is often exceeded. This makes a person and lose
concentration.
The CO2 sensor for monitoring indoor air quality will
display the indoor CO2 concentration via its 5 LEDs.
The measured values can be transmitted by USB interface
and displayed graphically by the corresponding PC
software.
Suitable for meeting or conference rooms, offices,
schools/kindergartens, passive and low-energy houses and
living rooms without controlled ventilation.
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 5 V DC via USB bus voltage
Measuring range: 0–2000 ppm of CO2
Protection class: III
Schutzart: IP 20
• Simple installation and startup at the PC via USB
interface
• Software for Windows 98 SE/ME/2000/XP
• Graphic display of the CO2 concentration at the PC
• Graph showing the change in concentration with time
for the last 80 min
• Additional display of the current CO2 concentration
directly on the sensor via 5 LEDs
• Acoustic and visual warning signal upon reaching the
limit value
• Adjustable acoustic alarm threshold
• Logfile on the CO2 concentration can be saved
• Automatic saving when recording for a prolonged
period
• Maintenance-free sensor by virtue of a closed
measuring cell
CO2 concentrations
Dimension drawings
Type
Description
Measuring range
Display
Data interface
Order No.
AMUN 716 USB
CO2 sensor including software
0–2000 ppm
5 LEDs
USB
716 9 101
88
Wall mounting
f
Short-time and defrost time switches
FRI 77 FRIGGA without power reserve
• Synchronous time switches without power reserve for
surface-mounted installation
• Short-time switches to control for example defrosting
operations in refrigerating and ventilating systems
• Sturdy clock mechanism with two separate
program dials
• 24 hour program dial for preselection of the hour at
which brief switching should occur.
• 60 minute program dial for adjustment of brief
contacting duration.
• Type "g" allows delayed switching of the ventilator
FRIGGA 77
24 h 60 min
Common technical data:
Nominal voltage: 230 V~, ± 10 %
Frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 2.5 VA
Contact: floating gap less than 3 mm (µ)
Contact material: AgCdO
Switching capacity:
16 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
2.5 A, 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Switching accuracy: depending on the net frequency
Permissible ambient temperature: –10 °C...+50 °C
Housing and insulating material:
high temperature resistant,
selfextinguishing thermoplastics
Protection class:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60 529
Special version without housing IP 00
Degree of protection:
II in accordance with EN 60 730-1
Test approvals: national and international
depending on device type V W
Weight: 265 g (with housing)
Segments for FRI 77
red
Order No.
934 3 246
Wiring diagrams see page 91.
green
Order No.
934 3 261
FRIGGA 77-2
Dimension drawings
Design:
• FRI 77: Housing for wall mounting,
with transparent cover.
• FRI 77-2: Mechanism without housing with snap-on
fixing for top-hat rails (35 mm, DIN EN 50022),
can be attached horizontally or vertically
Type
Program
dial
Design
in mm
Programmable
every ...
Minimum
Tappet
switching interval complement
Switching contacts
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
FRI 77 h
60 min
24 h
wall mounting
105 x 105 x 61
1 minute/
1 hour
2 minutes/
1 hour
2 x green
4 x red
1 changeover switch
16 (2.5) A
077 0 008
FRI 77 g
60 min
24 h
wall mounting
105 x 105 x 61
1 minute/
1 hour
2 minutes/
1 hour
4 x green
4 x red
2 changeover switches 16 (2.5) A
077 0 033
FRI 77 h-2
60 min
24 h
drive with rapid mounting
55 x 82 x 48
1 minute/
1 hour
2 minutes/
1 hour
2 x green
4 x red
1 changeover switch
16 (2.5) A
077 0 802
FRI 77 g-2
60 min
24 h
drive with rapid mounting
55 x 82 x 48
1 minute/
1 hour
2 minutes/
1 hour
4 x green
4 x red
2 changeover switches 16 (2..5) A
077 0 832
89
Wall mounting
Wiring diagrams
OT-BUS: 2-wire BUS between control device and switching unit.
The BUS wire carries protective low voltage. Maximum BUS wire length 100 m.
FRIGGA-switching examples with diagram:
K1
M
OTBUS
6
2 3 4
OT-Box
RAM 816 top
1 2 3
7
7 8
M
–
M
cooling
+
ϑ
13
15 16 17 18 19
closed
Refrigeration/defrosting with FRI 77 h
open
0
M
Forward flow temperature sensor
defrosting
L
N
2–56 min
defrosting
cooling
K1
L
N
RAM 816 top controls mechanical mixing valve
K1
K2
1 2 3
4 5 6
M
OTBUS
6
2 3 4
OT-Box
RAM 816 top
7
7 8
M
II
cooling
I
ϑ
13
15 16 17 18 19
L
N
Refrigeration/defrosting/fan delay with FRI 77 g
0
Level I
Level II
defrosting ventilator
2–54 min
K1
L
N
K2
≥2 min
defrosting
cooling
ventilator OFF
ventilator ON
RAM 816 top controls 2 heating stages
(2-stage blower, under-floor heating, radiators etc.)
cooling
OTBUS
6
heating
7
M
–
12 13
Remote temperature sensor
R
red.
M
+
ϑ
15 16 17 18 19
closed
Forward flow temperature sensor
L
N
RAM 817 top controls mechanical mixing valve
90
K2
1 2 3
4 5 6
M
temp.
2 3 4
OT-Box
RAM 817 top
ϑ
K1
defrost
limitat
L
N
Refrigeration/defrosting with pressostat and thermostat switching with FRI 77 g
open
M
7 8
≥2 min
K1
impulse, relais OIN
K2
4–45 min
safety time
Wall mounting
Wiring diagrams
2
1
N
N
L
5
2
1
N
N
RF
>
N
L
RAM 701
TA
>
RF
L
N
RAM 702/703
TA
6
5
2
N
N
6
5
2
N
N
ϑ>
N
6
5
2
N
N
ϑ>
RF
L
RAM 706
N
5
3
2
1
N
N
<
RF
N
L
L
RAM 708
RAM 709
L N
L N
RF
ϑ>
N
RAM 707
L N
L
TA
>
3
2
1
N
N
ϑ>
N
TA
L N
RAM 705
RF
RAM 704
RF
L
6
5
2
N
N
ϑ
<ϑ
RF
RF
N
RAM 741
L N
L
TA
TA
TA
L
L
<ϑ
<ϑ
RF
RF
<ϑ
RF
N
N
N
RAM 742
RAM 746
RAM 748
L N
L
N
L
N
TA
2
L
1 2 3
<ϑ
RF
N
RAM 749
ϑ
L
N
N
N
4
2
1
4
1 = Electrical auxiliary heating
2 = Ventilator/Air conditioner
RAM 714/714 A
Time switch/Switch for lowering temperature
Air conditioning/Fan
L
M
16 A
SOTHIS 715
Heating/Actuator/Solenoid valve/Burner/Circulating pump/Blower of night storage heating systems
Electric additional heating
91
Din rail program
Living comfort controller
S
Luxury installation, simple and favorably priced!
For the first time, it is possible to realize a luxury installation in every housing facility. With LUXOR, we offer you
the opportunity to satisfy the needs such as safety,
comfort and energy savings of every home owner.
Up till now, this has only been possible at the expense of
very high costs of implementation. LUXOR offers you all of
this at an unbelievably low price.
Function:
Modularly extendable system for standard living comfort
installation. REG modules connected by means of a 2-wire
COM interface. Expandable with up to 16 modules. Absolute
functional safety by means of the “standalone” function of
each module. The U and I 4 inputs are potential-free. Settings
are very easy to make directly on the module.
LUXOR 400 (Basic module)
LUXOR 400 (base module)
• Base module, expandable with up to 16 modules.
• 4 x 16 A switching outputs
• Manual switching
• LEDs for displaying input/output signals
• Potentiometers for adjusting the time functions
• U1: Universal voltage input 8-48 V AC/DC
• I 4 (L) and I 4 (N) for connecting FI (RCD) for wet rooms
• 2-wire COM interface for communication with other
modules
• Adjustment possible for central ON/OFF, panic, and
presence simulation
• From generation*** capable of communication with
LUXOR 411/412 and 414
Operator interface:
P
P
1–20 min
!
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: approx. 4 VA
Switching outputs: 16 (6) A/250 V~
Connecting cable button/switch:
230 V phase-independent supply cable
Cable length up to 100 m
2-wire connection for COM:
Cross-section as desired/length up to 100 m
Admissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C … +50 °C
Protection class:
Control unit: II according to EN 60730-1
when mounted in accordance with its designated use
Protection type:
Control units: IP 20 according to EN 60529
Channels:
C1: Current pulse or time function
1…15 min with switch-off pre-warning
(deselectable)/resettable and continuous function
C2: Current pulse or time function
1…20 min with switch-off pre-warning
(deselectable)/deactivatable and continuous function
C3: Current pulse function
C4: Current pulse function suitable for FI (RCD) in
wet rooms
Input cable length:
up to 100 m, 230 V cables single- and
multi-pole (NYM cable, NYIF riser,
H05/H07 PVC wires)
Panic function
Central OFF
S
Presence simulation
Central ON/Scene
LED lights up when a signal is active.
Selector switch input button/switch
LED lights up when the relay is switched on.
Channel button for ON/OFF manual switching, and
programming of the central functions
Use a screwdriver for programming
• U and I 4 inputs are potential-free
• I 4 (L) I 4 (N) special connections for FI (RCD) in wet
rooms
• U1 is a universal voltage input for the activation via
intercoms (8-48 V AC/DC)
• Manual operation on the device for the installation test
• Time range settings very easy to make
directly on the device
• Each module operates fully independently of the others
(standalone function)
Setting the resettable time function from 1 to 20 min with
switch-off pre-warning (deselectable) and continuous light
Setting the resettable time function from 1 to 15 min with
switch-off pre-warning (deselectable) and continuous light
For the online configurator, go to
www.luxor400.com
Order No.
Dimension drawings
65,11
71,85
59,61
LUXOR 400 (Basic module)
LUXOR 400 generation 3***
equipped with the additional function Central ON.
P
45,1
90
LUXOR 400
92
400 0 000
Din rail program
Living comfort controller
S
Function:
Modular upgradeable LUXOR system for the standard
living comfort installation. REG modules connected via a
2-wire COM interface. Upgradeable to max. 16 modules.
Wholly reliable functionality thanks to the “stand-alone”
function of each module. Completely floating and phaseindependent inputs/outputs. Simplest settings on the
module itself.
LUXOR 404
• 4 channel upgrade module
• 4 x 16 A switching outputs
• Manual controls
• Display LED's
• Potentiometers for setting the time function
• I 4 (N) and I 4 (L) for connecting
FI (RCD) for wet rooms
• U and I 4 inputs are potential-free
• Switch-off pre-warning deselectable
LUXOR 404 (4-channel extension)
LUXOR 402
• 2 channel upgrade module
• 2 x 16 A switching outputs with deactivatable time
function
• Manual controsl
• Display LED's
• Key/switch selection option
• U and I 4 inputs are potential-free
• Switch-off pre-warning deselectable
LUXOR 402 (2-channel extension)
P
1–20 min
!
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V, +10 %/–15 %
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 4 VA
Switch outputs: 16 (6) A/250 V~
Contacts: floating working contact
Key/switch connection:
230 V phase-independent supply cable
cable length max. 100 m
2-wire connection for COM:
Any cross-section max. length 100 m
Permissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C ... +50 °C
Protection class: Control unit: II to EN 60730-1
for mounting with terminal box cover plate
Protection rating: Control unit: IP 20 to EN 60529
Channels:
C1: Current surge or time function
1…15 min with switch-off pre-warning (deselectable)/
resettable and continuous function (immediately
resettable)
C2: Current surge or time function
1…15 min with switch-off pre-warning (deselectable)/
resettable and continuous function (immediately
resettable)
C3: Current surge function (LUXOR 404 only)
C4: Current surge function suitable for FI (RCD) for
wet rooms (LUXOR 404 only)
Terminals for FI circuit breaker (RCD)
Application:
For wet rooms such as.: Bathroom
FI (RCD)
Caution!
Connect the FI circuit breaker (RCD) on the I 4 (L)
and I 4 (N) terminals only (see figure).
The I 4 (N) terminal must be connected with or without FI
(RCD) in every type of application!
P
P
S
S
LUXOR 400
Leo Luxor
www.luxor400.com
Dimension drawings
Order No.
65,11
65,11
71,85
44,85
59,61
59,61
LUXOR 404 (4-channel extension)
LUXOR 402 (2-channel extension)
LUXOR 404 and LUXOR 402 generation 3***
equipped with the additional function Central ON.
45,1
45,1
90
90
LUXOR 402
LUXOR 404
404 0 000
402 0 000
93
Din rail program
Living comfort controller
S
LUXOR 405 2-channel dimming module
The LUXOR 405 upgrade module is a universal dimmer for
various lamp loads. It is suitable for both conventional
and electronic transformers. The device is also usable
without basic module.
• 2-channel universal dimmer, each with 300 VA or
1-channel universal dimmer, with 500 VA
• Any number of keys can be connected to the inputs
provided
• Selection programs P1 to P4 as setting option for the
dimming response
• Manual controls and display LED's
• One additional input per channel for movement
indicator
• Stand-alone function
• Overcurrent display
• CLEAR key for resetting in the event of malfunction
• Setting input for 3 light settings
LUXOR 405 (Dimming module)
Technical data for LUXOR 405:
Operating voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 3 VA
Dimmer outputs: 2 x 300 VA or 1 x 500 VA
Suitable for filament bulbs, LV and HV halogen lamps
Connecting cable key: 230 V phase-independent
supply cable, cable length max. 100 m
2-wire connection for COM:
Any cross-section/max. length 100 m
Channels:
C1: Universal dimmer with 300 VA
C2: Universal dimmer with 300 VA
C1+ C2: Universal dimmer with 500 VA
LUXOR 408 Shutter basic module
Basic shutter module for controlling a maximum of four
shutters, blinds or awnings. The module can be controlled
by all familiar standard shutter keys. There are three
groups for individual channel programming and also the
central UP/DOWN function. The module can be expanded
with channel upgrades and also with a time and sensor
module with connectable weather station.
• Selector switch for shutters, awnings and Venetian blinds
for each channel
• Separate control of 4 shutters with UP/DOWN/STOP
• Central UP/DOWN of all shutters
• Group function for one shutter group
• Storable intermediate position for shading
and ventilation
• UP/DOWN panic function controllable via LUXOR 400
• Manual controls and display LED's
• 6 A switching capacity per channel
• Expandable by channel upgrade modules, time and
sensor module with optional connecting weather
station
LUXOR 408 (Shutter basic module)
M
R, L, C
Permitted ambient temperature: –10 °C ... +50 °C
Protection class to EN 60730-1: Control units: II for
mounting with terminal box cover plate
Protection rating to EN 60 529: Control units: IP 20
DMB 2 Power extension
• Power extension (for LUXOR 405) of the 2 dimming
channels from 2 x 600 VA/1 x 1000 VA
DMB 2 (Power extension)
P
Technical data for LUXOR 408/LUXOR 409:
Operating voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 4 VA
Switch outputs: 6 VA/250 V~
Connecting cable key: 230 V phase-independent
supply cable, cable length max. 100 m
2-wire connection for COM:
Any cross-section/max. length 100 m
Permitted ambient temperature: –10 °C ... +50 °C
Protection class to EN 60730-1: Control units: II for
mounting with terminal box cover plate
Protection rating to EN 60 529: Control units: IP 20
Channels:
C1 to C4: for shutter, blind and awning control
LUXOR 409 Shutter upgrade module
• Separate control of 4 shutters with UP/DOWN/STOP
• Central UP/DOWN of all shutters via LUXOR 408
• Group functions for two shutter groups
• Storable intermediate position for shading
and ventilation
• UP/DOWN panic function controllable via LUXOR 400
• Manual controls and display LEDs
• 6 A switching capacity per channel
LUXOR 409 (Shutter upgrade module)
Dimension drawings
65,11
71,85
71,85
LUXOR 405
59,61
LUXOR 405 (Dimming module)
LUXOR 408 (Shutter basic module)
LUXOR 409 (Shutter upgrade module)
DMB 2 (Power extension)
45,1
90
45,1
LUXOR 408
90
94
Order No.
65,11
59,61
405 0 000
408 0 000
409 0 000
491 0 222
Din rail program/wall mounting
1–100,000 Lux m/s
Living comfort controller
LUXOR 411 (sensor module)
+ max. 3 light sensors + wind sensor
Automatic control of shutters, Venetian blinds and awnings
as a function of brightness, and automatic control of the
generation 3 exterior lighting.
If required, up to 3 light sensors with wall support can be
connected to the control device.
• Three groups of blinds, e.g. on 3 different façades, can be
controlled separately and moved automatically to predefined positions (0–100 %). This requires one light
sensor for each façade.
• The automatic lighting control in the LUXOR system is
effected by the dimming switch channel with a setting
range of 1–100 lux. This allows, for example, entrance
and house number lighting to be switched automatically
(from generation 3***).
• The monitoring of the wind speed by means of the
additional wind sensor LUXOR 413 allows the sun
protection to drive automatically to a safe position, before
damage can occur.
• The wind sensor (LUXOR 413) or the weather sensors can
also be retrofitted later on to the sensor module LUXOR
411 (see page 102)
• For the wind sensor LUXOR 413, an additional power
supply unit is required
• Cable length of the sensor lines up to 100 m
LUXOR 411 (sensor module)
Surface-mounted light sensor
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: 5.5 VA
Inputs:
3 light sensors
1 wind sensor (LUXOR 413) or:
connection for weather sensors (LUXOR 412) and
2 light sensors
Wind speed: 2–20 m/s
Brightness range:
3 channels x 1000–100,000 lx (sun protection)
1 channel x 1–100 lx (twilight value)
2-wire connection for COM:
Cross-section as desired/length up to 100 m
Admissible ambient temperature:
–10 °C … +50 °C
Protection class according to EN 60 730-1 when
mounted in accordance with its designated use:
Control unit: II
Sensors: III
Protection type according to EN 60 529:
Control units: IP 20
Sensors: LUXOR 413 IP 43
Mounted light sensor IP 54
LUXOR 413 (wind sensor optional)
Connection diagram
L
N
2
2
Accessories:
2
Power supply unit 24 V DC
(LUXOR 413)
65,11
Order numbers
59,61
28 mm
85 mm
60 mm
45,1
90
71,85
115 mm
Dimension drawings
LUXOR 411 (sensor module)
Surface-mounted light sensor (max. 3)
LUXOR 413 (sensor module)
Power supply unit
required for LUXOR 413 (4 TE)
411 0 000
907 0 008
413 0 000
907 9 330
95
Din rail program/wall mounting
1–100,000 Lux m/s
Living comfort controller
LUXOR 411 + LUXOR 412 weather sensors
The complete system for the reliable control of awnings,
shutters and Venetian blinds - regardless of stormy, rainy
or snowy weather. The weather sensory system provide
reliable protection, have everything under control and tell
the individual channels of the shutter modules in the
LUXOR system what they have to do. For example, which
slat position the blinds are to move to, depending on the
sun’s position.
Starting from a set lux value, the pre-selected
blinds/awnings will move automatically to the pre-defined
position (0-100%). Optionally, 2 additional light sensors
can be used to control a total of 3 groups of blinds
differently, e. g. for 3 façades.
• The monitoring of the wind speed allows the sun
protection to drive automatically to a safe position,
before damage can occur.
• Shutters, exterior, entrance and house number lighting
can be controlled automatically by the LUXOR system by
means of the twilight value setting. (from generation
3***)
• Simple wall mounting by sensor arm that can be tilted
upward
• Optional mounting to pole up to Ø 60 mm
• Cable length of the sensor lines up to 100 m
• Frost is fixed to +3 °C, for awnings only
LUXOR 411 (sensor module)
LUXOR 412 (weather sensory system)
Connection diagram
EAST
WEST
2
2
ϑ
Technical data:
Operating voltage:
LUXOR 411: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
LUXOR 412 is supplied by LUXOR 411
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: 5.5 VA
Inputs:
Connection for weather sensors including wind, rain,
temperature and integrated light sensors (LUXOR 412)
optional: 2 additional light sensors, 1 wind sensor
(LUXOR 413)
Brightness range:
max. 3 channels: 1000–100,000 lx (sun protection)
1 channel: 1–100 lx (twilight value)
Wind speed: 2–20 m/s
Temperature range: 0 °C … +60 °C
2-wire connection for COM:
Cross-section as desired/length up to 100 m
Admissible ambient temperature:
Control unit: –10 °C … +50 °C
Weather sensors: –20 °C … +55 °C
Protection class according to EN 60 730-1 when
mounted in accordance with its designated use:
Control unit: II
Sensors: II
Protection type according to EN 60 529:
Control units: IP 20
Sensors: IP 44
L
N
SOUTH
4
Dimension drawings
Order numbers
65,11
71,85
280
59,61
45,1
90
66
135
160
96
LUXOR 411 (sensor module)
LUXOR 412 (weather sensory system)
Surface-mounted light sensor
Mast mounting (for LUXOR 412)
411 0 000
412 0 000
907 0 008
907 0 380
Din rail program
Astro 7 d 24 h ±1h
Living comfort controller
auto
LUXOR 414 (clock module)
8-channel system clock for controlling any outputs of the
LUXOR system. The time switch provides daily and weekly
programs and also includes the option of astronomical
programs for switching in accordance with sunrise and
sunset. These features allow blinds and shutters to be
controlled and positioned comfortably and fully automatically in the range from 0 to 100 %.
Automatic lighting control at the entrance area or all
around the house provides increased safety at nightfall.
The automatic nighttime switch-off provides saving of
energy.
• 8 channels optionally with daily, weekly or astronomic
program
• 128 freely programmable switching times and 732
preprogrammed astronomic switching times
• Local database for simple entering of the location
• Individual linking of the time switch channels to the
outputs by means of a selector switch
• Positioning of drives (LUXOR 408/LUXOR 409) and
transmission of the dimming values (LUXOR 405) in
percent values 0–100%
• Option to set manual or automatic mode
• Off periods to suppress brightness or twilight signals
from the sensor module LUXOR 411 e. g. to suppress
lighting in the early morning in summer
• Astronomic off periods to change the times of the up
and down movements of shutters/awnings
• Offset ±120 min
• Automatic summertime/wintertime change
• User guidance by means of text line in the display
LUXOR 414 (clock modul)
% ±120 min
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V~, +10 %/–15 %
Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Device consumption: approx. 4 VA
2-wire connection for COM:
Cross-section as desired/length up to 100 m
Memory locations: 128
Power reserve: 5 h
Admissible ambient temperature: –10 °C … +50 °C
Protection class according to EN 60 730: II when
mounted in accordance with its designated use
Protection type according to EN 60 529: IP 20
Connection diagram
L
N
Dimension drawings
Order No.
65,11
LUXOR 414 (clock modul)
414 0 000
45,1
59,61
90
44,85
97
Startersets
Living comfort controller
Set 1:
The ideal set for a 2- or 3-room apartment.
It combines convenient light controls for 6 separate
lighting points with central security functions (panic
function and presence simulation) as well as energy
conservation features (central OFF).
Starter set 1:
Suitable for 6 separate lighting units,
2 x time/switch and 4 x switch
• Box
• 1 LUXOR 400
• 1 LUXOR 402
Set 2:
Convenience set for a single-family house.
8 separate lighting points with 3 central functions and 4
time functions (for hallway, basement, outside lighting
etc.).
Starter set 2:
Suitable for 8 separate lighting units,
4 x time/switch and 4 x switch
• Box
• 1 LUXOR 400
• 1 LUXOR 404
Set 3:
The ideal set for a large single-family house with
10 separate lighting points and 4 time functions. Extra
dimming channels for living rooms, bedrooms etc. This set
also provides the advantages offered
by the central functions.
Starter set 3:
Suitable for 10 separate lighting units,
4 x time/switch and 4 x switch, 2 x dimming
• Box
• 1 LUXOR 400
• 1 LUXOR 404
• 1 LUXOR 405
Set 4:
The perfect set for controlling roller shutters and Venetian
blinds. 8 drives can be controlled individually or in groups,
as well as manually or automatically, based on a schedule
or sunrise/sunset program. Blocked times allow you to
prevent roller shutters and sun blinds from going up and
down in early morning hours. Also with convenient central
functions.
Starter set 4:
Suitable for 8 drives for roller shutters and Venetian
blinds, 8 drives and 8 time channels with week program
and astronomical clock
• Box
• 1 LUXOR 408
• 1 LUXOR 409
• 1 LUXOR 414
Starter set 1
Starter set 2
Starter set 3
All 4 sets can be expanded as needed.
Order No.
Starter set 4
98
Starter set 1
Starter set 2
Starter set 3
Starter set 4
499 0 001
499 0 002
499 0 003
499 0 004
Installation
Living comfort controller
Connection of inputs/outputs and comfort functions (example)
16 A
N
L
EAST WEST
T1 T2 T3 T4 T
T T
LS
S
D1 D2 BW1
BW2
*
=
*G1
I4 (N) I4 (L)
I1
I2
I3
t
t
I2
I1
I3
t
I4
SOUTH
Lighting
Dimming
Roller shutter with
Time control
Sun protection
Venetian and sun blinds
Type
Channels
Function
Central functions in conjunction
with basic modules
Outputs
floating
Nominal current
at 250 V~
Order No.
LUXOR 400
Basic module
4
Switch
Time
Presence simulation,
Central OFF, Panic function
4 NO contact
16 A
400 0 000
LUXOR 402
Upgrade module
2
Switch
Time
Presence simulation,
Central OFF, Panic function
2 NO contact
16 A
402 0 000
LUXOR 404
Upgrade module
4
Switch
Time
Presence simulation,
Central OFF, Panic function
4 NO contact
16 A
404 0 000
LUXOR 405
Dimming module
2
Dimming, Lightsetting,
Nightlight
Presence simulation,
Central OFF, Panic function
2 Triacs
2 x 300 W/VA
(1 x 500 W/VA)
405 0 000
DMB 2
Upgrade device
2
Dimming booster
–
2 Triacs
2 x 600 W/VA
(1 x 1000 W/VA)
491 0 222
LUXOR 408
Roller shutter basic module
4
Motor control
Central UP/DOWN, Panic
1 group
8 NO contact
6A
408 0 000
LUXOR 409
4
Roller shutter upgrade module
Motor control
Central UP/DOWN, Panic
2 groups
8 NO contact
6A
409 0 000
–
–
–
411 0 000
–
–
–
412 0 000
Wind sensor
–
–
–
413 0 000
Daily, weekly and
astronomical program
–
–
–
414 0 000
Diode module for special functions (group function/central function) necessary * VPE 2 devices
LUXOR 411
Sensor module
–
Threshold value brightness, wind,
twilight and temperature
Switch
907 0 367
Surface-mounted light sensor for LUXOR 411
LUXOR 412
Weather sensor
–
Sensor for brightness, twilight,
temperature, wind, rain
907 0 008
Mast installation for LUXOR 412/LUXOR 413, up to Ø 60 mm
LUXOR 413
Wind sensor
–
907 0 380
Power pack needed for LUXOR 413
LUXOR 414
Time module
8
907 9 330
99
Din rail program
Year 7 d 24 h ±1 h I
Programmable logic controller
PHARAO 6
PHARAO 10
auto
Common functions:
• Programmable logic controller for domestic commercial
and industrial use
• Compact series installation enclosure
• 22 preprogrammed function blocks that are usable up
to 64 times each
• Function blocks with special control functions
(gain, backlash etc.)
• Real-time clock and direct programming of even
complex Boolean functions
• Programming, editing and amending on the unit itself
via 8 keys without an interface cable
• Graphic LCD display with operator guidance in plain text
• Switching status display of inputs and outputs.
• Indication of process variables (MMI function)
on the display
• Assignment of the programmed functions to the control
panel keys
• Internal EEPROM memory for a max. of 64 function
blocks (1500 bytes)
• Optional plug-in EEPROM for program transfer or dual
programming of an internal or plug-in EEPROM
• Password protection
• Real-time one year clock
• Graphic programming software for Windows
95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP with detailed on-line help
documentation
• Programming of the function blocks by means of “drag
and drop”.
• On-line, off-line program simulation on screen
• Remote control/remote monitoring possible via modem
pulse
Common technical data:
LCD display: 4 lines of 10 characters each, run mode,
Password protection, INPUT/output status, time, date,
process variables, function block overview during
programming
Power loss:
PHARAO 6: ≤ 3 VA, PHARAO 10: ≤ 4 VA,
PHARAO 11: ≤ 3 W, PHARAO 12: ≤ 2 W
PHARAO 6/10/11
Switching power:
8 A/250 V AC, cos ϕ=1;
10 A/110 V AC, cos ϕ =1
PHARAO 12
Switching power: 1 A/8–24 V DC; 0.1 A/5–8 V DC
Accuracy of the real-time clock:
± 5 s/day
Power reserve of real-time clock and operands:
20 days at 25 °C (Goldcap)
Permissible ambient temperature:
0 °C... +55 °C
Permissible storage temperature:
–30 °C... +70 °C
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60529
Class of protection: II after correct installation
Weight: 200 g
Test approvals: V
PHARAO 6
• Rated voltage 100–240 V~
• 4 inputs, digital, e.g. for sensors, switches, brightness
and temperature switches
• 2 relay outputs 8 A/250 V~
PHARAO 11
PHARAO 10
• Rated voltage 100–240 V~
• 6 inputs, digital, e.g. for sensors, switches, brightness
and temperature switches
• 4 relay outputs 8 A/250 V~
PHARAO 11
• Rated voltage 24 V DC
• 6 inputs selectable analog/digital
(by means of A/D converter)
• 4 outputs 8 A/250 V~
PHARAO 12
• Rated voltage 24 V DC
• 6 inputs selectable analog/digital
(by means of A/D converter)
• 4 transistor outputs 1 A/24 V DC
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
100
Front panel installation kit
PC
Design:
• Standard enclosure for series installation
45 x 71.2 x 57 mm 4 modules
• Enclosure dimensions: 90 x 71.2 x 57 mm
• Quick fastening facility for 35 mm sectional rail
(EN 50022)
• Contact protection in accordance with the accident
protection regulation BGV A3
Din rail program
Year 7 d 24 h ±1 h I
Programmable logic controller
auto
Common functions:
• Compact programmable controller for industrial and
commercial use
• Compact integrated standard housing
• 22 pre-programmed function blocks which can be used
max. 64 times each
• Function blocks with special control functions
(gain, hysteresis etc.)
• Real-time clock and direct programming also of complex
boolean functions
• Programming, editing and altering directly at the device
via 8 buttons without interface cable
• Graphic LCD display with operator prompting in plain
text
• Switch status indication of inputs and outputs
• Display of process variables (MMI function)
• Allocation of the programmed functions to the front
keys
• Internal EEPROM memory for max. 64 function blocks
(1500 bytes)
• Optional plug-in EEPROM for program transfer or dual
programming from internal or plug-in EEPROM
• Password protection
• Real-time yearly time switch
• Graphic programming software for Windows
95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP with detailed online-help
documentation
• Programming of function blocks per “drag and drop”
• Online, offline program simulation on screen
• Data export for programs which support the Windows
OLE function
• Low cost building remote monitoring possible with
additional modem
PHARAO 20
PHARAO 21
pulse
PC
Common technical data::
LCD display: 4 lines with 10 characters each, run mode,
password protection, Input/output status, time, date,
process variables, function block overview during
programming
Power loss:
PHARAO 20: ≤ 7 VA
PHARAO 21: ≤ 7 W
PHARAO 22: ≤ 5 W
PHARAO 20/21
Switching capacity:
8 A/250 V AC, cos ϕ=1;
10 A/110 V AC, cos ϕ=1
PHARAO 22
Switching capacity: 1 A/8–24 V DC; 0,1 A/5–8 V DC
Accuracy of real-time clock:
≤ ± 5 s/day
Power reserve real-time clock and operands:
20 days at 25 °C (Goldcap)
Permissible ambient temperature:
0 °C...+55 °C, lower temperatures possible under certain
circumstances (request)
Permissible storage temperature: –30 °C...+70 °C
Degree of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60529
Class of protection: II if installed as directed
Weight: 200 g
Test approvals: V
Programming see page 103.
Order No. see page 105.
PHARAO 20
• Nominal voltage 100–240 V~
• 12 inputs, digital e.g. for buttons, switches, brightness
and temperature switches
• 8 relay outputs 8 A/250 V~
PHARAO 22
PHARAO 21
• Nominal voltage 24 V DC
• 12 inputs analog/digital selectable
(with AD transformer)
• 8 transistor outputs 8 A/250 V~
PHARAO 22
• Nominal voltage 24 V DC
• 12 inputs analog/digital - selectable
(with AD transformer)
• 8 transistor outputs 1 A/24 V DC
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
Design:
• Standard housing for integrated series
45 x 125 x 57 mm
• Housing dimensions: 90 x 125 x 57 mm
• Snap-on fixing for 35 mm profile rail
(EN 50022)
• Contact protection in accordance with the accident
protection regulation BGV A3
4
90
4
6
6
124.6
101
Din rail program
Year 7 d 24 h ±1 h I
Programmable logic controller
New
PHARAO-II 10 (AC)
PHARAO-II 11 (DC)
PHARAO-II 14 (AC)
auto
Common functions
• Programmable controller for commercial and industrial use
• 34 pre-programmed function blocks with special control
functions that can be used up to 200 times
• Direct programming of even complex Boolean functions
in one function module
• Programming, editing and modifying on the unit itself via
8 keys without interface cable
• Backlit LCD with operator guidance in 4 x 12 character text
• Input and output switching status display
• Process variable display (MMI function)
• Assignment of programmed functions on front keys
• Internal EEPROM memory for max. 200 function blocks
(5000 bytes)
• Optional plug-in EEPROM for program transfer or dual
programming of internal/plugged-in EEPROM
• 3-level password protection
• Realtime year clock with 1,000 switching times
• Graphical programming software for Windows 95/98/NT/
2000/ME/XP with detailed online Help documentation
• Programming of the function blocks via “drag and drop”
• Online/offline program simulation on screen
• Remote control/remote monitoring possible via modem or
GSM modem
• Transmission of SMS, email or fax
PHARAO-II 10 (AC)
• Rated voltage 100–240 V~
• 6 digital inputs e.g. for buttons, brightness and
temperature switches
• 4 Relay outputs 8 A/250 V~
PHARAO-II 11 (DC) as before, but
• Rated voltage 24 V DC
• 6 inputs digital/analog selectable
PHARAO-II 24 (AC)
PHARAO-II 14 (AC)
• Nominal voltage 100–240 V~
• 8 digital inputs e.g. for keys, brightness and temperature
switches
• 6 relay outputs 8 A/250 V~
pulse
PC
Common technical data
LCD display:
4 x 12 character lines, run mode, password protection,
input/output status, time, date, process variables,
function block overview during programming
Capacity loss:
PHARAO-II 14: ≤ 5.5 W, PHARAO-II 15: ≤ 7.5 W
PHARAO-II 24: ≤ 7 W, PHARAO-II 25: ≤ 9 W
PHARAO-II 10/11/14/15 switching power:
8 A/250 V AC, cos ϕ = 1, inductive load max. 373 VA
(service life of the relay contacts 100,000 switching cycles
at rated current)
PHARAO-II 24/25 switching power:
4 x 8 A/250 V AC, cos ϕ = 1, inductive load max. 373 VA
5 A/250 V AC, cos ϕ = 1, inductive load max. 373 VA
(service life of the relay contacts 100,000 switching cycles
at rated current)
Time accuracy of realtime clock: ±5 s/day
Power reserve of realtime clock and operands:
20 days at 25 °C (Goldcap)
Permissible ambient temperature: –25 °C...+55 °C
Permissible storage temperature: –30 °C...+70 °C
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60 529
Protection class: II subject to correct installation
Weight: 300 g
PHARAO-II 4EDA (DC)
Upgrade by 4 digital
(24 V DC) inputs
2 x 1 kHz counter inputs
PHARAO-II 4ED (AC)
Upgrade by 4 digital inputs
(220 V AC–240 V AC)
PHARAO-II 24 (AC)
• Nominal voltage 100–240 V~
• 15 digital inputs e.g. for keys, brightness and temperature
switches
• 9 relay outputs: 4 x 8 A/250 V~, 5 x 2 A/250 V~
PHARAO-II 15 (DC)
• Nominal voltage 24 V DC
• 8 inputs digital/analogue selectable
• 6 relay outputs 8 A/250 V~
PHARAO-II 25 (DC)
PHARAO-II 25 (DC)
• Nominal voltage 24 V DC
• 15 inputs, including 8 digital/analogue selectable
• 9 relay outputs: 4 x 8 A/250 V~, 5 x 2 A/250 V~
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
102
PHARAO-II 4AR (AC)
4-channel relay output
upgrade with 2 A/250 V AC
Din rail program
Programmable logic controller – Programming
Easy-to-use programming and wiring of function blocks at the PC
Control unit and operator control terminal
in one device
Comment texts and on-line values from the PHARAO control
unit’s program can be displayed on the LCD via the newly
developed display function. Several 4-line display with
different values can be called up by scrolling.
The LCD is therefore not used just for program input, but also
for displaying information texts, switching statuses, time,
count values, anlog values, operating hours etc. Values and
switch statuses can be altered via the control keys which can
be used in the program as additional control inputs.
Menu for animated
simulation of the
program
Tool rail inputs
and outputs (extracts)
Tool for wiring
the circuit path
Communication in all directions
Error messages or threshold values
in the text can be sent by SMS from
controller to mobile telephone.
Cost efficient remote control and
monitoring.
Because PHARAO software 2.0
contains the entire set of communication tools, the PC requires only
a modem to enable remote
configuration, monitoring and
programming.
Error messages or
threshold values
in the text can be
sent from controller
to Fax machine.
Analogue modem
103
Din rail program
Programmable logic controller – Accessories
24 V DC power supply
Power pack for supply voltage from PHARAO controllers
and sensors (LUNA 131 DDC).
Power pack adequate for 5 controllers
PHARAO-II 15 or PHARAO 21/25 and/or
12 x PHARAO 11/12 controllers
Technical data:
Nominal output voltage: 24 V DC
Nominal output: 36 W
Nominal current: 1.5 A
Protection class: II subject to correct installation
Permissible humidity range: ≤ 95 %
Permissible ambient temperature: –5 °C ...+55 °C
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60 950
Dimensions: 71 x 90 x 58 mm
Luna 131 DDC combination sensor with
analoge outputsignal 0–10 V
The combination sensor LU 131 DDC records the brightness
and temperature. The unit has two separate outputs 0–10 V.
The sensor can be connected for example with the analog
inputs of the PHARAO devices (24 V DC). The function blocks
signal converter, range comparison and Schmitt trigger
allow control units and controllers to be programmed.
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 24 V DC/< 25 mA
Brightness range selectable: 1. 0–200 Lux
2. 0–10.000 Lux
3. 0–50.000 Lux
Sensorcharacteristic: linear, temperature, brightness
Temperature range: –30 °C... +70 °C
Output: 0–10 V DC
Degree of protection: IP 54
Housing: 110 x 72 x 54 mm
LUXOR 413 wind sensor with pulse output
The wind sensor can be used to protect blinds and
awnings from excessively high wind speeds. The sensor
can be connected, for example, directly to a digital input
of a PHARAO device (24 V DC).
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 24 V DC
Wind speed: 0–20 m/s
Output: 4 pulses per revolution
Type of protection: IP 43
SUD 228 Charging switch for electric storage
heating units
• Charging switch with adjustable charging time and
backward charge control
• When the ripple control receiver or the rate time switch
enables the “low rate night”, the device will start the
charging program for the storage heater
• Depending on design, the charging time can be set to
0–8 or 0–9 hours by key press, depending on the
heating required
• The display shows the charging time, which is repeated
every 24 hours
• The backward charging control will end the charging
when the light load period ends.
• Manual switch can be connected for charging during the day
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 100–240 V~, +10 %, –15 %
Frequency: 50–60 Hz
Switching power: 8 A/250 V~
Contact: NO contact, potential-free
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60 529
Protection class: II when mounted in accordance with
its designated use
Label: VDE
Housing: 90 x 71 x 57 mm
24 V DC power supply
LUNA 131 DDC
New
LUXOR 413 (Wind sensor)
SUD 228
PHARAO/PHARAO-II programming cable
For series connection (RS 232) to enable conrol programs
to be configured and parameterised. This cable is used to
connect an analogue model for remote maintenance and
remote control.
PHARAO-II GSM interface cable
The GSM interface cable enables a connection to be
established and SMS data to be transmitted to mobile
telephone, email address or Fax machine.
The interface for connecting the GSM cable is located
below the plug-in upgrade modules.
PHARAO-EEPROM
104
PHARAO-II-EEPROM
Plug-in EEPROM memory module
External memory module for transferring and/or downloading the program from or to the internal EEPROM system
memory.
Internal program is deactivated for as long as the external
memory module is plugged in (dual programming).
PHARAO-EEPROM (1.5 kByte)
PHARAO-II-EEPROM (5 kByte)
Din rail program
Programmable logic controller
Type
Outputs
Nominal voltage range
Inputs
Input
frequency
Order No.
PHARAO 6 (AC)
2 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
100–240 V AC, +10 %/–15 %,
50–60 Hz
4 digital inputs
100–240 V AC (0,24 mA/240 V AC)
max. 5 Hz
575 0 006
PHARAO 10 (AC)
4 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
100–240 V AC, +10 %/–15 %,
50–60 Hz
6 digital inputs
100–240 V AC (0,24 mA/240 V AC)
max. 5 Hz
575 0 010
PHARAO 11 (DC)
4 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
6 analogue/digital eligible inputs
0–10 V DC or 24 V DC, sink/source
max. 20 Hz
575 9 011
PHARAO 12 (DC)
4 transistor outputs
à 1 A/24 V DC
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
6 analogue/digital eligible inputs
0–10 V DC or 24 V DC, sink/source
max. 20 Hz
575 9 012
PHARAO 20 (AC)
8 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
100–240 V AC, +10 %/–15 %,
50–60 Hz
12 inputs digital
100 V–240 V AC (0,24 mA/240 V AC)
max. 5 Hz
575 0 020
PHARAO 21 (DC)
8 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
12 inputs: 4 digital inputs, 8 alternatively
analogue/digital, 0–10 V DC or 24 V DC, sink/source
max. 20 Hz
575 9 021
PHARAO 22 (DC)
8 transistor outputs
à 1 A/24 V DC
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
12 inputs: 4 digital inputs, 8 alternatively
analogue/digital, 0–10 V DC or 24 V DC, sink/source
max. 20 Hz
575 9 022
PHARAO-II 10 (AC)
4 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
100–240 V AC, +10 %/–15 %,
50–60 Hz
6 digital inputs
max. 5 Hz
575 0 210
PHARAO-II 11 (DC)
4 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
6 analogue/digital eligible inputs
max. 20 Hz
575 9 211
PHARAO-II 14 (AC)
6 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
100–240 V AC, +10 %/–15 %,
50–60 Hz
8 digital inputs
max. 20 Hz
575 0 014
PHARAO-II 15 (DC)
6 relays (NO contact)
à 8 A/250 V~
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
8 analogue/digital eligible inputs
max. 20 Hz
575 9 015
PHARAO-II 24 (AC)
4 relays à 8 A/250 V~
5 relays à 2 A/250 V~
100–240 V AC, +10 %/–15 %,
50–60 Hz
15 digital inputs
max. 20 Hz
575 0 024
PHARAO-II 25 (DC)
4 relays à 8 A/250 V~
5 relays à 2 A/250 V~
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
15 inputs, 8 of them analogue/digital eligible inputs
max. 20 Hz
575 9 025
PHARAO-II
Upgrade 4ED (AC)
220–240 V AC
50–60 Hz
4 digital inputs
max. 5 Hz
575 9 100
PHARAO-II
Upgrade 4EDA (DC)
24 V DC, +20 %/–15 %
4 digital inputs
2 x 1 kHz
575 9 101
PHARAO-II
Upgrade 4AR (AC)
220–240 V AC
50–60 Hz
4 relay outputs
–
575 9 102
Power supply 24 V DC, 36 W, 4 TE
LUNA 131 DDC combination sensor, temperature- and brightness sensor for analogue inputs on PHARAO units, 0–10 V DC
PHARAO programming software CD for Windows 95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP, software for PHARAO and PHARAO-II generation
Programming cable, PC/PHARAO
PHARAO-II GSM cable
Plug-in EEPROM
Plug-in PHARAO-II EEPROM
Front panel installation kit, only for PHARAO 6, 10, 11, 12
SUD 228 (8h) charging switch for electric storage heaters, output 8 A, input for ripple control receiver/rate time switch and manual switch
SUD 228 (9h) charging switch for electric storage heaters, output 8 A, input for ripple control receiver/rate time switch and manual switch
907 9 330
131 9 700
907 0 251
907 0 252
907 0 329
907 0 253
907 0 328
907 0 001
228 0 575
228 0 576
105
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
4–12 channel switching actuators
Technical data:
Mains supply
Voltage: 230 V AC, ± 10 %, 50 Hz
Power consumption: 2.5 VA
Supply from the bus
EIB power supply: max. 10 mA
(incl. 2 extensions)
Connection: Bus terminals
RMG 4S EIB/KNX
Basic module/4 channels
RME 4S EIB/KNX
Upgrade module/4 channels
RMG 4C-Last EIB/KNX
Basic module/4 channels
Output
Number: 4
Contact type: NO contact, potential-free
Contact opening: ≤ 3 mm
Mechanical operating cycles: > 1 x 10 6
Rated voltage:
230 V AC, 50 to 60 Hz (L1, L2 or L3)
Switching of different outer conductors: possible
Switching of SELV: possible, if all 4 channels of an SELV
module will switch
Switching power RMG 4S/RME 4S:
Rated current: 16 A (250 V AC, cos j = 1) and
10 A (250 V AC, cos ϕ = 0.6) and
Resistive load: 3680 W
Capacitive load: max. 42 µF
Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
HV halogen lamps: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) uncompensated:
26 x 40 W, 20 x 58 W, 10 x 100 W
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) shunt compensated:
10 x 40 W (4,7 µF), 20 x 58 W (7 µF), 2 x 100 W (18 µF)
Fluorescent lamps (KVG) Dual circuit:
10 x (2 x 58 W), 5 x (2 x 100 W)
RME 4C-Last EIB/KNX
Upgrade module/4 channels
RMG 4 S EIB/KNX (Basic module)
• 4-way basic module with 16 A switching capacity
RME 4 S EIB/KNX (Upgrade module)
• 4-way upgrade module 16 A
(for upgrading to max. 12 channels)
RMG 4 C-Load EIB/KNX (Basic module)
• 4-way basic module with 16 A switching capacity for
higher lamp loads
Switching power RMG 4C load/RME 4C load:
Rated current: 16 A (250 V AC, cos ϕ = 1) and
16 A (250 V AC, cos ϕ = 0.6) and
Resistive load: 3680 W
Capacitive load: max. 200 µF
Incandescent lamps: 3680 W
HV halogen lamps: 3680 W
RME 4 C-Load EIB/KNX (upgrade module)
• 4-way upgrade module 16 A
(for upgrading to max. 12 channels)
Features
• Switching capacity 16 A, upgradable to 12 channels
• Feedback object for each channel
• Central objects with and without priority
• Switching functions: ON/OFF, pulse, ON/OFF delay,
stairway-light with pre-warning according to DIN
18 015-2
• Logic operations: Disable/AND/OR/Enable
• Select and save settings
• Response to bus failure configurable
• Response when bus and mains restored configurable.
This guarantees usage in accordance with VDE 108
• Manual switch with ON/OFF/BUS, switching without bus
voltage also possible
• The same functions are available with C-Load relay, any
combination with these products possible
• Can also be extended with dimming actuators, heating
actuators, binary input
Advantages
• Combination of switching, dimming, and binary input,
heating actuators possible
• C-Load actuators for higher lamp loads
(also combinable)
• All functions possible on all channels
(one application only)
• Response after bus failure and when bus/mains are
restored configurable
• Terminals for channels on one side simplify wiring
• Manual switching and status display for each channel
• High switching capacity with optimised relay contacts
• Low cost upgrade modules reduce channel price
106
BME
RMG
HME
▲
C-Last
Order No.
▲
▲
BME
▲
RMG
BME
DME
▲
BME
▲
RMG
▲
BME
C-Last
▲
▲
RMG
▲
DME
RME
▲
▲
▲
RMG
RME
▲
RMG
RME
Admissible ambient temperature: –5 °C ... +45 °C
Protection class: II when mounted in accordance with its
designated use
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60 529
Housing: 45 x 72 x 60 mm (4 TE)
-series can be combined
with devices on pages 107/108/109
Combination options for dimming/switching actuators (examples):
RMG
Connection cross-sections:
solid 0.5 mm2 (Ø 0.8) up to 4 mm2 strand with cable end
sleeve 0.5 mm2 up to 2.5 mm2
HME
RMG 4S EIB/KNX
RME 4S EIB/KNX
RMG 4C-Last EIB/KNX
RME 4C-Last EIB/KNX
491 0 204
491 0 205
491 0 206
491 0 207
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
2–6 channel universal dimmer
Technical data:
Mains power supply
Voltage: 230 V AC, 50 Hz
Required device power: < 0.5 W
EIB power supply: < 10 mA (incl. 2 extensions)
Minimal load: 10 W/VA
DMG 2 EIB/KNX
Dimmer basic module/2 channels
Output
Channels per module: 2
Lamp types: Filament bulbs, low-volt
and high-volt halogen lamps
DME 2 EIB/KNX
Dimmer upgrade module/2 channels
Maximum load
Symmetrical: 2 x 300 W/VA
Asymmetrical: 1 x 500 W/VA
Example of asymmetrical load:
1 x 400 and 1 x 100 W/VA
Cable length, dimmer load: max. 100 m
Fusing: Automatic Cut-out-Characteristic B 16 A
Terminal cross-sections:
solid 0.5 mm2 (Ø 0.8) to 4 mm2
Strand with wire end sleeve 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
DMB 2 EIB/KNX
„Dimm booster“/2 channels
Permissible ambient temperature: –5 °C... +45 °C
Protection class: II subject to correct installation
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60,529
Equipment standard: EN 60 669
Housing: 45 x 72 x 60 mm (4 TE)
DMG 2 EIB/KNX (Basic device)
• 2-way dimming module 2 x 300 W/VA or
1 x 500 W/VA
DME 2 EIB/KNX (upgrade device)
• 2-way upgrade module 2 x 300 W/VA or
1 x 500 W/VA
(for upgrading to max. 6 dimming channels)
DMB 2 EIB/KNX (performance upgrade)
• Dimming output upgrade “Dimm Booster”
Features
• Dimming output per basic and upgrade module:
2 x 300 W/VA or 1 x 500 W/VA;
combined creates the following options:
6 x 300 W/VA or
4 x 300 W/VA + 1 x 500 W/VA or
2 x 300 W/VA + 2 x 500 W/VA or
3 x 500 W/VA
• If the “Dimm Booster” DMB 2 is used, the dimming
output per device can be doubled to:
2 x 600 W/VA or 1 x 1000 W/VA
• Central objects with and without priority
• Automatic load detection
• Diagnosis and feedback objects
• Response on bus failure configurable
• Response when bus and mains restored configurable.
This guarantees usage in accordance with VDE 108.
• Manual switch with ON/OFF/BUS, switching without bus
voltage
• Dimming modules can be combined with switching
actuators, heating actuators and binary inputs as
desired
Advantages
• Any combination of switching, dimming, heating and
binary input possible, thus thus achieving very low
channel prices
• Upgrades enable up to 6 x dimming
• There are even hand switches for dimming modules,
which make the installation easier
• Highly flexible through combination options that do not,
however, have to be used!
• Low cost upgrade modules reduce channel price
-series can be combined
with devices on pages 106/108/109
BME
DMG
HME
▲
BME
Order No.
▲
▲
C-Last
▲
DMG
RME
C-Last
▲
RME
▲
DMG
▲
RME
C-Last
▲
▲
RME
DMG
▲
DME
DME
▲
DMG
▲
DMG
DME
▲
DMG
▲
Combination options for dimming/switching actuators (examples):
HME
DMG 2 EIB/KNX
DME 2 EIB/KNX
DMB 2 EIB/KNX
491 0 220
491 0 221
491 0 222
107
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
6–18 binary inputs
Technical data:
Supply from the bus
Power consumption: < 10 mA (incl. 2 extensions)
Connection: Bus terminal
Protection class: II
BMG 6 EIB/KNX
Binary input/6 channels
BME 6 EIB/KNX
Upgrade module/6 channels
Inputs
Number: 6
Average current consumption of the inputs:
≤ 3 mA
Voltage range: 8–250 V AC/DC
Max. cable length: 100 m
Admissible ambient temperature: –5 °C ... +45 °C
Protection class: II
Type of protection according to EN 60 529
when mounted in accordance with its designated
use: IP 20
Housing: 45 x 72 x 60 mm (4 TE)
Connection cross-sections:
solid 0.5 mm2 (Ø 0.8) up to 4 mm2 strand with cable end
sleeve 0.5 mm2 up to 2.5 mm2
Power supply unit for auxiliary voltage
Voltage: 230 V AC, ± 10 %, 50 Hz
Power consumption: 2.5 VA
Output voltage: approx. 18 V~/20 mA
BMG 6 EIB/KNX (base unit)
• 6x binary input
BMG 6 EIB/KNX (extension unit)
• 6x extension module (for extension to up to 18 binary
inputs)
Features
• Multi-voltage input 8-250 V AC/DC
• Auxiliary voltage for potential-free inputs provided by
unit
• All inputs can be operated with different voltages
• 6 LEDs for displaying the input status
• Cable length per input max. 100 m
• Up to 2 output object per channel
• Disable object for each channel
• Reaction to bus return can be set
• Software functions: switch/button, dimming, blinds,
value encoder, counter
• Any combination of binary input modules with all
switching, heating and dimming actuators of the MIX
series possible
Advantages
• Their combination with switching actuators, heating
actuators and dimming actuators increases flexibility
and reduces system costs
• Extension gives up to 18 inputs
• Inexpensive extension modules reduce the channel
price
• Multi-voltage inputs and auxiliary voltage for potentialfree inputs make it possible to solve all applications
with one device.
• LEDs for status display of the outputs
-series can be combined
with devices on pages 106/107/109
108
▲
C-Last
HME
▲
BMG
C-Last
DME
DME
▲
RME
▲
BMG
RME
▲
RME
Order No.
▲
▲
C-Last
▲
RME
BMG
▲
BME
BME
▲
BMG
▲
BMG
▲
BMG
BME
▲
BMG
▲
Combination options for dimming/switching actuators (examples):
HME
BMG 6 EIB/KNX
BME 6 EIB/KNX
491 0 230
491 0 231
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
4–12 channel heating actuators
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V/240 V, ± 10%
Rated frequency: 50–60 Hz
Device consumption: max. 2.5 VA
Supply from the bus
EIB power supply: max. 10 mA
(incl. 2 extensions)
Connection: Bus terminals
New
HMG 4 EIB/KNX
Basic module/4 channels
New
HME 4 EIB/KNX
Extension module/4 channels
Output: Triac
Number: 4
Switching power:
up to 5 thermal actuators per output
Connection cross-sections:
solid 0.5 mm2 (Ø 0.8) up to 4 mm2 strand with cable end
sleeve 0.5 mm2 up to 2.5 mm2
Admissible ambient temperature: –5 °C ... +45 °C
Protection class: II when mounted in accordance with
its designated use
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60529
Housing: 45 x 72 x 60 mm (4 TE)
HMG 4 EIB/KNX (base unit)
• 4-channel heating actuator
HME 4 EIB/KNX (extension unit)
• 4-channel extension module
(for extension to up to 12 heating channels)
Description
When using room temperature control systems in
combination with thermal actuators, the heating actuators
optimize the effect and allow integration of boiler control.
Moreover, the actuator enables direct triggering of a
circulation pump.
Features
• Silent semiconductor switches
• 4 potential-free outputs 24–250 V AC
• Up to 5 actuators per channel
• 4 LEDs for status display
• 4 rotary switches ON/OFF/BUS
Advantages
• Their combination with switching, dimming actuators
and binary inputs increases flexibility and reduces
system costs
• Extension gives up to 12 heating channels
• Inexpensive extension modules reduce the channel price
• Pump activation directly by the actuator
• By determining the largest correcting variable of all
channels and sending them to the boiler control, the
supply flow temperature can be adapted, resulting in
energy savings of up to 30%.
• Easy startup via hand switch
• A steady or switching correcting variable can be selected
• Forced object for each channel
• Emergency program in case of bus and telegram failure
• Summer operation (prevents accidental heating in
summer) and valve protection
• Pump activation directly by the actuator
• Minimum and maximum correcting variable can be set,
allowing different reactions, depending upon whether a
value dropped below or exceeded the correcting
variable (can be selected individually)
• Determination of the max. correcting variable of all
channels to be included in the boiler control
-series can be combined
with devices on pages 106/107/108
Order No.
▲
C-Last
HME
▲
BMG
C-Last
DME
DME
▲
RME
▲
HMG
▲
RME
RME
▲
▲
C-Last
▲
RME
HMG
▲
HME
HME
▲
HMG
▲
HMG
▲
HMG
HME
▲
HMG
▲
Combination options for heating actuators (examples):
HME
HMG 4 EIB/KNX
HME 4 EIB/KNX
491 0 210
491 0 211
109
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
4–16 channel blind/switching actuators
JMG 4 EIB/KNX
Basic unit/4 drives
RMG 8 EIB/KNX
Basic unit/8 channels
RME 8 EIB/KNX
Extension unit/8 channels
RMX 4 EIB/KNX
Extension unit/4 channels
JMG 4 EIB/KNX (basic unit)
• Relay outputs for 4 drives
RMG 8 EIB/KNX (basic unit)
• Relay outputs for 4 drives or
• 8 switching channels or
• Random mixed operation of drive and
switching functions
Technical data:
JMG 4
Operating voltage: 230 V/240 V, ±10 %
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
Product consumption: max. 4 VA
Current consumption of bus: ≤ 8 mA
Contact material: AgSnO2
Type of contact: NO contact, floating
Switching capacity: 8 A 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
5 A 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Permissible ambient temperature: –5 °C ... +45 °C
Class of protection: II after correct installation
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in compliance with EN 60529
RMG 8, RME 8, RMX 4
Operating voltage: 230 V/240 V, ±10 %
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
Product consumption: max. 4 VA
Current consumption of bus (RMG 8 only): ≤ 8 mA
Contact material: AgSnO2
Type of contact: working contact, floating
Switching capacity: 10 A 250 V~, cos ϕ = 1
6 A 250 V~, cos ϕ = 0.6
Incandescent lamp load: 1400 W
Halogen lamp load: 1400 W
Permissible ambient temperature: –5 °C ... +45 °C
Class of protection: II after correct installation
Degree of protection to EN 60 529: IP 20
Standard housing:
45 x 105 x 60 mm (6 TE)
RMX 4: 45 x 52,5 x 60 mm (3 TE)
RME 8 EIB/KNX (expansion unit)
• Relay outputs for 4 drives or
• 8 switching channels or
• Random mixed operation of drive and
switching functions
• Extension unit for JMG 4, RMG 8, HMG 8
RMX 4 EIB/KNX (expansion unit)
• Relay outputs for 2 drives or
• 4 switching channels or
• Random mixed operation of drive and
switching functions
• Extension unit for JMG 4, RMG 8, HMG 8
Features
• Modularly extendable for 4 to 8 blinds or 8 to 16
switching outputs
• Option to move selectively to the blind (including slat)
or shutter position for:
– awnings, blinds, shutters and different
sun protection devices and blinds
– dormer windows and ventilation flaps
• Optimized repetition accuracy of the programmed slat
positions
• Their extensive switching functions are suitable for:
– shading, lighting and heating of
greenhouses and conservatories
– lighting of buildings, stairways
– delayed switching-on or switching-off, for example of
light groups
– short or long pulses for school bell or toilet flushing
and ventilation
• The extensions of HMG 8 (see page 112) with RME 8 or
RMX 4 only allow switching channels, but no drive
control
110
Advantages
• Manual control at the device without bus connection
• No matter where the blinds are located, the desired
position is always approached
– slippage adjustment when moving from bottom to top
– no reference run necessary
• Any combination of drive/switching possible with RMG
8, RME 8, RMX 4
• Drive can be freely parameterized for each channel
• The extendibility reduces channel costs
• Reaction adjustable in case of bus/mains failure
• 3 safety objects (display on LED)
• Product database simple to use
Order No.
JMG 4 EIB/KNX
RMG 8 EIB/KNX
RME 8 EIB/KNX
RMX 4 EIB/KNX
490 0 250
490 0 251
490 0 252
490 0 256
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
4–8 channel DC blind actuators
JME 4 24VDC EIB/KNX
Extension unit/4 drives
Technical data
JMG 4 24 V DC, JME 4 24 V DC
Operating voltage: 230 V/240 V, ±10 %
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz
Power consumption: max. 4 VA
Bus power draw: ≤ 8 mA
Load circuits: 24 V DC
Contact material: AgNi
Type of contact: NO contact, floating
Switching capacity: 5 A (24 V), 5 A (12 V)
Permitted ambient temperature: –5 °C ... +45 °C
Protection class: Il subject to correct installation
Protection rating to EN 60 529: IP 20
Housing dimensions: 45 x 105 x 60 mm
Weight: 450 g
JMG 4 24VDC EIB/KNX
Basic unit/4 drives
FME 8 EIB/KNX
Extension unit/8 window contact inputs
JMG 4 24VDC EIB/KNX (Basic device)
• 4 x 24 V DC drive channels
JME 4 24VDC EIB/KNX (Upgrade device)
• 4 x 24 V DC drive channels
FME 8 EIB/KNX (Upgrade device)
• 8 window contact inputs with safe
low voltage
Description
Type JMG 4 24 VDC blind actuators are suitable to be
used for the European Installation Bus in combination
with the Theben product database. The blind actuators
can switch phase sequence and runtimes of engines on
and off. Manual switch UP/DOWN.
Features
• Modular upgrading for 4 to 8 blinds
• Possible to selectively approach blind (inc. slat) and/or
shutter position for:
– awnings, blinds, shutters and various sun vision
protection devices
– skylights and ventilation flaps
• Optimised repetition accuracy of
programmed slat positions
• Upgrading with the window contact module can prevent
internal blinds running when the window is open
Advantages
• Manual operation at the device without bus connection
• Regardless of the blind's position, the desired position
is always directly approached
• Drive can be freely parameterised for each channel
• Upgrade option reduces channel costs
• Response on bus/mains failure configurable
• 8 safety objects (displayed on LED)
• User-friendly product database
Order No.
JMG 4 24VDC EIB/KNX
JME 4 24VDC EIB/KNX
FME 8 EIB/KNX
490 0 253
490 0 254
490 0 240
111
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
8–16 channel heating actuators
HME 8 EIB/KNX Extension unit/8 channels
HMG 8 EIB/KNX Basic unit/8 channels
HMG 8 EIB/KNX
8 channel basic unit with integrated bus connector for
controlling of thermic actuators
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V/240 V, ±10%
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
Product consumption: max. 4 VA
Current consumption of bus (only HMG 8): ≤ 8 mA
Switching output:
Relay up to 30 million switching cycles
Switching power:
up to 10 thermal actuators per output
Type of contact: working contact
Admissible ambient temperature: –5 °C ... +45 °C
Protection class: II if installed as directed
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60529
Norm: EN 60730
Standard housing: 45 x 105 x 60 mm (6 TE)
and/or HMX 4, RMX 4 45 x 54 x 60 mm (3 TE)
Load of window contact (FME 8): 20 V/2 mA typical
HMX 4 EIB/KNX Extension unit/4 channels
FME 8 EIB/KNX Extension unit for 8 window contacts
HME 8 EIB/KNX
8 channel extension unit with plug connection for the
extension of HMG 8 EIB to 16 channels
HMX 4 EIB/KNX
4 channel extension unit with plug connection for the
extension of HMG 8 EIB to 12 channels
FME 8 EIB/KNX
Extension unit of HMG 8 EIB for 8 window contacts
Description
The heating actuators optimize the efficency on the use of
room temperature controllers together with thermic
actuators and enable the integration of a boiler control.
Furthermore the basic unit HMG 8 EIB/KNX can be
extended with the extension modules RME 8 EIB/KNX,
RMX 4 EIB/KNX for 8 or 4 switching channels. That makes
a combination of heating and switching possible.
Features
• Use of 230 V~/24 V~ thermic actuators possible
– up to 10 thermic actuators per channel
• A steady or switching correcting variable can be
selected
• Compulsory mode via object or window contact can be
chosen
• Basic unit can be extended with:
– up to 8 additional heating channels (HME 8, HMX 4
EIB/KNX)
– or up to 8 switching channels (RME 8, RMX 4
EIB/KNX)
– or 8 window contacts (FME 8 EIB/KNX)
112
• Summer mode protects against undesired heating in
summer (valve protection in the summer mode can be
chosen)
• Emergency mode in case of bus or sensor failure
• Improved protection against short circuit by relay
• Manual switching for initiation
• Cyclic check of the controller output (for the
determination of the maximum controller output)
• Checking of the controller output in steps of
25 % via LED on the unit
• Determination of the max. correcting variable of all
channels to be included in the boiler control
Advantages
• The extendibility reduces channel costs
• The use of the window contact prevents unintentional
heating while the window is open
• By determining the greatest correcting variables of all
channels and sending them to the boiler control, the
forward flow temperature can be adapted, resulting in
energy savings of up to 30 %
• Combination of heating and switching possible
Order No.
HMG 8 EIB/KNX
HME 8 EIB/KNX
HMX 4 EIB/KNX
FME 8 EIB/KNX
490 0 270
490 0 271
490 0 272
490 0 240
Extension units for switching channels:
RME 8 EIB/KNX
490 0 252
RMX 4 EIB/KNX
490 0 256
(Description see page 110)
Wall mounting
EIB/KNX
Heating actuators with triacs for radiant floor heating systems
HMT 6 EIB/KNX
Technical data:
Operating voltage: 230 V/24 V AC
Max. power consumption: 50 W
Protection: T 2 A
Max. number of drives: 13
Heating programs optional: 2
Dimensions H/B/L: 70 x 75 x 302 mm
Weight: 1700 g
Protection class: II after correct installation
Degree of protection:
IP 20 in accordance with EN 60529
Massive power: 0.5–1.5 mm2
Flexible power*: 1.0–1.5 mm2
* Wires of the drives can be used with end sleeves for
strands, mounted ex works
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 24 V~
• Technical data Actuator see page 115
HMT 6
6 channel heating actuator for controlling of thermic
actuating drives
HMT 12
12 channel heating actuator for controlling of thermic
actuating drives
Description:
The housing are especially suitable for the mounting of
heating circuit distributors with triacs enabling a noisless
switching of the actuating drives.
The heating actuators (HMT 6/HMT 12 EIB/KNX) optimise
the efficiency when using room temperature controllers
together with thermic actuating drives and enable the
integration of a boiler control.
Features
• Clearly arranged and simple wiring of the drives (24 V)
• Mounting directly on the wall or on the rail in the
heating circuit distributor
• Plug at the transformer for easy installation
• Integrated 24 V~ power supply for the max.
13 thermal actuators that can be connected to the
heating actuator
• Continuous and switching controller output can be
chosen
• Compulsory mode via object
• Summer mode omits undesired heating in
summer (valve protection in the summer mode can be
chosen)
• Emergency operation in case of bus or controller failure
– Reaction adjustable in case of bus failure
• Cyclic monitoring of the correcting variable (controller
monitoring)
• Treating of the continuous controller output
• Automatic releasing of the thermal actuators after
switching on
• Determination of the max. correcting variable of all
channels to be considered by the boiler control
Advantages:
• Ideal design for mounting within the heating circuit
distributor
• Touchable low voltage (SELV)
• Convenient and uncomplicated wiring through screwless
terminal block technology
• By determining the greatest correcting variables of all
channels and sending them to the boiler control, the
forward flow temperature can be adapted, resulting in
energy savings of up to 30 %
Order No.
HMT 6 EIB/KNX
HMT 12 EIB/KNX
490 0 273
490 0 274
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 24 V~
907 0 439
113
Wall mounting
EIB/KNX
Thermostats
RAM 713 EIB/KNX
Single room temperature controller for controlling heater
actuators or motor-driven actuators
Features
• Continuous single room controller for wall-mounting
with integrated bus coupler
• RAM 713 can be used as steady or as two-point control
(combination also possible)
• Potential applications include:
– heating, e.g. radiator or underfloor heating
– 2-stage heating with basic and additional stage, e.g.
under-floor heating and radiator in one room
– heating and cooling, e.g. Radiator and cooling surface
• Manual key for presence signal or operating mode
switchover: comfort, standby, temperature reduction at
night, frost protection
• Red/blue status LED indicates whether heating-up,
cooling-down or the desired temperature has been
reached (LED off)
• 3 binary inputs for conventional switches/keys with the
following functions: switching, dimming, blinds
• Inputs can also be used for external temperature
sensors, window contact or presence signal
• Two rotary controls are included in delivery: 1 absolute
scale (mounted) and 1 relative scale (enclosed)
• The rotary control function can be switched off by
parameters
• Temperature setting range can be limited mechanically
on the rotary control or by parameters
RAM 713 EIB/KNX
Technical data:
Setting range: 10 °C...28 °C
Measuring range: 0 °C... 40 °C
Temperature limitation:
through external floor sensor 5 °C...48 °C
Temperature sensor:
(IP 65) encapsulated with 4 m connecting cable
Operating voltage: Bus voltage
Power consumption: ≤ 10 mA
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60529
Housing: 80 x 84 x 27 mm
Potential applications
• Single room control in functional buildings/private
residence
• Binary inputs enable the customer to continue using the
existing conventional switch program and still transmit
messages on the bus. The functions of: switching,
dimming, blinds are supported.
• A connected floor sensor prevents the floor from
becoming too warm (floor damage) or too cold
(bathroom).
RAM 713 EIB/KNX
Floor sensor (optional)
❮ Window contact
❮ Presence indicator
CHEOPS drive EIB/KNX
(Continuous control for radiators)
HMG 8 EIB/KNX
HMT 6 EIB/KNX
(Control for under-floor heating)
Dimension drawings
Order No.
27
80
RAM 713 EIB/KNX
Floor sensor, optional
4000
32
6
84
114
Floor sensor (optional)
713 9 201
907 0 321
Accessories
EIB/KNX
Actuator EIB
THEBEN actuators can be replaced with the most
common thermostat valve heads on radiators (for
the valve adapters, see page 86). In the case of
floor heating, the THEBEN actuators are mounted
on the valves of the heating circuit distributor.
Control takes place via the Theben heating
actuators (see pages 109/113/112).
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 230 V~
• Elegant actuator for radiator, heating circuit distributor
or individual heating circuits
• “First open function” for simple mounting and heating
startup
• Adaptation control
• Plug-in mounting on valve adapter
• 100% protection against leaking valves
• Function and adaptation control
• Dismounting safety through removable SaveGuard
• Guaranteed overvoltage protection
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 24 V~
• Actuator as before, but for 24 V AC/DC
VA 78
VA 80
Valve adapter (not
included in the delivery)
Common technical data:
Operating voltage:
230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
24 V, 0–60 Hz
Functional principle:
Silently working expandable element
Valve currentless: closed
Switch-on current:
max. 300 mA for max. 200 ms
max. 250 mA for max. 2 min
Operating power: 1.8 W
Closing/opening times: approx. 2.5 min
Stroke: 4 mm
Spring force: 100 N, ± 5 %
Admissible ambient temperature: 0 °C … 60 °C
Storage temperature: –25 °C… 60 °C
Type of protection: IP 54 according to EN 60529
Protection class:
II according to EN 60 730-1
Length of the plug-in connecting cable: 1000 mm
Color of housing: white (RAL 9003)
Housing: 60 x 44 x 61 mm (H/W/L)
Order No.
Actuator
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 230 V~
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 24 V~
907 0 438
907 0 439
Wall mounting
EIB/KNX
Thermostats
RAM 710-1 EIB/KNX
Single room control with bus coupler, connection
of a sensor for floor heating possible
RAM 710-1 EIB/KNX
Intelligent two-point control with automatic adjustment
of the switching hysteresis, operating mode display and
party key.
• Three different operating modes (comfort, lowering,
frost protection) along with the corresponding temperature levels can be selected
• Regulator with specified setpoint value via bus
• Regulator with actual value output and 3 temperature
levels
Common technical data:
Setting range: 6 °C…29 °C
Operating voltage: Bus voltage
Power consumption: < 10 mA
Degree of protection to EN 60 529: IP 20
Housing: 71 x 71 x 27.5 mm
RAM 710 Venkon EIB/KNX
For individual room control with fan convectors
The different fan levels (1, 2, 3) can be chosen by a key
(pushing a key). In the auto mode the unit choses the
necessary fan level on its own. Adjusting of the requested
temperature is only possible in the day mode, the
requested night temperature is adjusted via parameter.
For the control of the fan collectors we recommend
Theben switching actuator RMG 4S EIB/KNX
Order No.
RAM 710-1 EIB/KNX without handwheel
RAM 710 Venkon EIB/KNX
–phasedown–
710 9 201
710 9 202
RAM 710 Venkon EIB/KNX
–phasedown–
115
Valve mounting
EIB/KNX
Single-room controller with continous motorised actuation
CHEOPS control EIB/KNX
CHEOPS drive EIB/KNX
Cheops control EIB/KNX
Motor-driven actuating drive with independent room
temperature control and integrated temperature sensor
(actual value detection). Possibility for manual operation
on the drive via keys.
Technical data:
Supply voltage provided by the EIB net
Control signals: EIB telegram
Behaviour in case of control signal failure:
changes to adjustable position
Operating temperature: 0 °C ...+50 °C
Stock temperature: –20 °C ...+60 °C
Medium temperature: ≤100 °C
Degree of protection: EN 60529 – drive: IP 21
– control: IP 20
Protection class: III, EN 60730-2-14
Power consumption: 240 mW (max. 350 mW)
Max. setting stroke: 7.5 mm
Running time: < 20 s/mm
Stroke index drive: 120 N
Stroke indicator drive: 5 LEDs (5 x red)
Requested value display control:
5 LED’s (2 x blue, 3 x red)
Detection of the valve limit stop:
automatically
Valves which can be used:
Actuator with Ventiladapter for Danfoss RA, Heimeier,
MNG, Schlösser from 3/93, Honeywell Braukmann,
Dumser (heating circuit distributors), Reich (heating circuit
distributors), Landis + Gyr, Oventrop, Herb, Onda
Linearization of valve characteristics:
possible via software
Internal/external temperature sensor:
with Cheops control
Connection cable:
(1.0 m/below, in the middle) 6 poles (without shield)
Standard housing: 82 x 50 x 65 mm
Cheops drive EIB/KNX
Motor-driven actuating drive with stroke index.
The setting commands are transmitted by room
temperature sensors.
Description
The actuators have been developed for a continual valve
regulation. The drives receive their supply voltage from the
EIB/KNX. The integrated regulation with the CHEOPS
control EIB/KNX including actual temperature recording
allows an absolute independent single room control. The
temperature can be changed at any time via the hand keys.
CHEOPS control EIB/KNX
Motorized actuator with independent control and
temperature recording (actual value recording)
• Independent room temperature control,
manual operation on the device via 2 keys possible
(change of setpoint value)
• Display via 5 LEDs (red/blue for warmer/colder)
• Connection for remote sensor
• The following functions can be configured:
– heating control (steady control)
– 2-stage heating
– heating + cooling
• CHEOPS control can additionally transmit a correcting
variable for a second heating stage or for a cooling
system.
This correcting variable can be processed by the
CHEOPS drive or by a heating actuator.
• When both keys are pressed simultaneously, the stroke
(positioning) is displayed by the 5 LEDs.
116
CHEOPS drive EIB/KNX:
Motor-driven actuating drive without regulation
• Stroke index (adjusted position) by the 5 LEDs (red)
CHEOPS control with adapter for radiator valves
Application possibilities
• Quit, service free drive
• Fully automatic valve stroke detection adjusting the
regulating distance dynamically
according to the valve used.
• 2 inputs for e. g. window contact, presence
detector
• Compulsory modes e. g. frost protection, regulator
failure
• Protection against vandalism possible by lock
• Easy mounting by snapping on valve adapter (valve
adapter for all well-known valves included in the
delivery)
• Can be used in the heating circuit distributor
• Valve protection in the summer mode to omit valves
sticking
• Behaviour in case of telegram failure can be adjusted
• Master-slave-function: The Cheops control can send the
commands as well to the Cheops drive
Remote sensor can be used as an
external ACT sensor/temperature sensor
Order No.
CHEOPS control EIB/KNX
CHEOPS drive EIB/KNX
732 9 201
731 9 200
Remote sensor, optional
907 0 191
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
Time transmitter
ZS 600 DCF EIB/KNX
Time transmitter for date and time
Features
• The time transmitter transmits time and date on the bus
• It will synchronize other bus users, e. g. secondary clocks
• Operates with and without DCF77 antenna
• LED for status display (DCF reception ok)
• Power supply for DCF77 antenna integrated
• Quick startup by presetting date and time (CET or CEST)
• Automatic summertime/wintertime change
• Individual changeover rule can be set
Technical data:
Supply from the bus
Power consumption: max. 10 mA
Admissible ambient temperature: –10 °C ... +50 °C
Power reserve: 10 years
Cable length for aerial: max. 100 m
Accuracy (without antenna): 1 s/day
Its application allows the time to be synchronized.
Protection class: III
Type of protection according to EN 60 529
when mounted in accordance with its designated
use: IP 20
Housing: 45 x 35 x 60 mm (2 TE)
Advantages
• Low-cost solution for time and date synchronization of
bus devices
• Can be used with and without DCF77 antenna
• Connection of antenna in protection class III possible
ZS 600 DCF EIB/KNX
DCF77 antenna EIB/KNX
for time synchronization, optional
DCF77 Aerial
Dimension drawings DIN 43880
Order No.
65,5
52,5 *
ZS 600 DCF EIB/KNX
DCF77 aerial EIB/KNX
60
600 9 200
907 0 271
45
86
128 *
35
55 *
117
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
4 channel yearly time switch
TERMINA 644 S DCF EIB/KNX
TERMINA 644 S EIB/KNX
Quartz-controlled or DCF 77 radio-controlled with
time/data transmission to the bus and integrated bus
coupler.
Programming at PC with programming set OBELISK or
button input at device. Bi-directional data transfer
possible between PC and device.
TR 644 S DCF EIB/KNX
Application software
Switching valuator device, transmit time and date
8 possible group addresses/8 possible associations
On each of the 4 channels, the following types of message
can be selected:
• Switching message (1 bit)
• Priority message (2 bit)
• Dim and/or value message (8-bit)
• Cyclical transmission selectable
• Date and time can be transmitted every minute, hour,
day or on request (via object time query)
Technical data:
Operating voltage: Bus voltage, with TR 644 S DCF
additional mains voltage 230 V, ±10 % for integrated
antenna power supply unit
Channels: 4
Memory locations: 324 (free block formation)
Automatic program:
Day, week, year and pulse program
Special program: 9 week programs
Summer/winter time adjustment:
automatic or by the DCF77 radio signal
Power consumption: < 10 mA
Power reserve: 1.5 years (lithium battery exchangeable)
Captive hinged cover, tamper proof
Housing: 45 x 105 x 60 mm (6 TE)
Application possibilities
• Ideal EIB time switch for objects in which complex time
functions are required
• Simple reprogramming with easy-to-use Windows
software “OBELISK”
• Transmission of radio signal DCF77 with time and date
to the entire EIB system
• Time and date synchronization of other bus users (e.g.
EIB secondary clock, control systems etc.)
• Time-dependent switching of lighting, heating, blinds,
alarm systems, electrical door openers, water flushing
device in toilet facilities, irrigation systems, movement of
water in swimming pools etc.
• Time controlled dimming of path lighting (e.g. hotels,
hospitals, staircases)
• Scene control of lighting with simultaneous switching
and dimming (e.g. cinemas, theatre, other functional
buildings)
• Time-dependent definition of different temperature
stages for single-room control systems
(e.g. RAM 713 EIB/KNX, CHEOPS control EIB/KNX)
• Time-dependent forced control (ON and/or OFF has
precedence) of consumers by prority messages
• Random switching for absence control
Switching valuator device, receive temperature,
time and date
8 possible group addresses/8 possible associations
On each of the 4 channels, the following types of message
can be selected:
• Switching message (1 bit)
• Priority message (2 bit)
• Dim and/or value message (8 bit)
• Temperature message (16 bit)
• Random message in EIS 5 format (16 bit)
• Cyclical transmission selectable
• Clock can be set via time and data messages
Scene with switching, valuator device, priority
10 possible group addresses/10 possible associations
Switching, priority, dim and/or value message can be
transmitted on 4 channels. A scene with max. 4 objects
can be controlled with the 4th channel.
• Via holiday object (blocked object) the switching
program of the clock can be suppressed
• Cyclical transmission selectable
DCF77 Aerial EIB/KNX
RMG 4 S EIB
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
Order No.
TR 644 S EIB/KNX
DCF retrofitting not possible
29 V =
EIB POWER SUPPLY
REQUIRED
▼
▼
▼
▼
KNX
Transmission of time, date,
switching and dimming
signals through the twowire EIB bus line from the
masters clock TR 644 S to
the self-adjusting slave
clocks and switching/
dimming actuators
118
▼
▼
e
▼
RECEPTION ▼
TIME SIGNAL
Time, date,
▼
switching and
dimming signals ▼
▼
TRANSMIT
▼
RECEPTION
RECEPTION ▼ TIME SIGNAL
TIME SIGNAL
DCF77radio signal
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
RECEPTION
TIME AND
DATE SIGNAL
TR 644 S DCF EIB
DME 2 EIB
D
RECEPTION
SWITCHING SIGNAL
To be programmed
either on the unit
or by PC
644 9 203
TR 644 S DCF EIB/KNX
644 9 204
Accessories for DCF77 control necessary
DCF77 Aerial EIB/KNX
907 0 271
OBELISK programming set EIB/KNX 907 0 305
OBELISK memory card EIB/KNX
907 0 223
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
16 channel yearly time switch
TERMINA 648 S DCF EIB/KNX
Quartz-controlled or DCF77 radio-controlled with time/data
transmission to the bus and integrated bus coupler.
Up to 4 programs can be used as astronomical program.
Depending on the location the daily sunrise and sunset is
calculated. The programming of the astronomical program
is only possible by the Obelisk 2.1 software.
PC based programming with the programming set for
Obelisk 2.1 or by local keypad entry. Bi-directional data
transfer between PC and devices is supported.
TR 648 S DCF EIB/KNX
Application software
Switching; valuator device, priority, temperature;
sences; time and date
Choice of the following message types on each of the 16
channels:
• Switching message (1 bit)
• Priority message (2 bits)
• Dimming or value message (1 byte)
• Temperature; cooling, climatisation mode:
(1 byte) automatic, comfort, standby, reduced temperature at night, frost and heat protection
• Temperatur message in the scenes
• Cyclic transmission is an option
• 4 blocking objects
• 8 scenes on 6 objects
• Date and time can be sent every minute,
every hour, every day or on demand (by
object time request)
• Clock can be set by the time and date message
Application possibilities
• Ideal EIB time switch for objects in which
complex time functions are required
• Due to the astro sensor no light sensor is necessary.
Damage on the sensor can therefore be omitted
• Energysaving switching off at night possible
• Time depending sending of the heating-coolingclimatization mode for individual room control systems
(ex. Cheops control EIB/KNX))
• Simple reprogramming with easy-to-use Windows
software “OBELISK 2.1”
• Transmission of radio signal DCF77 with time and date
to the entire EIB system
• Time and date synchronization of other bus users (e.g.
EIB secondary clock, control systems etc.)
• Time-dependent switching of lighting, heating, roller
blinds, alarm systems, electrical door openers, water
flushing device in toilet facilities, irrigation systems,
movement of water in swimming pools etc.
• Time controlled dimming of path lighting (e.g. hotels,
hospitals, staircases)
• Scene control of lighting with simultaneous switching
and dimming (e.g. cinemas, theatre, other functional
buildings)
• Time-dependent definition of different temperature
stages for single-room control systems
(e.g. RAM 710 EIB/KNX)
• Time-dependent forced control (ON and/or OFF has
precedence) of consumers by prority messages
• Random switching for absence control
Order No.
PC Programming set OBELISK
TR 648 S DCF EIB/KNX
DCF77 Aerial EIB/KNX
OBELISK memory card EIB/KNX
OBELISK programming set EIB/KNX
OBELISK (EEPROM) for program transfer
between PC and time switch
standard plug-in adapter
Technical data
Operating voltage: Bus voltage, with TR 644 S DCF
additional mains voltage 230 V, ±10 % for integrated
antenna power supply unit
Channels: 16
Number of astronomical channels:
4 on C1, C2, C3, C4
Memory locations: 500 saved by EEPROM
Automatic program:
Day, week, year and pulse program
Special program:
• In addition to the standard week program further week
programs can be programmed for each channel (C1 to
C16). Those week programs can be activated by
entering the start and end date
• Date switching commands and 1 x date switching
commands can complete each week program
• Random program can be activated via key pad
• Consideration of fixed and variable holidays
Possible manual operations:
Preliminary manual override, permanent manual override
or random switching
Inputs:
Supply voltage for the DCF net part,
DCF77 antenna, 1 x bus
Programming:
Via key pad or by PC programming software Obelisk 2.1
and memory card Obelisk (64 K)
Shortest switching interval:
1 minute, via pulse program 1 second
Block formation:
Free block formation of the week days
and the switching channels
Summer/winter time adjustment:
automatic or by the DCF77 radio signal
Power consumption: < 10 mA
Accuracy: ≤ ± 1 s/day or DCF77 synchronous
Power reserve:
18 months (lithium battery exchangeable)
Captive hinged cover, tamper proof
Housing: 45 x 105 x 60 mm (6 TE)
648 9 201
907 0 271
907 0 223
907 0 305
Further information see page 29
119
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
2 channel week time switch
TERMINA 612 S EIB/KNX
with preset time and integrated bus coupler
Application software
2 scenes with switching, valuator device, priority
Switching, priority, dim and/or value messages can be
transmitted on 2 channels. A scene with max. 4 objects
can be controlled with both channels.
• Via holiday object (blocked object) the switching
program of the clock can be suppressed
• On resetting the holiday object, the current state of the
clock is transmitted
TR 612 S EIB/KNX
Application possibilities
• Ideal EIB time switch for large houses and
smaller EIB projects
• With a switching interval, max. 4 messages can be
transmitted to the bus via a channel (e.g. after work:
switch off main lighting, lower blinds, lower room
temperature, lock outside doors)
Technical data
Operating voltage: Bus voltage
Channels: 2
Memory capacity: 36 (free block formation)
Automatic program: Day and week program
Summer/winter time adjustment: automatic
Power consumption: < 3.5 mA
Minimum switching interval: 1 minute
Accuracy: ≤ 1 s/day at 20 °C
Power reserve: 6 years (lithium)
Permissible ambient temperature:
–5 °C...+45 °C
Degree of protection: IP 20 as per EN 60529
Captive hinged cover, tamper proof
Housing: 45 x 35 x 60 mm (2 TE)
Order No.
TR 612 S EIB/KNX
612 9 201
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
3 channel brightness sensor
LUNA 130 EIB/KNX
for brightness-dependent light scene control
Application software
Brightness sensor with 4 scenes
• Measuring range 1–100 lux or 100–20000 luxselectable
• Measuring range can be divided into 4 areas by 3 steps
• Each subdomain can be allocated a light scene from 3
switching objects and 1 dim object
• Adjustable special scene, retrievable via the holiday
object
LUNA 130 EIB/KNX
Application possibilities
• The LU 130 EIB is highly suitable for applications which
require a easy-to-use, brightness-dependent lighting
control.
• Control of several lines of fluorescent luminaires
• With the brightness sensor max. four different brightness
steps can be monitored.
Brightness sensor with 3 thresholds
• 3 integrated triggers
• Adjustable threshold between 1 and 20000 lux
• The behavior when the threshold value is not reached or
and/or exceeded can be set with the following parameters: no message, ON message, OFF message, ON
message (transmit cyclically), OFF message, (transmit
cyclically)
• Further parameters: hysteresis, delay time, cycle time
• Blocking object blocks transmission per channel
switching object 1
switching object 2
switching object 3
dimming object
120
Technical data:
Treshold values, dimming stages and switching delay
settable via software
Operating voltage: Bus voltage
Range: 1–20 000 lux
Switching delay: 8–240 s
Power consumption: < 10 mA
Permissible ambient temperature:
–5 °C...+45 °C
Degree of protection: IP 20 as per EN 60529
Length of sensor line (max.): approx. 100 m
Cross-section sensor line: 2 x 0.75 mm2
Captive hinged cover, tamper proof
Housing: 45 x 35 x 60 mm (2 TE)
Order No.
LUNA 130 EIB/KNX
130 9 200
Accessories:
Surface-mounted light sensor (included in delivery)
Flush-mounted light sensor
907 0 247
Behaviour with
holiday
Brighter than
threshold 1
Between
threshold 1 and
threshold 2
Between
threshold 2 and
threshold 3
Darker than
threshold 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
ON
OFF
OFF
80
ON
ON
OFF
160
ON
ON
ON
255
Threshold 3
Threshold 2
Threshold 1
Wall mounting
EIB/KNX
Combination sensor for brightness and temperature
LUNA 131 EIB/KNX
Combination sensor for brightness and temperature
Possible applications
The LU 131 EIB is suitable for the following applications:
• Multi-stage lighting control
• Temperature control such as the control of script-type
heaters in anti-freeze applications
• Control of awnings
• Conservatory control
• Greenhouse control
• Systems, in which brightness and outdoor-temperatures
have to be visualised
Description
The combi sensor LUNA 131 EIB/KNX detects brightness
and temperature. These values can be transmitted to the
bus. Moreover, the device is equipped with the following
threshold value switches for controlling switching,
dimming and blinds actuators as a function of the
surrounding brightness and/or temperature:
• 3 Universal channels
Temperature and brightness thresholds can be combined
as desired or used individually
• 1 Sun protection channel
When equipped with a sun protection function, the
selection options are blinds, shutters/textile sun protection
and Transmit value. The function serves for comfortable
control of sun protection without manual intervention.
• 1 brightness value => transmit cyclically or when changed
• 1 temperature value => cyclic or transmit when changed
In addition, one or more threshold value switches can be
deactivated temporarily via a disable object (1 bit)
Technical data:
Operating voltage: Bus voltage
Connections:
1 bus connection (by bus port terminal)
Measuring ranges
Brightness: 1...100,000 Lux
Temperature: –25 °C ... +55 °C
Degree of protection:
IP 54 in accordance with DIN EN 60529
Permissible ambient temperatur: –25 °C...+55 °C
Housing: 110 x 72 x 54 mm
Weight: approx. 140 g
Order No.
LUNA 131 EIB/KNX
131 9 201
Wall mounting
EIB/KNX
Brightness valuation sender
LUNA 133 EIB/KNX
Brightness value transmitter, can be combined in
particular with the Theben weather station
Description
• LUNA 133 measures the current brightness values and
transmits this value to the bus
• Brightness value is transmitted cyclically or when
changed
• Supply directly from the bus
New
Possible applications
When combined with the Theben weather station, the
brightness can be detected and taken into account on
several façades (up to 3). This makes it possible to adapt,
for example, shutters and blinds to different brightness
conditions of the building façades.
LUNA 133 EIB/KNX
Advantages
• Ideal for combination with the Theben weather station
• The device is connected directly to the bus, thus
requiring little wiring
• Very low-cost solution
Technical data:
Operating voltage: Bus voltage
Bus interface module: integrated
Brightness measuring range: 1–100,000 lux
Tolerance: ±20 % or ±5 lux
Power consumption: < 150 mW
Admissible ambient temperature:
–25 °C ... +55 °C
Type of protection: IP 54 according to DIN EN 60529
Housing: 110 x 72 x 54 mm
Weight: approx. 140 g
For the dimensional drawing, see page 30
Order No.
LUNA 133 EIB/KNX
133 9 200
121
Wall mounting
EIB/KNX
Weather station
Technical data:
Measuring range: –20 °C... +55 °C
Brightness range: 1–100,000 lux
Light recording angle: 150°
Operating voltage:
Bus voltage 230 V are required for the heater
Power consumption: ≤ 10 mA
Protection rating: IP 44 to EN 60529
Dimensions: 280 x 160 x 135 mm
New
Weather station EIB/KNX
Combination device for smaller industrial units and
for one- and two-family houses
Features
• Recording of wind, rain, brightness and temperature
• Highly sensitive rain sensor Moreover, it is possible to set
a delay time after the end of the rain, in order to avoid
unnecessary raising and lowering of blinds.
• Measurement variables can be directly transmitted to the
bus
• Wind, brightness, temperature are each transmitted as a
2 byte value, rain as a 1 bit value
• Optionally, wind can be transmitted in m/s or km/h
• Evaluation takes place directly in the device
• Supply from bus voltage and 230 V
• Brightness range: 1–100,000 lux
• Temperature range –20 °C ... +55 °C
• 4 universal channels
• 3 sun protection channels (especially for blinds and
shutters applications)
• Integrated bus coupler
• Heater for rain sensor integrated
• Automatic sun protection device for independent control
of blinds, awning, etc.
• The teach-in objects for the brightness thresholds are
user-friendly, since they allow the customer to establish
the thresholds later on by a simple key press. This does
not require the weather station to be re-parameterized.
• The automatic sun protection controls the blinds (shutters/awnings) independently during the day, without
making any intervention necessary. When a threshold is
reached, two separate telegrams can be sent, e. g.
for height and slat of a blind or a value and switch
telegram.
• Any parameterization of the various channels possible
Dimension drawing
Mast bracket Ø 60–80 mm
280
66
135
160
122
High sensitive rain sensor
Advantages
• Only one weather station in a housing that records all
variables and evaluates them.
• The device is connected directly to the bus, as a result of
which no other cables must be laid.
• Sun protection possible for up to three façades (ideal
combination with LUNA 133 EIB/KNX, see page 121)
Order No.
Weather station EIB/KNX
132 9 201
Mast bracket for
Ø 60 –80 mm
907 0 380
Ceiling mounting
EIB/KNX
Motion detector including constant light control
SPHINX 330
Motion detector for brightness- and motion-independent
control of lighting, especially in offices and hallways.
New
Features
• Motion detectors
• Master/Slave function
• Settings per ETS:
- Brightness range: 0–700 lux (including
correction factor of up to 5600 lux)
- Switch-off delay: 1 s–120 min
• Detection range: 7 m diameter (2.8 m mounting height)
• Very inconspicuous through flat mounting housing for the
ceiling
• Brightness setpoint value (lux value) is changed by object
• Functions: - Lighting On/Off
- Shutters/Blinds Up/Down
- Time functions (switch-off delay)
- Disable of the motion detector
- Scene call
- Dimming values, dimming Up/Down
- Master/Slave function
• Supply from bus voltage
SPHINX 330
Technical data:
Supply voltage (bus): 29 V
Current consumption (bus): < 10 mA
Mounting hole: Ø 64 mm
Front side: Ø 76 mm
Mounting height: approx. 5 mm
Mounting depth: 60 mm
Ambient temperature: –5 °C… +45 °C
Protection class: II
Possible applications
1-channel motion detector
incl. constant light control with BCU
• Lighting control motion-dependent only
• Lighting control motion- and brightness-dependent
• Constant light control permanent/motion-dependent
SPHINX 330
Detection range SPHINX 330 EIB/KNX
Advantages
• Very flat design (projecting 5 mm from ceiling), thus very
inconspicuous
• Low-cost solution for smaller detection areas
• Bus coupler integrated in the housing
Mounting frame snap-on fastener
Dimension drawings
4,6
2.8 m
7m
7m
Ø 76,0
59,2
Area of high sensitivity
Area of low sensitivity
Type
Detection area
2.8 m mounting height
Brightness range
Run-om time
Order No.
SPHINX 330 EIB/KNX
1 channel
Ø7m
0–700 Lux
1 s–120 min
107 9 210
123
Ceiling mounting
EIB/KNX
Presence detector
SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX and SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX
Presence detector for brightness- and motion-dependent
lighting control and for energy saving (light, heating), in
particular in offices and hallways
SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX
Sphinx 390 EIB/KNX
2-channel presence detector, incl. BCU
• Channel 1 lighting:
- Controls according to presence and brightness
- Switch-off delay 1 min-30 min can be set on the device
(per ETS 5s-8h)
• Channel 2 presence:
- Controls according to presence, for example heating,
ventilation, message
- Switch-off delay 0.5 min-60 min can be set on the
device (per ETS 5s-8h)
New
SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX
SPHINX 390/395
+ –
BUS EIB
SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX
Setting potentiometer for lighting/switch-off
delay: 1 min … 30 min
Brightness setting potentiometer: 5 … 1200 lx
Setting potentiometer for minimum dimming
value: 0 %–50 %
Optimum mounting height: between 2.5 m and 3.5 m
Detection range at 2.5 m: 13 m x 7 m
Detection range at 3.5 m: 18 m x 9 m
Ambient temperature: 0 °C to +45 °C (operation)
–10 °C to +60 °C (storage)
Type of protection control unit according to
DIN EN 60529: IP 40
Protection class control unit when mounted in
accordance with its designated use: II
For the mounting instructions and dimensional
drawing, see page 55/56
Connection of the detector head to BCU
Sphinx 395 EIB/KNX
1-channel presence detector incl. constant light control
with BCU, 2 operating modes (can be set on the device via
potentiometer):
• Operating mode 1 “on”:
Presence On/Off (without light control)
• Operating mode 2:
Presence and constant light control via lux value set on
the device or per ETS
Advantages
• Extremely large detection range, thus requiring few
devices for detecting large areas
• BCU already included in delivery
• Rotating lens allows individual adjustment to room
layout
Surface-mounted box for SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX,
SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX
• For surface mounting
• Color: white
• Dimensions: 70 x 42 mm
–
SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX
Setting potentiometer for lighting/switch-off
delay: 1 min … 30 min
Brightness setting potentiometer: 5 … 1200 lx
Setting potentiometer motion detection output:
30 s … 60 min
Dimensional drawing BCU
60 mm
New
Features
• Delivery including BCU
• Master/Slave function
• Manual settings per ETS:
- Brightness range: 5–1200 lux
- Switch-off delay
• Large detection range: 15.5 x 8 m (mounting height 3 m)
• Adaptation to room requirements through rotating lens
• Brightness setpoint value (lux value) is changed by long
key press (teach-in)
• Functions: - Lighting On/Off
- Shutters/Blinds Up/Down
- Time functions
- Heating control
- Forced control
- Scene call
- Dimming values
- Master/Slave function
Technical data:
Supply voltage: Bus 29 V
Device consumption: 12 mA
+
71 mm
SPHINX 390/ SPHINX 395
Type
Detection area
3.5 m Montagehöhe
Brightness range
Run-on time
output 1
Order No.
SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX
2 channel
18 m x 9 m
5–1200 lx
run-on time 1–30 min
5 s–8 h (per ETS)
107 9 200
SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX
1 channel
18 m x 9 m
5–1200 lx
run-on time 1–30 min
107 9 201
Surface-mounting box for SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX, SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX (white, dimensions: 70 x 42 mm)
124
907 0 385
Ceiling mounting
EIB/KNX
Presence detector
SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX
Description of the presence detector
a Setting potentiometer for
lighting/switch-off delay
s Brightness setting potentiometer
d Setting potentiometer motion detection output
f Detector lenses
g Brightness measuring sensor
h Control light
4
2
5
3
60
45
30s
30
test
15
1
3
6
5 min
10
1
2 30
On
15
4
5
lux
5
10
min
1
6
Brightness
Type of room
recommended
value
Recommended
setting on
potentiometer 2
5 Lux
100 Lux
200 Lux
300 Lux
500 Lux
800 Lux
1
2
3
4
5
6
–
hallway
hallway, toilet
PC-workstation
offices
classenrooms, lab
0 … 90°
2
1
3
SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX
Description of the presence detector
a Setting potentiometer for
lighting/switch-off delay
s Brightness setting potentiometer
d Setting potentiometer for minimum dimming value
f Detector lenses
g Brightness measuring sensor
h Control light
4
2
5
3
50%
40%
30%
test
auto 30
1
15
2
On
5
4
3
lux
10
20%
0%
mini
10%
1
5
min
1
Brightness
Type of room
recommended
value
Recommended
setting on
potentiometer 2
50 Lux
200 Lux
300 Lux
500 Lux
800 Lux
2
3
4
5
6
hallway
hallway, toilet
PC-workstation
offices
classenrooms, lab
6
0 … 90°
2
1
3
Detection areas SPHINX 390 EIB/KNX, SPHINX 395 EIB/KNX
Y
X
Area of presence
h
Y
Y
X
h
2.5 m
3m
3.5 m
X
13
15.5
18
Y
7
8
9
X
Passageway
Passageway
125
Wall mounting
EIB/KNX
Secondary clocks/One-sided wall clocks
OSIRIA 220 EIB/KNX
OSIRIA 230/240 EIB/KNX
OSIRIA 230/240 EIB/KNX
One-sided wall clocks
• EIB inner clock, round
• Impact-resistant plastic housing, matt border
• Flat impact-protected plexiglas
• Dial Ø 250 mm
• White metallic dial with black Arabic numbers
or DIN bar digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41091
• Black DIN bar hand for hour and minute display,
red seconds hand
• Housing dimensions: Ø 265 mm, housing depth 60 mm
One-sided wall clocks
• EIB inner clock, round
• Impact-resistant plastic housing, matt border
• Flat impact-protected plexiglas
• Dial Ø 300 mm or 400 mm
• White metallic dial with black Arabic numbers
or fine-line digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41091
• Black DIN bar hand for hour and minute display,
red seconds hand
• Housing dimensions: Ø 315 mm, housing depth 60 mm
Ø 415 mm, housing depth 64 mm
One-sided wall clocks
• EIB inner clock, square
• Impact-resistant plastic housing, matt border
• Flat impact-protected plexiglas
• Dial 300 mm x 300 mm or 400 mm x 400 mm
• White metallic dial with black Arabic numbers
or fine-line digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41091
• Black DIN bar hand for hour and minute display,
red seconds hand
• Housing dimensions:325 x 325 mm, housing depth 60 mm
425 x 425 mm, housing depth 64 mm
OSIRIA 231 EIB/KNX
OSIRIA 241 EIB/KNX
One-sided wall clocks
• EIB inner clock, round
• Metal housing with high-quality chromium-plating
• Arched low-dazzling mineral glass
• Dial Ø 300 mm
• White metallic dial with black Arabic numbers
or DIN bar digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41091
• Black DIN bar hand for hour and minute display,
red seconds hand
• Housing dimensions: Ø 300 mm, housing depth 65 mm
One-sided wall clocks
• EIB inner clock, round
• Metal housing with high-quality chromium-plating
• Arched impact-protected plexiglas
• Dial Ø 400 mm
• White metallic dial with black Arabic numbers
or DIN bar digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41091
• Black DIN bar hand for hour and minute display,
red seconds hand
• Housing dimensions: Ø 400 mm, housing depth 72 mm
Type
Clock face
diameter
Housing
dimensions
OSIRIA 220
AR EIB/KNX
Ø 250 mm
Ø 265 mm
Arabic numbers
500 9 200 OSIRIA 231 Ø 300 mm
Depth: 60 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
BR EIB/KNX
Ø 300 mm
DIN bar digits
500 9 221
Depth: 65 mm chromium-plated metal housing
OSIRIA 220
BR EIB/KNX
Ø 250 mm
Ø 265 mm
DIN bar digits
500 9 201 OSIRIA 241 Ø 400 mm
Depth: 60 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
AR EIB/KNX
Ø 400 mm
Arabic numbers
500 9 240
Depth: 72 mm chromium-plated metal housing
OSIRIA 230
AR EIB/KNX
Ø 300 mm
Ø 315 mm
Arabic numbers
500 9 210 OSIRIA 241 Ø 400 mm
Depth: 60 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
BR EIB/KNX
Ø 400 mm
DIN bar digits
500 9 241
Depth: 72 mm chromium-plated metal housing
OSIRIA 230
SR EIB/KNX
Ø 300 mm
Ø 315 mm
Fine-line digits
500 9 211 OSIRIA 230 300 x 300 mm 325 x 325 mm Arabic numbers
500 9 212
Depth: 60 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
AQ EIB/KNX
Depth: 60 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
OSIRIA 240
AR EIB/KNX
Ø 400 mm
Ø 415 mm
Arabic numbers
500 9 230 OSIRIA 230 300 x 300 mm 325 x 325 mm Fine-line digits
500 9 213
Depth: 64 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
SQ EIB/KNX
Depth: 60 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
OSIRIA 240
SR EIB/KNX
Ø 400 mm
Ø 415 mm
Fine-line digits
500 9 231 OSIRIA 240 400 x 400 mm 425 x 425 mm Arabic numbers
500 9 232
Depth: 64 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
AQ EIB/KNX
Depth: 64 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
OSIRIA 231
AR EIB/KNX
Ø 300 mm
Ø 300 mm
Arabic numbers
500 9 220 OSIRIA 240 400 x 400 mm 425 x 425 mm Fine-line digits
500 9 233
Depth: 65 mm chromium-plated metal housing
SQ EIB/KNX
Depth: 64 mm Impact-resistant plastic housing
126
Description
Order No. Type
Clock face
diameter
The following applies to each clock:
• Power reserve of 10 days in case of bus voltage failure
Housing
dimensions
Description
Order No.
Wall mounting/Flush mounting
EIB/KNX
Secondary clocks/ Digital calendar clocks
OSIRIA 242 EIB/KNX
OSIRIA 280 B EIB/KNX
Double-sided wall clocks
• EIB inner clock, round
• with wall or ceiling fixture (150 mm)
• Very stable metal housing painted white (RAL 9016) for
high stress
• Impact-protected plexiglas on both sides
• Dial Ø 400 mm
• White dials with black Arabic numbers or fine-line digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41091
• Black bar hand for hour and minute display,
red seconds hand
• Housing dimensions: Ø 420 mm, housing depth 116 mm
OSIRIA 281 B EIB/KNX
Digital calendar clock
• Analog clock with 1-line 9-segment LCD digital display
• Extra-flat metal housing
(W/H/D 500 x 510 x 40 mm), silver metallic coated
• Analog-mechanical time display
• Dial Ø 280 mm
• Freely moving black bar hands,
red seconds hand
• No front glass
• Date digit height 50 mm
• Legible up to approx. 20 m
• Optional temperature display alternating with the date
OSIRIA 251 BQ EIB/KNX
OSIRIA 232 BQ EIB/KNX
Ball-throw-proof wall clocks
for example for gymnasiums, schools, etc.
• EIB inner clock, square (400 mm x 400 mm)
• One-sided, very stable metal housing painted white
(RAL 9016) for high stress
• Composite safety glass
• 3-point fastening that will not disengage
• White metallic dial with black DIN bar digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41 091
• Black bar hand for hour and minute display, red seconds
hand
• Ball-throw-proof! (FMPTA Test certificate according to
DIN 18 032 Part3 available)
Built-in wall clocks
Flush-mounted built-in analog clock (for OP rooms)
• Housing frame flush with tiles or wall (W/H/D) 301 x
301 x 60 mm) made of V4A stainless steel for wall
mounting (flush-mounted)
• Resistant to acids, cleaning agents and disinfectants, in
the mounted state protected from dust and water
according to protection type IP 54 (DIN 40 050)
• Flat mineral glass 3 mm
• White metallic dial with black DIN bar digits
• Dial print according to DIN 41 091
• Black DIN bar hand for hour and minute display, red
seconds hand
Double-sided wall clocks
Digital calendar clock
• LCD analog clock with date (LCD dial Ø 250 mm)
• Extra-flat metal housing
(W/H/D 485 x 510 x 35 mm), silver metallic coated
• Time display of the analog clock based on
LCD bar digits and LCD hands
• Display of hour and minute
• Seconds display ring, counting upwards or downwards,
or stationary as minute display
• 1-line 9-segment LCD display, 6-digit, optionally 2-digit
stationary weekday abbreviation
• Digit height 54 mm, legible up to approx. 20 m
• Optional temperature display alternating with the date
The following applies to each clock:
• Power reserve of 10 days in case of bus voltage failure
Digital calendar clocks
Type
Clock face
diameter
Housing
dimensions
Description
OSIRIA 242
AR EIB/KNX
Ø 400 mm
Ø 420 mm
Arabic numbers
Depth: 116 mm Metal housing painted white
500 9 250 OSIRIA 280 Ø 280 mm
B EIB/KNX
500 x 510 mm Bar digits,
Tiefe: 40 mm Date digit height 50 mm
500 9 280
OSIRIA 242
SR EIB/KNX
Ø 400 mm
Ø 420 mm
Fine-line digits
Depth: 116 mm Metal housing painted white
500 9 251 OSIRIA 281 Ø 250 mm
B EIB/KNX
485 x 510 mm Bar digits,
Tiefe: 35 mm Date digit height 54 mm
500 9 282
Ball-throw-proof wall clocks
OSIRIA 251
BQ EIB/KNX
400 x 400 mm DIN bar digits
Depth: 100 mm Metal housing painted white
Order No. Type
Clock face
diameter
Housing
dimensions
Description
Order No.
Built-in wall clock for OP rooms
500 9 252 OSIRIA 232 250 x 250 mm 301 x 301 mm DIN bar digits
BQ EIB/KNX
Depth: 60 mm stainless steel housing
500 9 223
127
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
Interface
Interface RS 232 EIB/KNX
• The device can be used to parameterise an
EIB installation.
• It enables a PC to be coupled to the EIB, so that the
installation can be configured, parameters and started
using ETS (EIB Tool Software).
• The bus is connected via bus connection terminals on
the front panel. The PC is connected via 9-pole sub-D
socket and standard RS 232 connecting cable on the
front panel and/or terminal screw.
Interface RS 232 EIB/KNX
New
Technical data:
Power supply: Bus
Interface: RS 232 and/or USB
Operating temperature range: –5 °C to +45 °C
Protection rating: IP 20 to EN 60 529
Housing: 90 x 35 x 64 mm
Interface USB EIB/KNX
• The USB interface allows communication between the PC
and the EIB system to be programmed. The EIB LED and
the USB LED display the data transmission. The USB
interface can be used as of ETS3 V1.0.
Interface USB EIB/KNX
Order No.
Interface RS 232 EIB/KNX
Interface USB EIB/KNX
907 0 363
907 0 397
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
Line coupler
EIB/KNX line coupler
• The line coupler is used to connect EIB/KNX lines or areas
in larger installations. These lines/areas are separated
galvanically from one another. At the same time,
telegrams can be filtered, in order to reduce telegram
traffic in a line. The line coupler has bus connection
terminals for main line and secondary line. Within a line,
the line coupler can also be used as line booster
(repeater).
New
Line coupler EIB/KNX
Technical data:
Power supply: Bus
Operating voltage: Primary/Secondary line 24 V DC
(21 ... 31 V DC)
Temperature range:
–5 °C ... +45 °C (operation)
–25 °C ... +55 °C (transport/storage) at a relative
humidity (non-condensed) of 5 % ... 93 %
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60259
Protection class: III
Connection
It is electrically connected via the bus connection
terminals.
Order No.
Line coupler EIB/KNX
128
907 0 398
Din rail program
EIB/KNX
Power supply
640 mA EIB power supply
320 mA EIB power supply
Power supply 640 mA
The EIB supply voltage generates and monitors the EIB
system voltage. The integrated throttle valve decouples
the bus line from the EIB supply voltage.
The connection to the EIB is made by a bus connection
terminal.
When the reset key is pressed, a reset is triggered for 20
seconds regardless of how long the key remains held
down. The bus line is enabled and the bus participants on
this line are reset to the basic status.
If a longer reset is required, the bus connection terminal
must be removed from the supply voltage. A 30 V DC
auxiliary voltage is applied via an additional connection
terminal.
Power supply 320 mA
The 320 mA voltage supply generates and monitors the EIB
system voltage. Via the BUS output, it supplies a bus line
with max. 32 EIB/KNX devices without any additional EIB
reactance. The 30 V DC output is without reactance and
allows a further line (e. g. main line) and a line coupler to be
supplied by means of a separate EIB reactance, to be
installed separately. Alternatively, this output can be used
for the supply of further functional devices (e. g. auxiliary
voltage for binary inputs).
The load can be distributed to the outputs as desired, but
the total rated current must not be exceeded. The mounting
of the REG is done on a 35 mm mounting rail.
• Connection of the bus lines via EIB terminals, no data bus
being required
• Switch for resetting the bus line
• Colored LED for displaying operation, overload,
overvoltage and reset
Technical data of the 640 mA power supply:
Power supply: 230 V AC, 50…60 Hz
Voltage range: 195…255 V AC, 45…65 Hz
Power consumption: max. 45 VA
Power dissipation: max. 6 W
Outputs:
EIB output: 1 line with integrated reactance
EIB rated voltage: 30 V DC, ± 2 V, SELV
Auxiliary voltage output: 1 (without reactance)
Auxiliary voltage rated value: 30 V DC, ± 2 V, SELV
Rated current (total): 640 mA, short-circuit proof (sum
of EIB and 30 V outputs)
Sustained short-circuit current: max. 1.4 A
Mains failure ride-through time: min. 200 ms
Operating temperature range: –5 °C to +45 °C
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60529
Dimensions: 90 x 108 x 64 mm
Technical data of the 320 mA power supply:
Rated AC voltage: 161–264 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Output BUS (with reactance)
Voltage: 28–31 V DC
Max. bus line length: 350 per output with reactance
30 V DC output (without reactance):
Voltage: 28–31 V DC
Rated current: max. 320 mA for both outputs (11+12),
to be divided as desired, permanently short-circuit-proof
Admissible ambient temperature: –5 °C to +45 °C
Type of protection: IP 20 according to EN 60529
Installation width: 72 mm (4 TE)
Order No.
Power supply 640 mA
Power supply 320 mA
907 0 364
907 0 374
129
Panel mounting
Timer modules without plug-in base, connection by 4.8 mm AMP flat plug
for original installation standard devices with various modifications
j
7d 24 h
If using/replacing in existing system, please
indicate precise modification
Replacement devices for heating controllers,
please enquire at the dealer
or contact our Service Hotline
SYNCHRONA 164.../SULEIKA 184...
-IN
WITHOUT PLUG
BASE
TR 684/1... top
-IN
WITHOUT PLUG
BASE
Dimension drawings
SYNCHRONA 164.../SULEIKA 184...
• Devices for original installations
• Timers with or without power reserve
• 1 or 2 separate switchover contacts
• Switchable for daily and weekly program
(Patent No. DE 3708611 C1)
• ON/OFF switching pre-selection for premature switching
without influencing the subsequent program sequence
on 1-channel devices
• ON/OFF permanent switch, e.g. for holidays,
1-channel devices
• Switching status display
• Time pointer resetable for summer/winter time adjustment on 1-channel devices
Complete device for front panel installation with
mounting brackets, terminal screws, contact
protection and plug-in base
see page 14–17.
TERMINA 684/1... top
TERMINA 684/2... top TERMINA ®
• Daily/weekly program
• Operator guidance through integrated text line
in the LCD
• Programming displayed graphically by a bar arrangement in the LCD
• Factory-set time (CET) and automatic summer/winter
changeover
• Summer/winter time changeover can be disabled or
freely selected
(GB, USA changeover rule also selectable)
• High number of memory locations
• Guided copying of switching times to other weekdays
(free block formation)
• Switching times sorted in memory according to
weekdays
• Switching pre-selection
• Permanent switching (permanent)
• Lithium cells and EEPROM
• PIN coding
Complete device for front panel installation with
plug-in base, contact protection, terminal screws,
mounting bracket, see page 31.
Mounting
Connection with 4.8 mm flat plug
PCB installation with accessories: Multiple contact strip
(for soldering to PCB), Order No. 907 5 141
130
Design:
• Front frame 69 x 69 mm, installation depth 21 mm
• Installation cutout 66 x 66 mm
• Control panel installation with tensioning brackets.
Connection either with flat plugs (4.8 mm) or additional
multiple contact strip.
• Transparent cover (external dimension 72 x 72 mm)
Digital modules
Timer modules without power supply unit for installation in regulation and control
TERMINA 671 top TERMINA ®
TERMINA 672 top TERMINA ®
Especially for industrial use
or for first equipment series devices
TR 671 top/672 top
Function:
• 1 channel or 2 channels
• 42 memory locations
• Week program
• Step by step operator guidance by textline in the LCD
display (see page 27)
• Guided copying of the switching times to other week
days (free block formation)
• Programming is shown graphically by means of a bar
chart in the LCD display
• Holiday program pulse and cycle program
• Operating voltage 3 VDC
• LCD display
• Output: 1 x NPN/2 x NPN
• Summer-/winter time changeover can alternatively
switched off or freely programmed
(additionally GB, USA rule can be chosen)
• Sorting of the switching times in the memory according
to weekdays
• Switching pre-selection
• Permanent switching (permanent)
• Program saving by EEPROM
• PIN encoding
7d 24 h ±1h
auto
Common technical data:
• Button switch mode preselection for premature manual
switching on or off without influencing the subsequent
automatic program sequence.
• Permanent ON/OFF switch
• Reset switch
• Quartz time base
Accuracy: ± 1 s/day up to 25 °C
Power reserve: by lithium cell, NiCd cell or Goldcup
Permissible ambient temperature: –10 ° C...+50 ° C
Display: LCD display (time, day of week,
holiday program, switching status and
manual switching).
Complete units with power supply unit see page 22.
With automatic summertime/wintertime change,
EEPROM and random switching, optionally basic
program
600 am –1000 pm
Larger quantities upon request.
Packaging/ordering unit 50 units
131
Appendix
Meaning of the pictograms
Analog time switch device
☎
Connection for telephone remote switch
Digital time switch device
10–30 °C
Temperature control range
Daily program
holidays
Holiday program
7d
Weekly program
Optimization
Optimizing function for temperature control
60 min
1-hour short-time program
Floor heater control
Automatic summertime/wintertime
Controller with radio control
User guidance by means of text in display
OpenTherm bus device
Pulse program
Weather-compensated control
j
24 h
±1h
auto
I
pulse
II
Cycle program
cycle
PC programming interface
PC
S
P
R, L, C
TM 345 M
Stairway-light time switch
7
4
8 9
3 2
10
Universal dimmer
Time range
AC/DC 12–240 V Multi-voltage power supply unit
6
5
Simulation central functions, Central ON/Scene,
Central OFF, panic function
Blinds, shutter, and awning control
Time relay
0,1 s–100 h
Defrosting time switch
f
Multi-function device
1
Input
8–240 V AC/DC
Multi-voltage input
3600 W
Zero voltage circuit
M
Motor control
Switch-off pre-warning according to DIN 18 015-2
!
m/s
ϑ
Wind sensor
Rain sensor
Temperature monitoring
Twilight switch and
sun protection control
Switch-off pre-warning
Percentage output
2–100 Lux
Brightness setting range
Lux Digital
Digital switching point adjustment
Schmitt trigger
Twilight switch/
Lighting control
Logical functions
Astro
30 mA
Astronomic switching function
EIB/KNX
EIB products
Socket devices
Suitable products for the
ETS 3 starter software
Personal protective plug
EIB/KNX devices that can be plugged
into each other
6 kV
Overvoltage protective switch
99,999 h
Runtime meter
Room temperature control
132
%
DCF77
t
1h
DCF77 radio synchronization
DIP switch
Presence detection
Appendix
Terminology
Lowering temperature
Reduced room temperature at night or during absence resulting in saving
energy. Recommended temperature e. g. 16 °C.
Opening widths of contacts
Switching contacts are distinguished by having a contact distance of less or
greater than 3 mm.
Connection type
Type of contact of the connecting lines on the device.
Program
Time-dependent functional sequence as a function of specified commands.
Working point and thermal feedback can be set
For unfavorable mounting sites of room temperature controls, e. g. on
an outer wall, the working point of the device can be changed.
The thermal feedback prevents rooms from being overheated.
For heating systems of particularly quick or slow reaction, adjustments can be
made.
Pulse width modulation or hysteresis control
Temperature controls with pulse width modulation are switched cyclically and
vary with respect to the duty cycle. The cycle is adjustable. Hysteresis controls
are switched when a value exceeds or drops below the set hysteresis temperature band.
Operating voltage
Rated voltage and frequency required for operating the device. Its safe functioning is guaranteed within the stated tolerance range.
Device consumption
Power consumption required for operating the device - excluding the switching
power.
Noise suppression measures
Despite internal protective measures, it may happen that extremely strong
interference can in rare cases cause a fault in the microprocessor-controlled
time switches. The interfering effects can be prevented if the following points
are observed during installation:
• Do mount the devices in the immediate proximity of inductive consumers.
• Lay separate lines for mains voltage supply and use line filters, if required.
• Inductive consumers interfere via the varistor or RC link.
Anti-freeze protection
Operating mode of room temperature controls protecting the heating and water
system from frost damage, e. g. +8 °C.
Power reserve
In case of power failure, the built-in power supply will keep the clock running
for the duration of the power reserve. This makes it unnecessary to reset the
clock. The power reserve given refers to a new device and an ambient temperature of 20°C. However, the power reserve will decrease as a function of the
service life and the temperature.
Hand switch
The priority switch switches the output “Permanently ON”, “Permanently OFF”
or to “Auto” for automatic time control. “Perm” means permanent switching
by hand in the case of mechanical time switches.
Channels
Number of switching outputs/inputs of time switches, twilight switches, controls
and actuators.
Count display
Optic function control of mechanical time switches.
Switching capacity
Is the max. allowed load of the switching contacts in Ampere at the specified
rated voltage with resistive load. The value in parentheses indicates allowed
inductive load at cos ϕ 0.6 (e. g. motor load). The addition AX indicates the
allowed fluorescent lamp load.
Switching preselection
Manual change of the switching status limited in time by executing the next
switching command ahead of time. For example, OFF is switched to ON by
manual switching until the next OFF command of the time program appears.
After that, the automatic time program will continue.
Protection class
Depending on their requirement, devices must meet different protection classes
against accidental touching of live parts and against too high a contact voltage.
• Protection class I:
All metal parts that may be touched in operation or during maintenance are
connected to the protective earth-terminal.
• Protection class II:
The devices are additionally provided with double or reinforced insulation and
have no protective earth-terminal.
• Protection class III:
The devices have been designed for operation with safety extra low voltage
and do not have outer or inner circuits that work with other voltages.
Memory locations
They are used for saving switching times consisting of information on weekday
(possibly date), switching time and switching status.
EEPROM memories are non-volatile memories and keep the information for up
to 10 years even without power supply.
3- or 4-wire circuit
In stairway-light time switches, the 3- or 4-wire riser cable from floor to floor is
customary for buttons and lamps.
Admissible ambient temperature
Temperature range in which the device will work reliably, e. g. permanent
ambient temperature.
Counting range
Maximum directly read runtime
Lamp loads
Energy saving lamps and sodium discharge and mercury discharge lamps
represent a particularly high load on the output contacts due to their high
switch-on currents. In each case, it must be checked whether an isolation relay
or contactor is required.
Full power reserve
If the power reserve is supplied by an accumulator, the power reserve will only
be fully available after a certain charging time.
133
Appendix
Quotation and bid texts
Installation devices
Design
Switching cycle Output
Housing (mm)
24 hours
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 60
7 days
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 60
24 hours
1 channel
45 x 54
depth 60
60 minutes
1 channel
45 x 54
depth 60
24 hours
1 channel
45 x 54
depth 60
7 days
2 channels
45 x 54
depth 60
24 hours
1 channel
45 x 54
depth 60
+ 7 days
2 channels
45 x 54
depth 60
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 60
with pulse program, cycle program and
radio-controlled DCF77
(depending on design)
24 hours
+ 7 days
+ pulse
+ cycle
1 channel
2 channels
45 x 35
depth 60
with pulse program
24 hours
+ 7 days
+ pulse
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
45 x 54
depth 60
24 hours
+ 7 days
+ year
+ pulse
4 channels
45 x 105
depth 60
Time switches
for distribution panel installation
on 35 mm mounting rail*
Digital time switches
for distribution panel installation*
programmable with PC
and radio-control DCF77
Presence detector
for ceiling mounting
* Surface mounting with additional kit or front panel installation see page 31/38.
134
–
1 channel
Ø 120
height 31
–
2 channels
Ø 120
height 31
–
1 channels
constant
light control
Ø 120
height 31
Analog devices without power reserve
Analog devices with power reserve
Panel-mounted time switch without power reserve, 24 h program,
minimum switching time 30 min, permanent switching, 1 contact,
16 A, 250 V~ Type SYN 160 a
Panel-mounted time switch with 3 d power reserve,
24 h program, minimum switching time 30 min, permanent
switching, 1 contact, 16 A, 250 V~ Type SUL 180 a
Digital devices with power reserve
Panel-mounted time switch with 3 d power reserve,
7 day program, minimum switching time 2 h, permanent
switching, 1 contact, 16 A, 250 V~ Type MEM 190 a
Panel-mounted time switch without power reserve, 24 h program,
minimum switching time 30 min, permanent switching, 1 contact,
16 A, 250 V~ Type SYN 161 h
Panel-mounted time switch with 3 d power reserve,
24 h program, minimum switching time 30 min, permanent
switching, 1 contact, 16 A, 250 V~ Type SUL 181 h
Panel-mounted time switch without power reserve, 60 min
program, minimum switching time approx. 2 min, 1 contact,
10 A, 250 V~ Type TM 178 h
Panel-mounted time switch without power reserve,24 h program,
minimum switching time 30 min, permanent switching, 1 contact,
16 A, 250 V~ Type SYN 168 h
Panel-mounted time switch with 3 d power reserve,
24 h program, minimum switching time 30 min, permanent
switching, 1 contact, 16 A, 250 V~ Type SUL 188 h
Panel-mounted time switch with 3 d power reserve,
24 h program, minimum switching time 30 min, 2 contacts,
10 A, 250 V~ Type SUL 188 g
Panel-mounted time switch with 3 d power reserve,
7 day program, minimum switching time 4 h, permanent
switching, 1 contact, 16 A, 250 V~ Type MEM 198 h
Panel-mounted time switch with 3 d power reserve, 24 h + 7 day
program, minimum switching time 45 min/12 h, 2 contacts, 10 A,
250 V~ Type SUL 188 hw
Digital-Switching time with text line on the LCD display, week
programm, 28 memory locations, shortest switching time 1 min,
automatica summer/winter time, Power reserve 1 year,
ON/OFF/AUTO switching, over-ride switching, 1 channel, 16 A
250 V~, Type TR 608 top
Digital time switch with operator guidance in clear text, factory
preset time, interface for OBELISK top2 memory card, automatic
summer/winter time adjustment, 10 year power reserve, day and
week program, date-controlled holiday program, PIN encoding,
zero cross switching,
56 memory locations, 1 channel, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 610 top2
56 memory locations, 2 channels, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 612 top2
date-controlled holiday program, random, cycle and pulse
program, external control input, memory card
84 memory locations, 1 channel, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 611 top2
84 memory locations, 1 channel, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 611 top2 RC
84 memory locations, 2 channels, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 622 top2
Digital time switch with snap-on fixing, 8 years power reserve,
day, week and pulse program 1–59 s, 140 memory locations,
automatic summer/winter time, holiday setting 1–45 days,
1 x switch program, over-ride switching, permanent switching
1 channel, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 651 S
2 channels, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 652 S
3 channels, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 653 S
Digital yearly time switches with snap-on fixing, 1.5 year power
reserve, day, week, date and pulse program, 324 memory
locations, automatic summer/winter time adjustment, with date
correction for national holidays in succeeding year, 1 x switching
program, permanent switching ON/OFF/AUTO, early override
switching, random switching, programming at PC with programming set OBELISK, program simulation
1 channel 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 641 S
1 channel 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 641 S DCF, power supply
unit, DCF 77 antenna
2 channels 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 642 S
2 channels 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 642 S DCF, power supply
unit, DCF 77 antenna
4 channels 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 644 S
4 channels 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 644 S DCF, power supply
unit, DCF 77 antenna
Presence detector with 360° detection range for ceiling
mounting, 1-channel, detector head 90° rotating,
2 detector lenses, rectangular detection range of
18 x 9 m at a mounting height of 3.5 m, surface mounting with
Presence detector with 360° detection range for ceiling
mounting, 2 channels, 1 channel for lighting control as a function
of brightness and presence, channel 2 for heating/fan control
independently of brightness, detector head 90° rotating, 2
detector lenses, rectangular detection range of 18 x 9 m at a
mounting height of 3.5 m, surface mounting with optional
optional surface-mounting box possible, brightness range
adjustable from 5–1200 lux, run-on time adjustable from 1 to 30
min, test function, pulse function for controlling stairway-light
time switches, master/slave operation possible with SPHINX 382
surface-mounting box possible, brightness range adjustable from
5–1200 lux, run-on time of channel 1 adjustable from 1 to 30
min, channel 2 offers two different operating modes (heating
control, fan control), run-on time of channel 2 adjustable from 30
s to 60 min, switch-on delay of channel 2 adjustable from 30 s to
15 min, test function, master/slave mode possible with SPHINX
and SPHINX 385, switching capacity (NO contact)16 (8) A/230
V~, Type SPHINX 380
Presence detector with 360° detection range for ceiling
mounting, 1-10 V output for activation of dimmers or fluorescent
lamps with electronic ballast unit, detector head 90° rotating, 2
detector lenses, rectangular detection range of 18 x 9 m at a
mounting height of 3.5 m, surface mounting with optional
surface-mounting box possible, brightness range adjustable from
5–1200 lux, run-on time adjustable from 1 to 30 min, three
different operating modes (without constant lighting control,
constant lighting control with specified dimming value), test
function, master/slave mode possible with SPHINX 380, button
input for state reversal and for manual dimming, switching
capacity (1-10 V output): 50 mA, switching capacity relay output
(NO contact): 10 A/230 V~, Type SPHINX 385
380, button input for state reversal, switching capacity channel 1
(NO contact): 16 (8) A/230 V~, switching capacity channel 2
(NO contact, potential-free): 2A/230V~,Type SPHINX 382
135
Appendix
Quotation and bid texts
Installation devices
Design
Twilight switch
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
Twilight switch
with 2 channels/with digital time switch
Twilight switch
for wall mounting or mast installation
Stairway lighting time switch
for flush mounting
Staircase lighting time switch
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
Programmable logic controller
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
Function
Output
Housing (mm)
setting range
2–100 Lux
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 60
setting range
2–200 Lux
1 channel
45 x 35
depth 60
setting range
2–2000 Lux
1 channel
45 x 54
depth 60
setting range
2–7500 Lux
1 channel/
2 channels
45 x 70
depth 60
setting range
2–200 Lux
1 channel
85 x 119
depth 50
setting range
2–2000 Lux
1 channel
85 x 119
depth 50
0.5–20 min
1 channel
52 x 48
depth 24
0.5–20 min
60 min
1 channel
52 x 48
depth 24
time range
1–7 min
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 64
time range
0.5–20 min
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 64
time range
0.5–20 min
60 min
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 64
24 h
+ 7 days
+ year
2/4 channels
45 x 71.2
depth 57
24 h
+ 7 days
+ year
8 channels
45 x 125
depth 57
24 h
+ 7 days
+ year
6 channels
90 x 124.6
depth 52
24 h
+ 7 days
+ year
9 channels
90 x 124.6
depth 52
Operating hour counter
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
count range
99999.9 h
–
45 x 35
depth 60
Time lag relay
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
time range
0.1 s–100 h
1 channel
45 x 17.5
depth 60
* Surface mounting with additional kit or front panel installation see page 31/38.
136
Analog devices without power reserve
Analog devices with power reserve
Digital devices with power reserve
Panel-mounted twilight switch, separate light sensor
(IP 54) with wall mount, brightness range: 2–100 lux,
on/off delay 40 s, 1 contact, 10 A, 250 V~, Type LU 108
Panel-mounted twilight switch, separate light sensor
(IP 54) with wall mount, brightness range: 2–200 lux,
on/off delay 40 s, 1 contact, 10 A, 250 V~, Type LU 110
Panel-mounted twilight switch, separate light sensor
(IP 54) with wall mount, 2 brightness ranges,
I: 2–35 lux, II: 35 – 2000 lux,
on/off delay 80 s, 1 contact, 10 A, 250 V~, Type LU 112
Twilight switch same as LU 112, but combined with digital time
switch (TR 610 top), day-/weekprogramm, single pole, 10 A,
250 V~, Type LU 118 top, but with seperat time switch output
(TR 612 top) Type LU 119 top
2 channels twilight switch, separate light sensor
(IP 54) with wall mount, 2 brightness ranges,
I: 2–150 lux, II: 150–7500 lux,
on/off delay 60 s, 2 contacts, 10 A, 250 V~, Type LU 113
Wall mounting Twilight switch, IP 55, brightness
range: 5–200 Lux, LED, switching delay 40 s, single pole, 10 A,
230 V~, Type LU 126 star
Wall mounting Twilight switch, IP 55, brightness
range: 2–200 Lux, LED, switching delay
2–100 s, test-button, single pole, 16 A, 230 V~,
Type LU 127 star
Wall mounting Twilight switch, IP 55, brightness
range: 2–2000 Lux, LED, switching delay ON/OFF 2–100 s,
test-button, single pole, 16 A, 230 V~,
Type LU 128 star
Flush-mounted stairway-light time switch,
housing 52 x 48 x 24 mm, time range 0.5–20 min, resettable, 3and 4-wire connection, crossover circuit, max. 30 mA incandescent lamp load with electronic overload protection,
1 NO contact 10 (6) A/230 V~, Type ELPA 047
Flush-mounted stairway-light time switch with 12 functions,
housing 52 x 48 x 24 mm, time range 0.5–20 min, selectable via
DIP switch button or switch connection, resettable or deactivatable ahead of time, connectable and disconnectable switch-off
pre-warning (DIN 18015-2), connectable and disconnectable
long-term range 60 min, 3- and 4-wire connection, crossover
circuit, max. 30 mA incandescent lamp load with electronic
overload protection, additional button input galvanically
separated for intercoms, AC/DC 8...230 V,
1 NO contact 10 (6) A/230 V~, Type ELPA 041
Digital twilight switch with integrated timing function, IP 55,
brightness range: 2–200 Lux, LED, variable ON/OFF delay
settings of 10 min, digital ON/OFF delay times, automatic
switchover to and from daylight savings time, test-button,
power reserve 1.5 years, single pole, 16 A, 230 V~,
Type LU 129 star-time
Panel-mounted staircase lighting time switch, time range
1–7 minutes, can be connected subsequently, switch for 3 or 4
wire connection, permanent light switch, 16 A, 230 V~,
Type ELPA 8
Panel-mounted staircase lighting time switch, electron., time
range 0.5–20 min, can be connected subsequently, for 3 or 4
wire connection, 16 A, 230 V~, Type ELPA 7
add. contact, electr. isolated for AC/DC 8...230 V, Type ELPA 3
Panel-mounted stairway-light time switch with 10 functions,
time-range 0.5–20 min resettable, switch-off pre-warning (DIN
18015-2), long-term range 60 min, 3-/4-wire connection, contact
max. 150 mA incandescent lamp load with electronic overload
Panel-mounted operating hour counter, counting mechanism up
to 99 999.9 hours, operating voltage 230 V~/50 Hz,
Type BZ 145
protection, 16 (16) A/250 V~, Type ELPA 6
add. contact, electr. isolated for AC/DC 8...240 V, Type ELPA 1
Programmable logic controller, 22 function modules, 4 line
display, value display , 1500 byte memory, 20 day power reserve,
4 digital inputs, 2 outputs, 8 A/250 V~, Type Pharao 6,
6 digital inputs, 4 outputs, 8 A/250 V~, Type Pharao 10
as above, operating voltage 24 V DC, 6 inputs , optional analog
(0–10 V) or digital (24 V), 4 outputs, 8 A/250 V~,
Type Pharao 11
Programmable logic controller, 22 function modules, 4 line
display, value display, 1500 byte memory, 20 day power reserve,
12 digital inputs, 8 outputs, 8 A/250 V~, Type Pharao 20
as above, operating voltage 24 V DC, 8 inputs analog (0–10 V),
4 digital (24 V), 8 outputs, 8 A/250 V~, Type Pharao 21
Programmable logic controller, 35 function modules, 4 line
display, value display, 5000 byte memory, 20 day power reserve,
8 digital inputs, 6 Ausgänge, 8 A/250 V~, Type Pharao II-14
as above, operating voltage 24 V DC, 8 digital/analog (0–10 V)
inputs, 6 outputs, 8 A/250 V~, Type Pharao-II 15
Programmable logic controller, 35 function modules, 4 line
display, value display, 5000 byte memory, 20 day power reserve,
15 digital inputs, 9 outputs, 4 x 8 A/250 V~, 5 x 2 A/250 V~,
Type Pharao II-24
as above, operating voltage 24 V DC, 15 inputs digital or analog
(0–10 V), 7 digital (24 V), 9 outputs, 4 x 8 A/250 V~,
5 x 2 A/250 V~, Type Pharao-II 25
Panel-mounted operating hour counter with LCD display,
counting mechanism up to 99 999.9 hours,
operating voltage 12–150 V DC, 24–240 V AC,
Type BZ 148
Panel-mounted time-lag relay, 7 ranges values
0.1 s–100 h, 1 changeover contact
5 A, 250 V~, clock unit, Type TM 345 B
5 A, 250 V~, multifunctional relay, Type TM 345 M
Text for tenders on CD are available free-of-charge on request.
137
Appendix
Quotation and bid texts
Installation and wall/surface mounting devices
Design
Solar time clock
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
Living comfort controller
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
Shutter, blinds and awning control
Clock thermostat for zone regulation
for distribution panel installation
with snap-on fixing*
I4 (N) I4 (L)
I1
I2
I3
t
I1
t
I2
I3
I4
Switching cycle
Output
Housing (mm)
24 h
+ year
+ astro. prog.
1 channel
45 x 35
depth 60
24 h
+ year
+ astro. prog.
2 channels
45 x 105
depth 60
Time switching,
Panic function,
Central ON/OFF,
Presence simulation
4 channels
45 x 72
depth 60
upgrade module
switching
4 channels
45 x 72
depth 60
upgrade module
switching
2 channels
45 x 35
depth 60
upgrade module
dimming
2 channels
45 x 72
depth 60
Shutter
module
4 channels
45 x 72
depth 60
Sensor modul
(+ sensors)
45 x 72
depth 60
Weather sensor
160 x 135
depth 280
System clock
8 channels
45 x 45
depth 60
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 channel
45 x 105
depth 60
24 hours
+ 7 days
2 channels
45 x 105
depth 60
24 hours
1 channel/
2 chennels
175 x 105
depth 75
24 hours/
7 days
1 channel/
2 channels
175 x 105
depth 75
24 hours/
7 days
2 channels
175 x 105
depth 75
* Surface mounting with additional kit or front panel installation see page 31/38.
Time switches for surface mounting
138
Analog devices without power reserve
control device for comfort, 4 channel basic modul, upgradeable
to 16 modules, 4 inputs for additional functions: Central ON
(Light scene, Panic function), Central OFF, Presence simulation,
4 inputs for buttons/switches, channel 1 with current pulse or
Analog devices with power reserve
Digital devices with power reserve
Digital time switch, astronomical, daily, weekly and holiday
program, switches at sunrise and sundown, automatic
summer/winter time correction, weekprogram for controlled night
switch-off. PIN code, 10 years power reserve, EEPROM,
1 change-over switch, 16 A, 250 V~, Type SELEKTA 170 top
Digital time switch, astronomical, yearly, holiday and public
holiday program, switches at sunrise and sundown, automatic
summer/winter time correction, astronomical program with 2
output channels; one channel can be superimposed by the time-
controlled night switch-off, key protection, 2 changeover
switches, 16 A, 250 V~, Type SELEKTA 173 DCF,
DCF 77 antenna
time function (incandescent lamp load button), 1–15 min shut-off
advance warning/resetable and continuous function,
channel 2 with current pulse or time function, 1–20 min
selectable shut-off advance warning,
channel 3 current pulse function,
channel 4 current pulse function for wet rooms (FI),
switching outputs 4 x 16 A/250 V~
Type LUXOR 400
upgrade module, 4 channels, 4 inputs for buttons/switches,
channel 1–4 with same functions as base module LUXOR 400,
switching outputs 4 x 16 A/250 V~
Type LUXOR 404
upgrade module, 2 channels, 2 inputs for buttons/switches,
channel 1–2 current pulse function,
switching outputs 2 x 16 A/250 V~
Type LUXOR 402
Sensor module, extension module, built-in housing (4 TE), quick
fastening, 2-wire COM interface, 3 setting ranges 1000–100,000
lux, 1 setting range 1–100 lux, wind speed 2-20 m/s, temperature
setting range 0 °C–60 °C, switch-on/switch-off delay 80 s,
connection options: max. 3 mounted light sensors and 1 wind
sensor LUXOR 413 or 1 LUXOR 412 weather sensory system and
max. 2 mounted light sensors, LEDs threshold values display,
2 channel dimming module for upgrade, universal dimmer for
various lamp loads, conventional and electronic transformers,
2 dimmer outputs with 300 W/VA each or 1 x 500 W/VA each,
2 inputs for buttons, selection programs for dimming behaviour,
2 inputs for motion detectors
Type LUXOR 405
Power extension of the 2 dimming channels to
2 x 600 W/VA or 1 x 1000 W/VA, Type DMB 2
4-channel shutter module, activation of max. 4 shutter drives or
awnings with commercially available shutter buttons, individual
control UP/DOWN/STOP, central control UP/DOWN, group
function, shading and ventilation function memorizable,
8 x 6 A/250 V~,
Type LUXOR 408 base module
Type LUXOR 409 extension module
operating voltage 230 V~, 50 Hz, Type LUXOR 411
Mounted wind sensor to fit LUXOR 411, wall-mounted housing
IP 43, 24 V DC power supply unit required, Type LUXOR 413
Accessories:
Surface-mounted light sensor to fit LUXOR 411,
Wall-mounted housing IP 54
24 V DC power supply unit to fit LUXOR 413 (wind sensor),
series installation housing (4 TE)
Weather sensory system connectable to sensor module LUXOR
411, wall-mounted housing IP 44, 2-wire COM interface,
brightness and twilight thresholds, rain, wind and temperature
sensors, operating voltage supplied by sensor module LUXOR
411, Type LUXOR 412
Accessories:
Mounting to pole for LUXOR 412 and LUXOR 413
Diameter 60–80 mm
8-channel system clock, extension module, built-in housing with
quick fastener, 2-wire COM interface, 8 channel as desired for
daily, weekly or astronomic programs, 128 freely programmable
switching times and 732 pre-programmed astronomic times,
selector switch for linking the time switch channels to one or
more LUXOR outputs, for positioning drives and setting dimming
values percentage from 0 to 100 % can be transmitted, offset
±120 min, disable time for suppressing or time shifting of
switching signals, automatic summertime/wintertime change,
user guidance by means of text line in the display,
power reserve 5 h, Type LUXOR 414
Built-in zone controller, 1 zone, for remote temperature control,
temperature profile for normal and reduced temperature,
daily, weekly and holiday program, auto. summer/winter
changeover, 6-year power reserve, changeover switch,
10 A/250 V~, Type RAM 366/1 top
Accessories for zone controller
Type remote sensor 1 No. 907 0 191
Type remote sensor 2 with controller ±3 K No. 907 0 192
Built-in zone controller, 2 zones, for remote temperature control,
temperature profile for normal and reduced temperature,
daily, weekly and holiday program, auto. summer/winter
changeover, 6-year power reserve, 2 changeover switches,
10 A/250 V~, Type RAM 366/2 top
Accessories for zone controller
Type remote sensor 1 No. 907 0 191
Type remote sensor 2 with controller ±3 K No. 907 0 192
Surface-mounted time switch with 150 h power reserve,
24 h dial, minimum switching interval 20 min, 1 pole,
6 A, 250 V~, Type SUL 285/1 T
Surface-mounted time switch with 150 h power reserve,
24 h dial, minimum switching interval 20 min, 2 pole,
6 A, 250 V~, Type SUL 285/2 T
Surface-mounted time switch with 150 h power reserve,
switchable 24 h/7 day program, minimum switching interval
20 min/2 h, 1 pole, 6 A, 250 V~, Type SUL 285/1 TW
Surface-mounted time switch with 150 h power reserve,
switchable 24 h/7 day program, minimum switching interval
20 min/2 h, 2 pole, 6 A, 250 V~, Type SUL 285/2 TW
Digital time switch with text in the display and factory preset time,
automatic summer/winter time adjustment, 10 years power reserve,
day and week program, 42 memory locations, EEPROM, 2 channels,
8 A, 250 V~, Type TR 685/2 top
139
Appendix
Quotation and bid texts
Wall/surface mounting devices
Time switches for surface mounting and
panel mounting
Surface mounting with plug-in base or
front panel mounting with clip fastening
Design
Switching cycle
Output
Housing (mm)
24 hours
1 channel
72 x 72
depth 69*
24 hours
+ 7 days
2 channels
72 x 72
depth 69*
1 channel
72 x 72
depth 69*
2 channels
72 x 72
depth 69*
24 hours/
7 days
*Installation depth 54 mm
Digital time switches for
surface mounting and panel mounting
Surface mounting with plug-in base or
front panel mounting with clip fastening
1 channel
72 x 72
depth 69*
2 channels
72 x 72
depth 69*
24 hours
+ 7 days
*Installation depth 54 mm
Digital room thermostat
Flush mounting
Room thermostat
with text line in the display
Room thermostat
radio controlled
140
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
118 x 80
depth 17
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
(thermostat)
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
(thermostat)
Analog devices without power reserve
Analog devices with power reserve
Time switch with plug-in base, without power reserve,
24 h program, minimum switching time 15 min,1 contact,
10 A, 250 V~, Type SYN 169 s
Time switch with plug-in base, 3 d power reserve, 24 h program,
minimum switching time 15 min, 1 contact, 10 A, 250 V~,
Type SUL 189 s
Digital devices with power reserve
Time switch with plug-in base, 3 d power reserve,
switchable 24 h/7 day program, minimum switching time
30 min/12 h, 2 contacts, 10 A, 250 V~, Type SUL 189 hw
Time switch with plug-in base, without power reserve,
switchable 24 h/7 day program, minimum switching time
20 min/2 h, 1 contact, 10 A, 250 V~, Type SYN 269 h
Time switch with plug-in base, 3 d power reserve,
switchable 24 h/7 day program, minimum switching time
20 min/2 h, 1 contact, 10 A, 250 V~, Type SUL 289 h
Time switch with plug-in base, without power reserve,
switchable 24 h/7 day program, minimum switching time
20 min/2 h, 2 contacts, 6 A, 250 V~, Type SYN 269 g
Time switch with plug-in base, 3 d power reserve,
switchable 24 h/7 day program, minimum switching time
20 min/2 h, 2 contacts, 6 A, 250 V~, Type SUL 289 g
Digital time switches with text line and plug-in base, preset time,
automatic summer/winter time, 10 years power reserve, day and
week program, date-controlled holiday program, pulse- and cycle
program, random switching EEPROM, minimum switching time
1 min, permanent ON/OFF/AUTO switching, over-ride switching,
42 memory locations,
1 channel, 16 A, 250 V~, Type TR 635 top
2 channels, 6 A, 250 V~, Type TR 636 top
Room thermostat with text line in the display for information and
user guidance, week program, 2 basic programs, 22 programmable memory locations, setting range 5–30 °C, holiday program
datecontrolled, fully automatic summer/winter time switchover,
frost protection, Party/ECO program with adjustable duration,
power reserve, changeover switch 2 A/250 V~,
Type RAM 822 top
2 x 1.5 V AAA, battery monitoring,
changeover switch 2 A/250 V~, Type RAM 820 top
Room thermostat with text line in the display for information and
user guidance, week program, 2 basic programs, 22 programmable memory locations, setting range 5–30 °C, holiday program
datecontrolled, fully automatic summer/winter time switchover,
frost protection, Party/ECO program with adjustable duration,
power reserve, changeover switch 2 A/250 V~,
Type RAM 812 top pure white
2 x 1.5 V LR 6 alkaline cells, battery monitoring,
changeover switch 2 A/250 V~, Type RAM 811 top pure white
Room temperature control including text line in display for
information and user guidance, weekly program, 2 basic
programs or 3 individual programs, 32 freely programmable
memory locations, 5 temperature levels, optimization, setting
range 6–30 °C, holiday program according to date, autom.
summertime/wintertime change, antifreeze protection, pump
guard, runtime meter, party/ECO program with adjustable
duration, power reserve, changeover contact 2 A/250 V~,
Type RAM 832 top pure white.
2 x 1.5 V AA alkaline, battery monitoring, changeover contact
2 A/250 V~, Type RAM 831 top pure white
Radio controlled clock thermostat with text line in the display for
information and user guidance, week program, 2 basic programs,
22 programmable memory locations, temperature setting range
5–30 °C, holiday program, fully automatic summer/winter time
switchover, transmitter (868 MHz), 2 x 1,5 V, battery monitoring,
1 control and 1 receiver with mains connection, changeover
switch 2 A/250 V~, Type RAM 813 top HF Set 1
2 room thermostats with transmitter and 2-channel receiver,
2 changeover switches 6 A/250 V~,
Type RAM 813 top HF Set 2
4 room thermostats with transmitter and two 2-channel
receivers, 4 changeover switches 6 A/250 V~
Type RAM 813 top HF Set 4
Radio controlled clock thermostat, week program, 6 changeable
standard programs, temperature setting range 5–39 °C, frost
protection, holiday program, transmitter (868 MHz),
2 x 1,5 V battery monitoring, control and 1 receiver with mains
connection in the wall mounting housing,
changeover switch 16 A/250 V~, Type RAM 813 HF Set A
1 control and 1 receiver as earthed intermediate connector,
changeover switch 16 A/230 V~, Type RAM 813 HF Set S
141
Appendix
Quotation and bid texts
Installation devices
Design
Room temperature control
with 2- or 3-point control
and OT box
Floor temperature control
e.g. for bathrooms
Switching cycle
Output
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
(thermostat)
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
(thermostat)
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
(thermostat)
24 hours
+ 7 days
1 zone
98 x 145
depth 32
(thermostat)
Weather-compensated heating control
with household water and circulation
control
98 x 145
depth 32
(thermostat)
24 hours
+ 7 days
Electronic room thermostat
Electronic room thermostat
with 2-wire connection and battery monitoring
Text for tenders on CD are available free-of-charge on request.
142
Housing (mm)
24 hours
1 zone
90 x 150
depth 35
24 hours/
7 days
1 zone
90 x 150
depth 35
24 hours
1 zone
90 x 150
depth 35
24 hours/
7 days
1 zone
90 x 150
depth 35
24 hours/
7 days
1 zone
90 x 150
depth 35
24 hours/
7 days
2 zones
90 x 150
depth 35
Analog devices without power reserve
Analog devices with power reserve
Digital devices with power reserve
Silent digital room temperature control with
2-point control, info key for important information, text line in
display with step-by-step user guidance, weekly program,
selector switch for 2 basic programs with variable temperatures
and an individual program with max. 22 time/temperature
phases, setting range +6 °C–30 °C in steps of 0.2 degrees,
holiday program date-controlled, fully automatic
summertime/wintertime change, party and ECO programs with
adjustable duration, antifreeze protection and summer circuit,
working point and switching difference adjustable, power
supplied by 2-wire bus connection from room thermostat to
control unit with power supply unit and output relay, remote
switching option by phone for comfort and lowering temperature
with
additional voice modem,
thermostat housing color: white
Type RAM 815 top
Silent digital room temperature control with
2-/3-point control or sequence contact control, text line in display
with step-by-step user guidance, weekly program, selector switch
for 2 basic programs with variable temperatures and an
individual program with max. 22 time/temperature phases,
setting range +6 °C–30 °C in steps of 0.2 degrees, holiday
program date-controlled, fully automatic summertime/wintertime
change, party and ECO programs with adjustable duration,
antifreeze protection and summer circuit, working point and
switching difference adjustable, power supplied by 2-wire bus
connection from room thermostat to control unit with power
supply unit and output relay, remote switching option by phone
for comfort and lowering temperature with
additional voice modem,
thermostat housing color: white
Type RAM 816 top
Silent digital room temperature control with 2-/3-point control or
sequence contact control, external temperature sensor for wall
mounting, connection to control unit or to room temperature
control, info key for important information, text line in display
with step-by-step user guidance, weekly program, selector switch
for 2 basic programs with variable temperatures and an
individual program with max. 22 time/temperature phases,
setting range +6 °C–30 °C in steps of 0.2 degrees, holiday
program date-controlled, fully automatic summertime/wintertime
change, party and ECO programs with adjustable duration,
antifreeze protection and summer circuit, working point and
switching difference adjustable, power supplied by 2-wire bus
connection from room thermostat to control unit with power
supply unit and output relay, remote switching option by phone
for comfort and lowering temperature with
additional voice modem, thermostat housing color: white,
remote sensor 74 x 74 mm, white, 1 changeover contact and 1
NO contact 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 817 top
Digital floor temperature control in elegant design with 2-point
control, encapsulated remote temperature sensor IP 54 with 4 m
of connecting cable, info key for important information, text line i
display with step-by-step user guidance, weekday program,
selector switch for 2 bathroom basic programs with variable
temperatures and an individual program with max. 22 time/temperature phases, setting range +6 °C–30 °C in steps of 0.2
degrees, holiday program date-controlled, fully automatic
summertime/wintertime change, party and ECO programs with
adjustable duration, antifreeze protection and summer circuit,
working point and switching difference adjustable, mains
operation, housing color: white, changeover contact
16 A/230 V~ Type RAM 818 top
Weather-compensated heating control for 2-/3-point control,
household water and circulation control, universal digital heating
control with 4-channel digital control, text display, already preprogrammed programs for families and employees, operating unit
and control unit with power supply unit and relay outputs are
connected to a 2-wire bus (protection class III), control of the
boiler supply temperature (heating circuit 1) by burner switching,
control of the supply temperature (heating circuit 2) via pump
control or motor-adjusted mixer, 3-point control with contact
sensor, mixer control includes supply temperature limit for floor
heating, hot water control by switching charge pump, control of
the circulating pump of the hot water circuit time- and temperature-dependent, selector switch for 8 different connection/
function types, automatic sensor detection for weathercompensated or room-compensated control, 3 time programs can
be simply selected by rotary switch, info key for inquiry of time,
date and target, actual and outdoor temperatures, party and Eco
programs with adjustable duration for comfort and lowering
temperatures, holiday program date-controlled, summertime/wintertime change, pump antiseize protection, time program for
household water use times, protection from Legionella for
household water treatment adjustable by heating for a short
period at regular intervals, inputs: outdoor sensor including
supply sensor heating circuit including contact or immersion
sensor for household water available as an option,
contact sensor for circulation available as an option,
outputs: 4 NO contacts 8 (1) A/250 V~
Type RAM 855 top
Room temperature regulator, autom. temperature reduction at
night, 24 h program, programmable every 5 min, electrical
thermostat 10–30 °C, thermal feedback and operating point
setting, change-over switch, 6 A/250 V~, Type RAM 721 white
Room temperature regulator 6–30 °C, electronic, 24 h/7 day
program, programmable every 5 or 30 min, thermal feedback and
operating point setting, changeover switch, 6 A/250 V~,
Type RAM 722 white
Room temperature regulator, electronic, as RAM 722 but with
quartz movement and 3 d power reserve, connection for
telephone remote switch, changeover switch, 6 A/250 V~,
Type RAM 782 white
Room temperature regulator 6–30 °C, electronic, autom. temperature reduction at night, day segment program, programmable
every 15 min, thermal feedback and operating point setting,
changeover switch, 6 A/250 V~, Type RAM 722 s white
Room temperature regulator, electronic, as RAM 722 s but with
quartz movement and 3 d power reserve, connection for telephone
remote switch, changeover switch, 6 A/250 V~,
Type RAM 782 s white
Room temperature regulator, electronic, 24 h/7 day program,
combinable with radiator thermostat valves, regulation of temperature reduction at night 6–30 °C, thermal feedback and operating
point setting, changeover switch, 6 A/250 V~,Type RAM 725
Room temperature regulator 6–30 °C, electronic, 24 h/7 day
program, programmable every 5 or 30 min, thermal feedback and
operating point setting, battery monitoring with display for
battery change, selection switch for operating mode, pump
protection function, connection for telephone remote switch,
changeover switch, 6 A/250 V~, Type RAM 784 white
Room temperature regulator 6–30 °C, electronic, day segment
program, programmable every 15 min, thermal feedback and
operating point setting, battery monitoring with display for
battery change, selection switch for operating mode, pump
protection function, connection for telephone remote switch,
changeover switch, 6 A/250 V~, Type RAM 784 s white
We reserve the right to make technical modifications and improvements.
143
Appendix
Quotation and bid texts
Flush mounting program
Design
Switching cycle
Output
Room thermostats
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
75 x 75
depth 28
1 zone
front
80 x 80
1 zone
front
80 x 80
1 zone
front
80 x 80
1 zone
front
80 x 80
1 zone
front
80 x 80
1 channel
front with frame
84 x 84
Flush mounted room thermostats
Flush mounted time switch
144
24 hours
+ 7 days
Housing (mm)
Analog devices without power reserve
Analog devices with power reserve
Digital devices with power reserve
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller, thermal feedback, also
suitable for large-scale switching programs, opener 10 A/250 V~
Type RAM 701
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with temperature reduction,
thermal feedback, also suitable for large-scale switching
programs, opener 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 702
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with inner setting and
temperature reduction, thermal feedback, also suitable for
large-scale switching programs, opener 10 A/250 V~
Type RAM 703
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with switch for additional
heating ON/OFF + control lamp, thermal feedback, also suitable
for large-scale switching programs, opener 10 A/250 V~
Type RAM 704
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with switch for heating
ON/OFF, thermal feedback, also suitable for large-scale switching
programs, opener 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 705
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with temperature reduction
and switch for heating ON/OFF + control lamp, thermal feedback,
also suitable for large-scale switching programs, opener 10
A/250 V~ Type RAM 706
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with temperature for
heating and additional heating ON/OFF + control lamp, thermal
feedback, also suitable for large-scale switching programs,
opener 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 707
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, controller for heating and/or cooling,
thermal feedback, also suitable for large-scale switching
programs, change-over switch 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 708
Clock thermostat 5–30 °C, same as RAM 708, however
controller for heating and/or cooling and with selection switch for
heating/reduction/time-controlled temperature reduction +
control lamp, change-over switch 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 709
Electronic room temperature controller 5–30 °C, connection for
temperature reduction approx. 3.5 K, LED, for wall mounting or
to big surface switches, opener 8 A, 230 V~ Type RAM 714
Electronic room temperature controller with external temperatur
sensor (4 m), range 10–60 °C, ON/OFF switch for heating, LED,
connection for temperature reduction approx. 3.5/2 K for wall
mounting or to big surface switches, opener 16 A, 230 V~
Type RAM 714 A
Flush mounting room thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with
thermal feedback, opener 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 741
Flush mounting room thermostat 5–30 °C,
controller with temperatur reduction, thermal feedback,
opener 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 742
Flush mounting room thermostat 5–30 °C, controller with
temperatur reduction and switch for heating ON/OFF + control
lamp, thermal feedback, opener 10 A/250 V~ Type RAM 746
Flush mounting room thermostat 5–30 °C, changeover switch
for heating or/and cooling, thermal feedback,
changeover 10 A/5 A (cooling) Type RAM 748
Flush mounting room thermostat 5–30 °C, changeover switch
for heating or/and cooling, thermal feedback, selection switch for
easy operation, time-controlled with time switch, temp. reduction
+ control lamp, changeover 10 A/5 A (cooling) Type RAM 749
Flush mountig-digital-time switch with text oriented user
guidance in the display, autom. summer-/wintertime changeover,
10 years power reserve, day-/weekprogram, 42 memory
locations, 1 channel, 10 A, 250 V~, Type TR 030 top
145
Appendix
Possible special voltages – please state when ordering
110 V
Nominal voltage
Frequency
50 Hz
Voltage tolerance
Type
LUNA 108 (built-in)
LUNA 108 (surface-mounted)
120 V
12 V
12 V=
24 V
24 V=
60 Hz
–15 % +10 %
60 Hz
50 Hz
–
50 Hz
–
● 108 1 760
● 108 1 761
● 108 1 760
● 108 1 761
–15 % +10 %
Extra-low voltage
● 108 1 760
● 108 1 761
● 110 4 710 ● 110 4 710
● 112 4 700 ● 112 4 700
LUNA 110
LUNA 112
● 181 1 008
● 126 1 760
● 127 1 760
● 128 1 760
● 129 1 760
● 161 1 008
● 181 1 008
● 188 1 108
● 189 1 801
● 188 1 108
● 189 1 801
LUNA 126 star
LUNA 127 star
LUNA 128 star
LUNA 129 star-time
SYN 161
SUL 181
● 181 7 008 ● 181 7 008 ● 181 4 008 ● 181 4 008
● 184 4 908
● 188 7 008 ● 188 7 008
SUL 184
SUL 188 h
SUL 188 hw
SUL 189 S
● 198 7 008
MEM 198
● 289 4 008 ● 289 4 008
SUL 289
● 722 4 030
● 782 4 030
RAM 722
RAM 782
SELEKTA 170 top
SELEKTA 173 DCF
TR 610 top
TR 611 top
TR 612 top
TR 622 top
● 170 1 814
● 173 0 001
● 610 1 815
● 611 1 815
● 612 1 815
● 622 1 815
● 170 1 814
● 173 0 001
● 610 1 815
● 611 1 815
● 612 1 815
● 622 1 815
● 170 1 814
● 173 0 001
● 610 1 815
● 611 1 815
● 612 1 815
● 622 1 815
TR 641 S
TR 642 S
● 644 8 110
TR 644 S
Type
110 V/50 Hz
BZ 142-1
● 142 1 721
230/240 V/60 Hz
● 142 0 621
● 610 4 002
● 611 4 002
● 612 4 002
● 622 4 002
● 641 8 012
● 642 8 012
● 644 8 012
● 610 4 002
● 611 4 002
● 612 4 002
● 622 4 002
● 641 9 012
● 642 9 012
● 644 9 012
● 610 4 002
● 611 4 002
● 612 4 002
● 622 4 002
24 V/50 Hz
48 V/50 Hz
● 610 4 002
● 611 4 002
● 612 4 002
● 622 4 002
● 644 8 024 ● 644 8 024
● 142 4 721 ● 142 5 721
BZ 142-3
BZ 145
● 143 1 721
● 145 1 000
Type
10–80 VDC
BZ 142-1
● 142 0 821
● 142 0 823
● 143 0 821
BZ 143-1
BZ 142-3
BZ 143-1
● 143 4 721
● 145 4 000
24 –48 VDC
● 145 9 024
BZ 145
Type
24 V AC/DC 50–60 Hz
12–24 V DC
BZ 147
● 147 4 000
● 147 9 000
● available Other special voltages – for above mentioned and other devices of our range – on request.
t®, ELPA®, LUNA®, RAMSES®, CHEOPS®, TERMINA® and LUXOR® are registered trade marks from Theben AG in Germany and other countries.
• Subject to technical alterations.
146
Appendix
Selection table for digital and analog time switches
DIGITAL
Program
Contacts
distance
< 3 mm (µ)
24 h
+
7 days
Yearprogram
Program
60 min
ANALOG
24 h
7 days
24 h
or
7 days
adjustable
24 h + 7 days
same daily
program on
certain
weekdays
Contacts
distance
< 3 mm (µ)
Contacts
trippable
every...
Minimum
switching
time
Nominal
current at
250 V~
Power
reserve
approx.
Distributor Wallpanel
mounting
installation
Switch
panel
install.
Flush
mounting
Type
1s
1s
1s
1s
1 min
1 min
1 min
1s
1s
1 min
1 min
1 min
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1 min
1 min
1 min
1s
1s
1 min
1 min
1 min
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
10 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
6A
6A
10 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
10 years
10 years
10 years
8 years
3 years
10 years
10 years
10 years
8 years
10 years
10 years
10 years
8 years
1,5 years
1,5 years
1,5 years
1,5 years
1,5 years
1,5 years
–
–
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
–
–
–
–
–
–
TR 030 top
TR 611 top 2
TR 611 top 2 RC
TR 651 S
TR 608 top
TR 610 top 2
TR 635 top
TR 622 top 2
TR 652 S
TR 612 top 2
TR 636 top
TR 685/2 top
TR 653 S
TR 641 S
TR 641 S DCF
TR 642 S
TR 642 S DCF
TR 644 S
TR 644 S DCF
Contacts
trippable
every...
Minimum
switching
time
Nominal
current at
250 V~
18,5 s
37,5 s
75 s
15 min
15 min
15 min
15 min
15 min
15 min
30 min
30 min
5 min
15 min
15 min
5 min
2h
1h
5/30 min
5/30 min
5 min
5/30 min
5/30 min
5/30 min
15 min
15 min
15 min
1,25 min
2 min
75 s
15 min
15 min
15 min
15 min
30 min
30 min
30 min
30 min
20 min
30 min
30 min
20 min
2h
3h
20 min/2 h
20 min/2 h
20 min
20 min/2 h
20 min/2 h
20 min/2 h
30 min
45 min
45 min
10 A
10 A
10 A
16 A
16 A
10 A
10 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
16 A
6A
10 A
10 A
6A
16 A
16 A
10 A
10 A
6A
6A
6A
6A
10 A
10 A
10 A
–
•
•
•
–
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
–
–
–
•
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Distributor
panel
installation
Wallmounting
–
3 days
•
•
•
•
3 days
–
–
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 days
3 days
150 h
3 days
150 h
3 days
3 days
3 days
150 h
3 days
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3 days
•
•
3 days
150 h
–
–
Power
reserve
approx.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Switch
panel
install.
Type
•
TM 179 h
TM 178 h
TM 171 h
SYN 160 a
SUL 180 a
SYN 169 s
SUL 189 s
SYN 168 h
SUL 188 h
SYN 161 h
SUL 181 h
SUL 285/1 T
SYN 168 g
SUL 188 g
SUL 285/2 T
MEM 190 a
MEM 198 h
SYN 269 h
SUL 289 h
SUL 285/1 TW
SYN 269 g
SUL 289 g
SUL 285/2 TW
SUL 189 hw
SYN 168 hw
SUL 188 hw
–
–
–
–
•
•
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
•
•
–
•
•
–
•
–
–
Page
33
22
22
26
21
22
31
22
26
22
31
32
26
28
28
28
28
28
28
Page
18
12
11
10
10
16
16
12
12
11
11
20
12
12
20
10
12
14
14
20
14
14
20
18
12
12
• especially suitable – suitable to a limited extent
147
Theben AG worldwide
Group companies – Agencies
HEADQUARTERS
Theben AG
Hohenbergstr. 32
D-72401 Haigerloch
Postfach 56
D-72394 Haigerloch
Phone +49 74 74/6 92-0
Fax +49 74 74/6 92-15 0
[email protected]
www.theben.de
THEBEN GROUP
COMPANIES
TIMEGUARD LTD
Victory Park
400 Edgeware Road
London NW2 6ND
Phone +44 208 4508944
Fax +44 208 4525143
[email protected]
www.timeguard.com
THEBEN S.A.R.L.
Zone Industrielle des Vignes
32–38 rue Bernard
93012 Bobigny cédex
Phone +33 1 49159700
Fax +33 1 48445761
[email protected]
www.theben.fr
THEBEN (Schweiz) AG
Riedstrasse 6
8953 Dietikon
Phone +41 43 3211370
Fax +41 43 3211375
[email protected]
www.theben.ch
THEBEN S.R.L.
Via Ciro Menotti 11
20129 Milano
Phone +39 02 7386141/2/3
Fax +39 02 7386144
[email protected]
www.theben.it
148
WORLDWIDE AGENCIES
A
SIBLIK ELEKTRIK GMBH & CO. KG
Murbangasse 6
1100 Wien
Phone +43 1 680060
Fax +43 1 68006543
[email protected]
www.siblik.at
AUS
OMRON ELECTRONICS PTY LTD
Omron House, 71 Epping Road
North Ryde NSW 2113
Phone +61 2 9878 6377
Fax +61 2 9878 6981
[email protected]
www.omron.com.au
B
TEMPOLEC SA.
49, Route de Biesme
6530 Thuin
Phone +32 71 590039
Fax +32 71 590161
[email protected]
www.tempolec.be
CDN
DAVIS CONTROLS LIMITED
2200 Bristol Circle
Oakville Ontario L6H 5R3
Phone +1 905 8292000
Fax +1 905 8292630
[email protected]
www.daviscontrols.com
CZ
ELEKTRO SYSTEM TECHNIK SPOL. S.R.O.
Pod Pekarnami 338/12
19000 Praha 9 – Vysocany
Phone +42 02 66090711
Fax +42 02 66090717
[email protected]
www.est-praha.cz
EE
VALLIN BALTIC AS
Mäepealse 2
12618 Tallinn
Phone +372 2 6593200
Fax +372 2 6593201
[email protected]
www.vallin.ee
ET
MOUNADELCO ENGINEERING &
TRADING CO
241, El Hegaz Street Flat 8
Heliopolis, Cairo
Phone +20 2 2451631
Fax +20 2 6383497
[email protected]
FIN
GYCOM FINLAND OY
P.O. Box 15
Työpajankatu 10 A
00581 Helsinki
Phone +358 9 25252100
Fax +358 9 25252177
[email protected]
www.gycom.com
GR
CONSTANTACATOS BROTHERS SA.
17 Km Ethnikis Athinon – Lamias
145-64 Kifissia
Phone +30 210 6252001
Fax +30 210 6252012
[email protected]
www.akbros.gr
H
KAMLEITHNER KFT BUDAPEST
Rákóczi Ferenc ‘tu 189
1214 Budapest
Phone +36 1 4253288
Fax +36 1 4253288
[email protected]
www.theben.hu
DK
GYCOM DANMARK A/S
Valloraekken 26, Valloby
4600 Köge
Phone +45 56266635
Fax +45 56267778
[email protected]
www.gycom.com
HK
FRIENDS ENVIRONMENTAL MATERIAL
COMPANY LTD
Room 806, 8/F., Fortress Tower
250 King’s Road, North Point
Hong Kong SAR
Phone +852 29519710
Fax +852 29510331
[email protected]
www.friends88.com
E
GUIJARRO HERMANOS SL.
Poligono Industrial “Virgen de butarque“
Isaac Peral, 6
28914 Leganes (Madrid)
Phone +34 91 6870022
Fax +34 91 6876616
[email protected]
www.guijarro-hnos.es
RI
P. T. GUNA ERA DISTRIBUSI
Jl Rawa Gelam 2 No. 8 Jakarta 13930
Phone +62 21 46825050
Fax +62 21 46824758
[email protected]
www.gae.co.id
IL
GALOZ ELECTRONICS LTD.
P. O. Box 35
Rosh Ha’ayin 40850
Galoz Building
15, Hameretz Street
Rosh Ha’ayin 48017
Phone +972 3 9023456
Fax +972 3 9021990
[email protected]
www.galoz.co.il
IND
INDO ASIAN MARKETING LTD.
B 200 Phase II
Noida 201 305 U. P
Phone +91 120 2563445
Fax +91 120 2563442
[email protected]
www.indoasian.com
IR
S.G. RIAZI TRADING
P.O. Box 14185/599
No.4, Bld. 12, Parastoo St., Valiasr Ave.
Tehran
Phone +98 21 88890340
Fax +98 21 88918159
[email protected]
www.sgrtrading.com
IRL
LXL DISTRIBUTORS LTD
90/4 Lagan Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Phone +353 1 8304666
Fax +353 1 8305788
[email protected]
IS
REYKJAFELL LTD.
Skipholti 35
105 Reykjavik
Phone +354 1 5886010
Fax +354 1 5886088
[email protected]
www.reykjafell.is
JOR/SYR
BOUZO CO.
P. O . Box 33175
Damascus/Syria
Phone +963 11 331306
Fax +963 11 3339898
[email protected]
K
HKS HANKUK SANGSA CO
576-8, Bisang-2dong, Dongan-Ku
Anyang-city, Kyungki-do 431-821
Phone +82 31 463 3300
Fax +82 31 4633398/9
[email protected]
www.hanmec.co.kr
LE
EST. GARABED AYANIAN & SONS
P. O. Box 175-214
176 Gouraud Avenue
Beirut
Phone +961 1 447940 or 445096
Fax +961 1 582357
[email protected]
Mr. [email protected]
LT
UAB VALLIN BALTIC
Str. Seimyniskiu g. 5A
9312 Vilnius
Phone +370 5 2728893
Fax +370 5 2728843
[email protected]
www.vallinbaltic.com
LV
VALLIN BALTIC SIA
Maskavas str 322
1063 Riga
Phone +371 718 7204
Fax +371 718 7205
[email protected]
www.vallinbaltic.com
MA
GENERAL TECHNICS
22 Rue Rahal Ben Ahmed
(Ex. Rue Dinant)
Casablanca
Phone +212 22 245877
Fax +212 22 243716
[email protected]
MEX
MR INSTRUMENTOS
Xochicalco 639-5
3650 Col. Letran Valle
Mexico D.F.
Phone +52 5 688 6251
Fax +52 5 688 6251
[email protected]
Mr. German Mitre
N
GYLLING TEKNIKK A/S
P. O. Box 103
Rudsletta 71–75
1309 Rud
Phone +47 67 151400
Fax +47 67 151401
[email protected]
www.gylling.no
NL
HEMMINK B.V.
Postbus 40013
Ampèrestraat 24–28
8004 DA Zwolle
Phone +31 38 4698200
Fax +31 38 4698210
[email protected]
www.hemmink.nl
NZ
OMRON ELECTRONICS PTY LTD
65 Boston Road
Grafton Auckland
Phone +64 9 358 4400
Fax +64 9 358 4411
[email protected]
www.omron.co.nz
OM
STARS LIGHT L.L.C.
P.O. Box 2822
P.C. 112
Ruwi
Phone +968 697025
Fax +968 600217
[email protected]
P
DNL-DUARTE NEVES, L.DA
Rua D do Núcleo Empresarial
de Venda do Pinheiro
Quinta dos Estrangeiros, PAVIHAO 78
2665-601 Venda do Pinheiro
Phone +351 219 668100
Fax +351 219 668109
[email protected]
www.duarteneves.pt
PH
AVESCO MARKETING CORPORATION
810 Aurora Blvd., corner Yale St.
1109 Cubao, Quezon City
Phone +63 2 9128881
Fax +63 2 9122911/9122999
[email protected]
www.avesco.com.ph
PL
ISTPOL SP.J.
Ul. Rydygiera 12
01-793 Warszawa
Phone +48 22 6639350
Fax +48 22 6634815
[email protected]
www.istpol.pl
PPUH EL-TEAM
al. Mlodych 26–28
41-106 Siemianowice
Phone +48 322 2043628
Fax +48 322 200005
[email protected]
www.el-team.com.pl
RA
HERTIG SA.
Bolivar 1335 C1141AAD
1141 Buenos Aires
Phone +54-11-43617136
Fax +54-11-43003372
[email protected]
www.hertig.com.ar
RC
CANAAN ELECTRIC CORP.
P. O. 6F5
No. 63 Sec 2 Chang An East Rd.
Taipei, TAIWAN
Phone +886 2 25082331
Fax +886 2 25084744
[email protected]
www.canaan-elec.com.tw
RCH
IMPORTADORA SCHARFSTEIN SA
P. O. Box 10392
Santiago 1
Phone +56 2 7372020
Fax +56 2 7776120
[email protected]
TR
DAMEKS IC DIS TICARET VE SAN.A.S.
1400 Sokak No: 2/1
35220 Alsancak IZMIR
Phone +90 232 464 54 48
Fax +90 232 422 33 49
[email protected]
www.dameks.com
RDU
BERON S.A.
Av. San Martin 2761
11800 Montevideo
Phone +598 2 2002862
Fax +598 2 2095382
[email protected]
UA
KVK-ELECTRO, LTD.
43 Kikvidze Str.
01103 Kyiv
Phone +380 44 4962886
Fax +380 44 4962885
[email protected]
RU
MARBEL
pr. Mira 72
Mosbusinesscentre
129110 Moscow
Phone + 7 495 797-9414
[email protected]
www.marbel.ru
UAE
BIN HAM ELECTROMECH. EST.
P. O. Box 46844
Abu Dhabi
Phone +971 4 6742273939
Fax +971 4 2217619
[email protected]
S
GYCOM SVENSKA AB
Box 1203
Stockholmsvägen 116
18312 Täby
Phone +46 8 56201100
Fax +46 8 7920654
[email protected]
www.gycom.com
SA
ANWAR AL-WESSAM EST.
P. O. Box 23521
Gurabi Bin Shaihon Center
Riyadh 11426
Phone +966 1 4055942
Fax +966 1 4051631
[email protected]
www.al-wessam.com
SGP
ITE ELECTRIC CO LTD
1 Harrison Road 01–01,
ITE Electrical Building
Singapore 369652
Phone +65 65 62852233
Fax +65 65 62843256
[email protected]
www.ite.com.sg
Impressum
Client:
Theben AG, Haigerloch
Advertising Manager:
Klaus Tielmann
Realisation:
Theben AG, Haigerloch
Design by:
Anja Köhler/Theben AG
Sources of pictures:
Studio Koelle,
Theben AG
Print:
ST Elser, Haigerloch
T
TECHNOLOGY INSTRUMENTS CO. LTD
208/132-137 Pattanakarn Rd.,
Pravet, Bangkok 10250
Phone +662 722 2233
Fax +662 722 3047
[email protected]
www.tic.co.th
SLO
OKO TECH D.O.O.
Ul. Mileve Zakrajskove 9
2000 Maribor
Phone +386 22509334
Fax +386 22509335
[email protected]
USA
LUMENITE ELECTRONIC CO.
2331 North 17th. Av.
Franklin Park Ill. 60131
Phone +1 847 4551450
Fax +1 847 4550127
[email protected]
www.lumenite.com
VN
THIEN NGHI TRADING & SERVICES CO. LTD.
80-82-84 D11 Street, Tan Binh Industrial Park
Tay Thanh Ward, Tan Phu District, HCMC
Phone +84 8 8150 136/138
Fax +84 8 8150 137
[email protected]
www.thiennghi.com
YU
RAROVAC KOMERC PODGORICA
Bracana Bracanovica 6
81000 Podgorica
Phone +38 1 81609091
Fax +38 1 81609091
[email protected]
ZA
SUPARULE SA (PTY) LTD.
Sebenza Mini Unit, Units No. 1
26 Simba Road
Sebenza Edenvale, Gauteng
Phone +27-(0)11-4529800
Fax +27-(0)11- 4529828
[email protected]
www.suparule.co.za
149
Discontinued models
THEBEN-device type
Order No.
Order data of the successors
see pages above
Discontinued models:
Successors
Elpa 5 plus
SYN 168 g
SYN 168 hw
SYN 169 h
SUL 189 h
SUL 189 g
MEM 199 h
RAM 382 F
TM 345 EP
TM 345 EP1
TR 610 top
TR 611 top
TR 612 S
TR 612 top
TR 617
TR 618
TR 622 top
TR 627
TR 628
RAM 701
RAM 702
RAM 703
RAM 704
RAM 705
RAM 706
RAM 707
RAM 708
RAM 709
Adapter plate (flush-type box)
RAM 741
RAM 741 RA
RAM 742
RAM 742 RA
RAM 746
RAM 746 RA
RAM 748
RAM 748 RA
RAM 749
RAM 749 RA
Frame set (for RAM 741–749)
RAM 795 HF Set A (top-mounting)
RAM 795 HF Set S (earthed)
RAM 797 N white
RAM 797 N titan
RAM 797 B white
RAM 797 B titan
RAM 797 HF Set 1
RAM 797 HF Set 2
RAM 797 HF Set 4
RAM 798
RAM 818 top
RAM 820 top silber battery power
RAM 822 top silber standard power
Actuator 230 V~
Actuator 24 V~
005 0 001
168 0 033
168 0 108
169 0 008
189 0 008
189 0 033
199 0 008
382 0 033
345 0 801
345 0 802
610 0 002
611 0 002
612 0 001
612 0 002
617 0 000
618 0 000
622 0 002
627 0 000
628 0 000
701 0 000
702 0 000
703 0 000
704 0 000
705 0 000
706 0 000
707 0 000
708 0 000
709 0 000
907 0 212
741 0 030
741 0 031
742 0 030
742 0 031
746 0 030
746 0 031
748 0 030
748 0 031
749 0 030
749 0 031
907 0 322
795 9 401
795 9 403
797 0 030
797 0 065
797 9 130
797 9 165
797 9 401
797 9 402
797 9 404
798 0 030
818 0 032
820 9 013
822 0 033
907 0 261
907 0 262
EIB/KNX-discontinued models
LU 110 EIB/KNX with surface-mounted light sensor
LU 131 EIB/KNX
Weather station EIB/KNX
RMG 4 EIB/KNX
RME 4 EIB/KNX
RAM 710 EIB/KNX
Actuator 230 V EIB/KNX
Actuator 24 V EIB/KNX
Actuator 24 V EIB/KNX without transformer
110 9 200
131 9 200
132 9 200
490 0 204 *
490 0 205
710 9 200
907 0 248
907 0 249
907 0 325 *
ELPA 6, ELPA 1
SUL 188 g
SUL 188 hw
SYN 169 s or SYN 269 h
SUL 189 s or SUL 289 h
SUL 289 g
SUL 289 h
RAM 816 top
TR 611 top2
TR 611 top2
TR 610 top2
TR 611 top2
TR 612 top2
TR 612 top2
TR 641 S
TR 635 top, TR 641 S with terminal cover
TR 622 top2
TR 642 S with terminal cover
TR 636 top, TR 642 S with terminal cover
RAM 701 0 001
RAM 702 0 001
RAM 703 0 001
RAM 704 0 001
RAM 705 0 001
RAM 706 0 001
RAM 707 0 001
RAM 708 0 001
RAM 709 0 001
Adapter plate 907 0 480
RAM 741 0 130
RAM 741 0 131
RAM 742 0 130
RAM 742 0 131
RAM 746 0 130
RAM 746 0 131
RAM 748 0 130
RAM 748 0 131
RAM 749 0 130
RAM 749 0 131
no successor
RAM 813 top HF Set A
RAM 813 top HF Set S
RAM 812 top
RAM 812 top
RAM 811 top
RAM 811 top
RAM 813 top HF Set 1
RAM 813 top HF Set 2
RAM 813 top HF Set 4
RAM 818 top
RAM 818 top -> 818 0 035 + 818 0 036
RAM 820 top white
RAM 822 top white
Actuator ALPHA 4 230 V
Actuator ALPHA 4 24 V
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
LU 130 EIB/KNX with surface-mounted light sensor
LU 131 EIB/KNX -> 131 9 201
Weather station EIB/KNX with rain sensor
RMG 4S, RMG 4C-Last
RME 4S, RME 4C-Last
RAM 713 EIB
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 230 V
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 24 V
Actuator ALPHA 4 EIB/KNX 24 V
* = no longer available
t
150
FAX form
Order for advertising material
Telefax +49 (0) 74 74/6 92-19 9
or local office see pages 124/125
Please ask for our comprehensive and free info material!
Theben catalogue
»Digital timers« brochure
Theben EIB/KNX catalogue
»RAMSES thermostats« brochure
»RAMSES complete program« brochure
»LUXOR« brochure
»ELPA Stairway light timers« brochure
»LUNA star« brochure
»LUNA & SELEKTA« brochure
»SELEKTA 170 top« brochure
»Socket devices« brochure
»TERMINA top2« brochure
Theben-CD complete with entire product
»PHARAO-II programmable
line, LUXOR configurator, PHARAO and
control units« brochure
OBELISK demo software, LUNA star-time
simulation, SELEKTA 170 top simulation,
EIB product database, announcement texts,
manuals and operating instructions
Sender
Company
Contact person
Street
Zip Code/City
Telephone
Mobile telephone
Telefax
e-mail
Business
Industry
Wholesales
I would like to consult with one of your expert advisers.
Theben AG, Hohenbergstraße 32, 72401 Haigerloch, www.theben.de, Telephone +49 (0) 74 74/6 92-0, Telefax +49 (0) 74 74/6 92-150
f
ro m s p e c i a l i s t s
for specialists
Theben AG
Hohenbergstraße 32, 72401 Haigerloch
Postfach 56, 72394 Haigerloch, GERMANY
Phone +49 (0) 74 74/692-0
Fax +49 (0) 74 74/692-150
e-mail: [email protected], www.theben.de
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement